JP2023080319A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes display means. The display means includes a first display area and a second display area, and changes a display state of the first display area based on first information in a first game state, and based on second information in a second game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 113

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are undergoing technical improvements from various perspectives such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games and providing more sound games ( For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-172988 A

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further improvements in technology in order to increase the interest in games and provide more sound games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[form]
A gaming machine comprising display means,
The display means is
having a first display area and a second display area;
A game characterized in that the display state of the first display area is changed based on the first information in the first game state, and is changed based on the second information in the second game state. machine.

According to the gaming machine of the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a win-win table stored in a win-win table storage area; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a suggestive effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine in a standby state. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied after the volume of background music has become zero and before display of a demonstration moving image is started; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is met while the volume of background music is being reduced; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for start mouths. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows condition judging processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending time setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; It is a flow chart which shows processing for waiting. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; 10 is a flow chart showing start-up command handling processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows opening production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a standby state transition process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; It is a time chart which shows the process which the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment performs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of the symbol display device when executing the suggestive effect in the preceding game round. It is a time chart which shows the process which the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a time chart which shows the process which the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment performs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a setting process for effect types; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A, which is an object image; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an object B, which is an object image; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an object C, which is an object image; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for object A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement/timing setting table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview effect in which a plurality of objects are combined; 10 is a flow chart showing a process for setting an effect type; FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of a setting process for effect types in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display object table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for AC; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an AB display pattern table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) is set; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a BC display pattern table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is set; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3/C1) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an ABC display pattern table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the effect type in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the sequel production|presentation performed as a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is met while the pattern display device is displaying the background moving image; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is met while the symbol display device is displaying the demonstration moving image; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a transition condition is met while the symbol display device is displaying the RTC effect moving image; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is met while the symbol display device is displaying the RTC effect moving image; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing RTC rendering processing executed in the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing standby state transition processing executed in the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the display-side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment performs. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating suggestion effects executed by a pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating suggestion effects executed by a pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of winning in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining a storage area for pending effect in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a parameter setting process for holding effect in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing display level upper limit value setting processing in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit value table in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the production setting process in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a pending|holding effect setting process in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending effect content determination processing in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending effect determination table in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a storage area for pending effect in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a parameter setting process for holding effect in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a pending effect setting process in the ninth embodiment FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending effect content determination processing in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment (additional example 1). It is a storage area for holding effects in the tenth embodiment (another example 1). It is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment (another example 2). It is an explanatory view showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment (additional example 3). It is an explanatory view showing a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment (additional example 4). It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and a display surface that are variably displayed in the symbol display device according to the eleventh embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for the jackpot lottery etc. in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a right/wrong table for the first starting port in the eleventh embodiment; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the right/wrong table for the 2nd starting openings in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing contents of a sorting table in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an electric accessory open lottery success/failure table used when executing an electric accessory open lottery in the eleventh embodiment. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment performs. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a result image in the pattern display device of the eleventh embodiment; It is a time chart explaining other examples of processing which a pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view explaining the display mode of the demonstration picture which the pachinko machine in 11th execution form displays. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between the RTC effect moving image and the demonstration moving image in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a start opening executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a through gate executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing game round control processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing variation start processing for the first symbol display section executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing game count processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a hold information shift process for the first symbol display section executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing determination processing for the first symbol display section executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a process of setting a variation time for the first symbol display section, which is executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing high-probability mode termination processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing variation start processing for the second symbol display section executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a hold information shift process for the second symbol display section executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing determination processing for the second symbol display section executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a process of setting a variation time for the second symbol display section, which is executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing round number setting processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a ball entry counter setting process executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a maximum winning opening time setting process executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing V winning opening opening/closing processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing V winning opening opening limit time setting processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing ending time setting processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an electrician support process executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing electrical opening/closing processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball launch control process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. FIG. 20 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing special 1 game round effect processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing special 2 game round effect processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing standby processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing transition preparation processing for special 1 executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing transition preparation processing for Special 2 executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main demo shift processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing sub-demonstration transition processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing return processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing RTC rendering processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing result display processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a display-side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the display-side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the display-side MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing result display processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in mode 12 of the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of a right-handed unit included in a pachinko machine of a twelfth embodiment; It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the game ball which reached|attained the right-handed unit of 12th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an image displayed on the symbol display device during the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the number of remaining acquired balls when winning a big win in the big win lottery in the high probability mode; FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an object D that can be used for the advance notice effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an image (object D+image E) obtained by combining image E with object D;

An embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
A4. Overview of processing in the waiting state:
A5. Various processing executed in the main controller:
A6. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
A7. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment (an example of processing for setting the effect type):
F. Sixth embodiment (another example of processing for setting effect types):
G. Seventh Embodiment (Configuration with RTC):
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M. Variant:
N. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") as one embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button for stopping shooting of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided for detecting a dynamic operation amount based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are both open upward, and arranged vertically so that the first starting port 33 is higher than the second starting port 34 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 uses the win as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize, and flows down to the second It is possible to win a prize to the starting port 34. - 特許庁In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big win lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can win and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in the open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, when a big win is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the big winning port 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 becomes possible. Similarly, when a big win is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the big winning port 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the jackpot lottery triggered by winning the first starting port 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a changes the display mode until the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second result display unit 37b, when the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 34 is performed, changes the display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory open lottery triggered by the winning of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. In addition, the special figure unit 37 and the general figure unit 38 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery process and lottery results.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is satisfied. 36b is a game that continues the open state. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated and a new game cycle is started.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first result display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the winning to the first start port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numbers 1 to 8. As shown in FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the first result display section 37a or the second result is displayed for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, the main control board 61, as various detection sensors 67a to 67e, is provided in various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. connected to multiple detection sensors. The main side MPU 62 of the main control board 61 performs winning determination as to whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA during the game has entered each winning hole. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on winnings to the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on winnings to the through gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45. display control.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the winning to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the winning to the first starting opening 33 is specified. When it does, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when the winning to the second start port 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. A prize command is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls. A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types, such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for a ready-to-win lottery for determining whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the pattern display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b is composed of a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 sequentially, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning is chronologically stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. stored in

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start hole 33 or the second start hole . Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 as a success/failure table.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7(a), under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), under the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, 20 random numbers are selected to win the jackpot. In addition, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types such as variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole . More specifically, it is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball has won the first start port 33, and the reservation information is stored at the timing when the game ball has won the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot types in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for big winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b. can be set to continue until there are 10.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a variable probability lottery mode for performing a jackpot lottery using a high probability win/fail table as a win/fail table, and a win/fail table as a win/fail table. A normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a success/failure table for low probability can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability win-or-fail table, the jackpot is won more than when the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability win-or-fail table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode The number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role opening win is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time may be set longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start port 33 is higher than the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start port 34 is more likely than the first start port 33. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is won in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player should play the game while not reducing the number of balls he has. can be done.

In addition, the configuration in which the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is higher than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning an open role is increased. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of secured time are prepared after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed, the high frequency support mode has a low frequency It may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured after one electric accessary item opening lottery is performed and the next electric accessary item opening lottery is performed is reduced. Shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the probability of winning, by applying any one or any combination of conditions, even if the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode is increased good.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In this embodiment, when a big win is won in a big win lottery, a plurality of types of big wins are sorted using a big win type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8( a ), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second start port 34 are the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot. is set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. corresponds to That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all jackpots based on winnings to the second starting port 34 are variable probability jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot win based on the winning to the first start port 33 and the second jackpot win. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the starting port 34.例文帳に追加

In this way, the mode of distributing the jackpot types between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 has a clear difference in the advantages for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting to win a prize in the second starting hole 34 out of the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 . In addition, when the win/loss lottery results in a failure, there is no transition to the open/close execution mode, and the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode do not change.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port . Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the timing when the game ball wins the second start port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM64. Then, after moving to the execution area AE, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. It is checked against a table to determine whether or not to generate reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 decides whether to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming the reach line. , in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 performs a variable display of the symbol to achieve a reach. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. FIG. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbols by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 249, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be open, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be closed.

In addition, a combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra corresponds to the reservation information related to the first start port 33, and the second reservation area Rb A combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in corresponds to the hold information related to the second start port 34, and these hold information are the special information in the present invention Equivalent to.

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. In this description, the features of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described using two cases, case a1 and case a2, as examples.

FIG. 9(a) shows, as case a1, that a jackpot lottery is won in the first game round (hereinafter also simply referred to as "jackpot"), and the jackpot is won in the second game round that is executed after the first game round. It shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is lost. In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot lottery in the game round immediately before the first game round is lost and there is no other game round between the first game round and the second game round. give an explanation. It should be noted that another game round may exist between the first game round and the second game round. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game cycle, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. The notice effect is a effect that is executed immediately before or after the start of the pattern variation, and is a effect for suggesting to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. The ready-to-win effect is an effect to be executed after the ready-to-win effect, and is an effect to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game cycle. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result notification effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The special game state is a state in which a privilege is given to the player. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the start of the opening/closing execution mode as the opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening/closing execution mode in which opening and closing of the opening/closing door 36b are repeated. During the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect. As shown in FIG. 9A, in this description, the period for executing the ending effect is called the ending period.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. The suggestive effect is a effect that suggests reproducing the effect that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestive effect is a effect suggesting reproduction of the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect, and the result notification effect selected and executed from a plurality of types in the first game cycle. Also, the special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect that has already been executed in the special game state.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect, which will be described later. FIG. 10(a) shows a suggested effect, FIG. 10(b) shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10(c) shows a specific start effect. The suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10(a) is an effect suggesting that the female character reproduces the effect executed in the first game round, that is, the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect, and the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestive effect in the ending period, and then, as the special game state reproduction effect, the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round. run it again. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the ready-to-win effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game round are reproduced. Only part of the announcement production may be reproduced. For example, when executing a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a result notification effect as special game state reproduction effects, the reach effect and the result notification effect are reproduced preferentially, and some or all of the notice effect is omitted and executed. good too. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are executed at a high frequency in normal times, and preferentially reproducing reach effects and result notification effects (jackpot notifications) that are executed only during reach or jackpot, players can A special game state reproduction performance can be executed by narrowing down to performances that are strongly desired to be reproduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game round. The content of the design is partly different.

After executing the special game state reproduction performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end performance. FIG. 10(b) shows an example of a specific end effect. As shown in the figure, the specific end effect in this embodiment is a effect that suggests that the female character has finished the special game state reproduction effect.

The description is returned to FIG. 9(a). The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state when the specific ending effect ends. After that, the second game round is executed. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect (also called a normal notice effect) for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery and a result notification effect (losing notice). Case a1 has been described above.

Next, case a2 will be described. FIG. 9(b) shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 as case a2 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round as well. .

As shown in FIG. 9(b), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game cycle. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result notification effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the start of the opening/closing execution mode as the opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening/closing execution mode in which opening and closing of the opening/closing door 36b are repeated. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect during the ending period.

In the case of case a2, unlike case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect during the ending period. The content of the suggestive effect is the same as the content of the suggestive effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state when the suggestive effect ends. That is, the ending period for case a2 is shorter than the ending period for case a1.

The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state when the suggestive effect ends. After that, the second game round is executed. In case a2, the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round as well. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game round reproduction effect as an effect in the second game round. The game round reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect that has already been executed in the game round. In this embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced as the game round reproduction effect. That is, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect (jackpot notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, this result notification effect (jackpot notification) has a function as a part of the game round reproduction effect, and has a function as a result notification for the big win lottery in the second game round. Then, the second game round ends when the game round reproduction effect ends.

It should be noted that, although it will be described later using a flowchart, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. That is, in case a2, since both the first game round and the second game round are game rounds in which the jackpot lottery was won, the fluctuation time of the first game round and the fluctuation of the second game round time is the same. Therefore, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round can be executed as the game round reproduction effect in the second game round.

In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the fluctuation times of the game rounds in which the jackpot lottery is won are all constant. , the variation time of the game round at the time of the big win may be different each time. In this case, if the second game round is longer than the first game round, at the start of the second game round, the time difference between the fluctuation times of the second game round and the first game round (Surplus time) may be used to perform a suggestion effect prepared in advance. By preparing a plurality of kinds of suggestive performances for each length of the surplus time, the suggestive performance can be executed at the start of the second game round even if the surplus time is different each time. The suggestive effect executed using the surplus time is executed after the suggestive effect executed in the special game state after the first game cycle. Therefore, the content of the suggestive effect executed using the surplus time is set such that the suggestive effect executed in the special game state and the suggestive effect executed using the surplus time have continuity. good too. By doing so, even when the second game round is longer than the first game round, the game round reproduction effect can be executed in the second game round without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, when the second game round is shorter than the first game round, only a part of the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round is executed as the game repeat reproduction effect. may be For example, when a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a result notification effect are executed as a game replay effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect are preferentially reproduced, and part or all of the notice effect is omitted to reproduce the game replay effect. may be executed. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are executed at a high frequency in normal times, and preferentially reproducing reach effects and result notification effects (jackpot notifications) that are executed only during reach or jackpot, players can It is possible to preferentially reproduce an effect that is strongly desired to be reproduced.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the second game round ends. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance in the opening performance of the special game state. The specific start performance is executed as the opening performance of the subsequent special game state when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round is won and the game round reproduction performance is executed in the second game round.

FIG. 10(c) shows an example of a specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is a effect suggesting that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, and is in a special game state (open/close) due to the big win in the second game round. This is an effect suggesting that the execution mode) will start. The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode and the ending effect after executing the specific start effect. In this case, the effect and ending effect (normal ending effect) executed in the opening/closing execution mode are effects executed at the time of a normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect suggesting the end of the special game state.

The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above using two cases, case a1 and case a2. As explained in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect are executed in the first game cycle. The effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect for reproducing the effect, and the player also recognizes that the effect is for reproducing the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed after the suggestive effect have already been executed in terms of effect. However, in reality, it is a game round reproduction effect executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. When the player has previously viewed the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1, the player executes the game cycle reproduction effect in the second game cycle of the case a2 in the first game cycle in the same manner as in the case a1. As well as recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the performance shown in the previous game, it is difficult to anticipate winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. In such a state, after the announcement effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the second game round, when the player is informed that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round by the result notification effect. At that time, for the first time, the notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the second game round are not merely reproductions of the effects executed in the first game round, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the time. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game cycle reproduction effect in the case a2 in this way, the game is given a sense of surprise, and at least part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is reproduced. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player for the performance to be performed. In addition, by making the second game round in case a2 develop unexpectedly by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the case of case a2, although the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, it suggests reproducing the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game round. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to anticipate winning the big winning lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

Also, as in case a2, if the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round are reproduced as they are and executed in the second game round, the result notification effect in the second game round is executed. Even if the game is played, there is a possibility that the player will not notice that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, but after the second game round ends, the specific start effect is executed in the special game state. , the player can be made to recognize that he/she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game cycle at the time when the specific start performance is executed.

A4. Overview of processing in the waiting state:
Next, the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the standby state will be described. The standby state is a state after a game round has ended and neither the special game state nor the next game round has started.

FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in the standby state. FIG. 11 shows a state diagram showing whether or not the pattern displayed on the main display unit 45 is fluctuating, the display mode of the pattern display device 41, and the sound output from the sound emission control device 90. The content and the audio output level (volume) are shown. 11 also shows the ON/OFF state of the standby state flag in the main controller 60, the ON/OFF state of the transition condition fulfillment flag in the main controller 60, and the cue determination flag in the sound emission control device 90. ON and OFF states are shown. These flags are described later.

A number such as "01" described in the display mode of the pattern display device 41 indicates the temporal position of the moving image data, and "01" indicates the leading position of the moving image data. The temporal position of the video data is the position of the video data corresponding to each time of the video displayed with the time length. This is the position of the corresponding video data. For example, a time code recorded in the moving image data can be used as the temporal position of the moving image data. In this embodiment, when the moving image data of the background moving image is displayed up to the temporal position of "30", it returns to the temporal position of "01" and is displayed from the beginning.

A number such as "01" written in the output content of the voice indicates the temporal position of the music data, and "01" indicates the head position of the music data. The temporal position of music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of the music output with the time length, and the time position of the music when the music data is grasped by the time length. This is the position of the corresponding music data. For example, the time code recorded in the music data can be used as the temporal position of the music data. In this embodiment, when the music data of the background music is output to the temporal position of "30", it returns to the temporal position of "01" and is output from the beginning.

The display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display the background moving image in the game round in which the display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed, and also causes the pattern display device 41 to display the background moving image in the standby state after the game round ends. continue to be displayed. The background moving image is a moving image that is displayed on the background side of the pattern in the symbol display device 41. When images and moving images such as the above-described advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect are displayed, these images and moving images are displayed on the background side. Is displayed. The background video in this embodiment is a video in which characters are dancing to the rhythm of background music, which will be described later.

The sound emission control device 90 outputs background music (BGM: Background Music) corresponding to the above-described background moving image from the speaker 46 during the game cycle, and also outputs the background music from the speaker 46 in the standby state after the game cycle ends. continue to be output. In this embodiment, the background music is music that is continuously output in response to the background moving image, and has the same temporal length as the background moving image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, by outputting the background music at the temporal position "10" at the timing when the background moving image at the temporal position "10" is displayed, the background moving image and the rhythm of the background music are displayed. A performance corresponding to one-to-one correspondence is realized.

As shown in FIG. 11, main controller 60 turns ON the standby state flag when the game cycle ends, that is, when the pattern variation on main display portion 45 stops (time t1). Then, when 15 seconds have passed without starting the special game state or the next game round after the change of the symbols on the main display unit 45 has stopped and the main display unit 60 has entered the standby state, That is, when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON, it is determined that the transition condition has been established, and the transition condition establishment flag is turned ON and the standby state flag is turned OFF (time t2).

The transition condition is to shift the output mode of the sound from a mode in which the background music is output at a volume preset by the player to a mode in which the volume of the background music is zero (silent state), and the pattern display device 41 This is a condition for shifting the display mode from the mode in which the background moving image is displayed to the mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed. That is, when the transition condition is established, the sound output mode shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted, and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is interrupted. . The demonstration video (demonstration video) is a video different from the background video, and is a video for conveying the attractiveness of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, in the demonstration video, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the game method of the pachinko machine 10 is explained, and characters and stories appearing in the pachinko machine 10 are explained. In addition, a demonstration video may be called an attract video.

As shown in FIG. 11, when the transition condition is satisfied at time t2, the sound emission control device 90 changes the sound output mode to output background music at a volume preset by the player (time t2). from time t2 to time t3), through a mode in which the volume of the background music is reduced (fade out) with the lapse of time while the output of the background music is continued (mode from time t2 to time t3), and the volume of the background music is zero. Transition to a certain mode (mode after time t3). In this embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 continues outputting the background music until 5 seconds have passed since the volume of the background music became zero, and after the volume of the background music becomes zero, At the timing (time t4) after 5 seconds have passed, the output of the background music is stopped. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the volume preset by the game ball is the maximum volume.

When the transition condition is satisfied, the display control device 100 shifts the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the mode in which the demonstration video is displayed 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero (time t4). The sound emission control device 90 turns on the cue determination flag at the timing when the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t4). The cue determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not to start displaying and outputting the background moving image and the background music from their temporal start position "01" when a return condition, which will be described later, is satisfied. be. In the present embodiment, the cue determination flag shifts the audio output mode to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted, and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is a mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is interrupted. is turned ON when it shifts to .

After the transition condition is established, the main controller 60 sets the return condition when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the game round (variation display of symbols) is started. When it is determined that the condition is established, the transition condition establishment flag is turned OFF. The return condition is to return the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, and to return the sound output mode to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player. It is a condition.

As shown in FIG. 11, when the return condition is met after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started (time t5), the cue determination flag is set. is ON, the display control device 100 and the sound emission control device 90 execute cue processing of the background moving image and the background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the pattern display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the display control device 100 causes the background moving image to start being displayed from the temporal head position "01" of the background moving image. The sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, the background music is output from the temporal start position "01". to start. Therefore, both the background moving image and the background music are started to be displayed and output from the temporal head position.

Note that the sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and cue processing for background music and background moving images (processing for starting output of music or display of moving images from the temporal head position “01”). ), the type of background music for which cue processing is to be executed is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 selects multiple types of background videos corresponding to multiple types of background music. A configuration may be adopted in which a background moving image that can be displayed and that corresponds to the selected background music is selected and cue processing is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to appreciate a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and before the display of the demonstration moving image is started. As shown in FIG. 12, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started (time t4), the cue determination flag is set. is OFF, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 returns the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. to run. In this way, the display mode and sound output mode of the pattern display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition was established.

FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is met while the volume of the background music is being reduced. As shown in FIG. 13, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (time t3), the cue determination flag is OFF. Continuing the mode of displaying the moving image, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. In this way, the display mode and sound output mode of the pattern display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition was established.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 11), , the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the pattern display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the display control device 100 causes the background moving image to start displaying from a predetermined temporal position. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, from a predetermined temporal position of the background music Start output. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position of starting the display of the background moving image varies according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background video is started changes according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration video is started, the demo video is displayed. A configuration in which the display of the background video is started from the temporal position of the background video that was displayed at the timing immediately before shifting to the display mode, or when the mode in which the demo video is displayed is returned to the mode in which the background video is displayed. , a configuration in which the temporal position of the background video at which display is started is determined based on the elapsed time after shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, and after the mode of displaying the background video is shifted to the mode of displaying the demonstration video. , the playback of the background video is continued as internal processing, and when returning from the mode of displaying the demonstration video to the mode of displaying the background video, the background video that is being played continues as internal processing, etc. is mentioned.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started ( FIG. 11 ), the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal start position "01" of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to the player compared to a configuration in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the background moving image and output is started from a temporally middle position of the background music. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started at a position in the middle of the background moving image and output is started at the position in the middle of the background music, the player may, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the background moving image and the background music are viewed from a position in the middle of time, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity, or feel unsatisfied that there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the player can appreciate the background moving image and the background music from the beginning position in terms of time. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that the background moving image and the background music can all be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started, if the return condition is met (FIG. 12), the display control The device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the state before the transition condition is established in a natural flow without discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image. , the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, so that the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the previous mode in a natural flow without discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the game round is completed, it is determined that the transition condition has been established when 15 seconds have elapsed without starting any of the special game state and the next game round. It is possible to reduce the volume of the background music with the lapse of time in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game cycle is started in the standby state, it is determined that the return condition is established, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the sound is reproduced. Since the output mode returns to the mode of outputting the background music with the sound volume preset by the player, the sense of anticipation for the start of the game round can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

A5. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, a specific example of control for executing the processing shown in case a1 and case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game round, the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step S102.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, a prize winning process for the starting opening associated with the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the start opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
Next, the prize winning process for the start opening will be described. The prize winning process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14: S104).

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the prize winning process for the starting gate. In step S201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first start hole 33 (start win). In step S201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the winning to the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S201, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting hole 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and whether or not the game ball has won the second starting hole 34 is checked. 2 It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34 .

In step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 34 (S205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole ends.

In step S207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S208, the start reservation number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reservation number RbN), which is the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start reservation number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, when the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (S209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions in the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S210, 1 is added and stored in the corresponding storage area. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the reservation information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the big winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S213, the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The pending command indicates that the winning to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has occurred and the result of the determination by the destination determination process based on the pending information acquired based on the winning, and the pending information is the main control device. This is a command to confirm with the sub-side control device before becoming an object of the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 18 : step S503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is increased. to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the start opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the prize winning process for the start opening (FIG. 15: S213).

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process is based on the reservation information, and the judgment results such as the judgment of the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, the judgment of the type of the jackpot, and the judgment of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the starting opening in the winning process for the starting opening (FIG. 15) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S302 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this winning prize is executed as a game round. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by the winning prior to this winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot occurring before the jackpot lottery due to this winning. By doing so, the lottery mode at the time when the big win lottery due to the winning of this time is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the winning of this time is executed as a game round, (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and the success/failure table storage area. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304, and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and the value is stored in the storage area due to the winning in the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the winning in the first start port 33, the distribution table for the first start port is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S308, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is supported (S308: YES), the process proceeds to step S309, and the variable probability jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the variable probability jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311, and is stored in the storage area by the winning in the starting port this time. read out the value of the reach random number counter C3. After that, the process proceeds to step S312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S313: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the prize winning process for through will be described. Winning processing for through is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing ( FIG. 14 : S105).

FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing winning processing for through. In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S401, when it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and whether or not the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the through winning process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S402 that the reserved role item number SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S402: YES), the process proceeds to step S403 to add 1 to the reserved role item number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S404.

In step S404, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the electrician holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the win-win process for through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (S402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Winning processing for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, output data such as the start-up command set in step S502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S503, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S506, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S509.

In step S509, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. Details of the standby process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S510.

In step S510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S510, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S510: NO), in steps S511 and S512, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S511, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing (S510: YES), the process returns to step S503, and each process from step S503 to step S508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S503 to step S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S506).

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S601 that any one of the opening period flag, the opening/closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and the processing after step S602 is performed. This game round control process is terminated without executing any of them. That is, when the game is in the special game state, no game round is started regardless of whether or not the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is won. On the other hand, in step S601, when it is determined that the game is not in the special game state (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display ends.

In step S602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S602: NO), the process proceeds to the game round start processing of steps S603 to S605. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, when it is determined in step S603 that the total number of reserved coins CRN is "0" (S603: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

At step S607, the standby state flag is turned off. The standby state flag is turned ON at the timing when the standby state is started, and is turned OFF at the timing when the variable display of the main display section 45 is started or when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state was started. be. After executing step S607, the process proceeds to step S608.

In step S608, it is determined whether or not the transition condition fulfillment flag is ON. The transition condition establishment flag is a flag that is turned ON when 15 seconds have passed since the start of the standby state, and turned OFF when the variable display of the main display section 45 is started. If it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition fulfillment flag is ON (S608: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S608: NO), the game round control process is terminated.

In step S609, a return condition establishment command is set. The return condition establishment command is a command for making each sub-side control device recognize that the variable display of the main display section 45 has started, that is, that the return condition has been established. After executing step S609, the process proceeds to step S610.

In step S610, the transition condition fulfillment flag is turned off. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S602: YES), processing for progressing game rounds in steps S611 to S615 is executed.

In step S611, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in a variable time setting process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S611 that the variable time has not elapsed (S611: NO), the process proceeds to step S612 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S612, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S611 that the variation time has elapsed (S611: YES), the process proceeds to step S613 to execute variation end processing. The variation end processing is to change the result display section so that the pattern displayed on the result display section determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 21) to be described later is displayed on the result display section for the current game round. display control. After executing step S613, the process proceeds to step S614.

At step S614, the standby state flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step S615 to execute standby state time setting processing. Specifically, the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter area 64d is set to "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec). The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the standby state, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S615, the game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting processing>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S604) of the game round control process.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) (the hold information stored in the first area information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series than the reservation information stored first among the reservation information stored in time series in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 6) When the reservation information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S701, the pending information can be processed in the order stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

When it is determined in step S701 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S701: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S701, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S701: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S708 to S713 is executed.

In step S702, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step S703 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S705.

In step S705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S705, the process proceeds to step S706.

In step S706, if the second result display flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying which of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S707.

In step S707, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 of the normal processing (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S701, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S701: NO), The process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, 1 is subtracted from the second start-up reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, 1 is subtracted from the total number of reserved items CRN, and the process proceeds to step S710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S711.

In step S711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S712, if the second result display flag in the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S713.

In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 of the normal processing (FIG. 18). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S605) of the game round control process.

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S801:YES), it progresses to step S802.

In step S802, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S804.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In step S804, when the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (S804: YES), in steps S805 to S812, to set the game result in the case of jackpot winning and to set the stop result process.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process advances to step S806 to refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 8A). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and a distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 8B). Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S806 or step S807. The process proceeds to step S808.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is the variable probability jackpot. In step S808, when it is determined that the game result is a variable probability jackpot (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

In step S809, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

In step S810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S808, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variable jackpot (S808: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, to step S811 move on.

In step S811, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

In step S812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S804, if the result of the big win lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a big win (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813, and the stop result setting process for loss is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of loss is to end the variable display in a state in which either the stop result is displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game turn in which the result is a loss. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S814, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game turn in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big win or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S814, the process proceeds to step S815.

In step S815, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S815 that the second result display section flag is ON (S815: YES), the process proceeds to step S817 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S814. After executing step S816 or step S817, the process proceeds to step S818.

In step S818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S816 to S818 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S818, the process proceeds to step S819.

In step S819, the result display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display section 37a, and the variable display is started, When the second result display section flag is ON, the second result display section 37b is specified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S819, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 21: S814).

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable time. In step S901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the variable time table for big hits stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. After that, in step S904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S902, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not won in the above step S902, reach occurs among the game rounds in which the jackpot lottery is not won in step S905. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S906, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, in step S904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S905, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, in step S904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 18: S507).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is, as described with reference to FIG. 9, a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process advances to step S1002 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when ending the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S1003, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to step S1004, timing at which the symbol variation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b ends. It is determined whether or not. In step S1004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S1004: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S1004, when it is determined that it is the timing when the variable display ends (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005, and the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) changes to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S1005, when it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006, and the standby state flag is turned off, and the process advances to step S1007 to turn off the high-probability mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step S1008, the process proceeds to step S1009.

In step S1009, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal processing (FIG. 18). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S1009, the process advances to step S1010 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S1011 that the opening period has ended (S1011: YES), the process advances to step S1012 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1013.

In step S1013, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S1013, the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. In step S1014, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM64 is the 16R probability variable flag or the 16R normal flag (S1014: YES), proceed to step S1015, provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened.

On the other hand, in step S1014, when it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM64 is the 8R probability variable flag or the 8R normal flag (S1014: NO), the process proceeds to step S1016, provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S1015 or step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017.

In step S1017, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S1002, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1018 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driven state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit is operated under the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a or the number of opening limits has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S1018, the process proceeds to step S1019.

In step S1019, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1019: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1019: YES), the process proceeds to step S1020 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1021.

In step S1021, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S1021, the process proceeds to step S1022.

In step S1022, condition determination processing is executed. The condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not case a2 shown in FIG. 9 is applicable. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery in the next game round, the suggestion production is executed in the ending period, and the production executed in this game round in the fluctuation time of the next game round (notice production, reach production and It is determined whether or not to execute the process of reproducing the result notification effect (jackpot notification). The condition determination processing will be described later. After executing step S1022, the process proceeds to step S1023.

In step S1023, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024.

In step S1024, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal processing (FIG. 18). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S1024, the process proceeds to step S1025.

In step S1025, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

In step S1026, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1023), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in the ending time setting process (FIG. 25), which will be described later. If it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S1026: YES), the process proceeds to step S1027.

In step S1027, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S1028 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1028, the process proceeds to step S1029.

In step S1029, the standby state flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1030 to execute standby state time setting processing. Specifically, the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter area 64d is set to "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec). After executing step S1030, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1026, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S1026: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (1017 in FIG. 23) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step S1101 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1102: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1103: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1103, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104, and the variable prize winning drive unit is operated to open the big prize winning port 36a. 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

In step S1106, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process ( FIG. 18 : step S503). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S1101, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable prize winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has won the prize winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1108 that no prize has been won (S1108: NO), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that a prize has been won (S1108: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize counter area PC. After that, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1110: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1107: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S1110 In (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1111 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S1112.

In step S1112, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1113 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1113: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1113: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process advances to step S1115 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 18 : step S503). Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.

<Condition judgment processing>
Next, condition determination processing will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 23: S1022).

As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not case a2 shown in FIG. 9 applies. The condition for enabling the processing of case a2 is to win the jackpot lottery in the first game round and win the jackpot lottery in the second game round. This condition determination process is executed immediately before the end of the opening/closing execution mode after winning the big win lottery in the game round, and is the process of determining whether or not the big win lottery will be won in the next game round.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing condition determination processing. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the pending number CRN>0. By executing this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a game round immediately after the special game state when executing the special game state after the first game round. When the game round does not exist, the game round corresponding to the second game round in which the game round reproduction effect can be executed immediately after the suggestive effect does not exist, and the processing of case a2 cannot be executed. .

If it is determined in step S1201 that the number of pending items CRN>0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the pending number CRN>0 is not true (S1201: NO), this condition determination process is terminated.

In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the next game round is read. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning to the starting port in the winning process for the starting port (FIG. 15) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the big winning lottery for the next game round is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

In step S1203, when it is determined that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process advances to step S1204 to refer to the low-probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S1203, when it is determined that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205, and the win/fail table for the high probability mode stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a is referred to. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S1206, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In the case of case a2 (FIG. 9), the effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces the game round reproduction effect executed in the second game round in the ending period of the special game state after the second game round. A flag used to prevent execution. In step S1207, when it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208, and the condition establishment flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S1209.

In step S1209, a condition establishment command is set. The condition establishment command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side recognize that the condition establishment flag is ON. The condition establishment command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process ( FIG. 18 : step S503) of the normal process. After that, the condition determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time in step S1206 does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or if it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON in step S1207 (S1207: YES), the condition determination process is terminated.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 23: S1023).

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

In step S1301, when it is determined that the effect overlap avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302 to determine whether or not the condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1302 that the condition establishment flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, "3000" (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which is the ending time timer. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a2 of FIG. In case a2, only the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, and the reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 6 seconds are secured as the ending time required for execution of the suggestive effect. After executing step S1303, the process advances to step S1304 to turn off the condition establishment flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, an effect duplication avoidance flag is turned ON. After that, the ending time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the condition establishment flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, "15000" (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game run in case a1 of FIG. In the case of case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 30 seconds are secured as the ending time necessary for executing the suggestive effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In this embodiment, the time required for the suggestive effect is fixed at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is fixed at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process is terminated.

In step S1301, when it is determined that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1307, and an effect overlap avoidance command is set. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 18 : step S503) of the normal process. After executing step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1308, "4000" (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is the process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of FIG. In the case of case a2, a normal ending effect is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 8 seconds are secured as the ending time required for execution of the normal ending effect.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 23: S1028).

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 has a flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step S1404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1405, 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S1410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the process advances to step S1407 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step S1408.

In step S1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S1409, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S508).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. In step S1501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1501 that the supported flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

In step S1504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step S1504 that it is time to end the variable display (S1504: YES), the process advances to step S1505 to set off display, and then ends the electronic role support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S1506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (S1506: YES), the process proceeds to step S1507.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step S1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S1507 (S1507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S1508 (S1508: YES), the process proceeds to step S1509 to perform the electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S1509 is support winning. In step S1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, in step S1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S1512 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1512 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S1512: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S1513, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1513: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S1514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1515.

In step S1515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 18 : step S503) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S1507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S1507: YES), or if it is determined in step S1518 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S1517.

In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S1516 is support winning. In step S1517, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S1517: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1517, if it is determined that the support win has been won (S1517: YES), the process advances to step S1518 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process advances to step S1519 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S1519, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1519: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

In step S1520, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S1521 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S1501, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (S1501: YES), the process advances to step S1522 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electrician opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: S1522) of electrician support processing.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the flow advances to step S1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1605: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S1605: YES), the process advances to step S1606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1607 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1607: NO), the electric opening/closing control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1607: YES), the process advances to step S1608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step S1609.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S1609: NO), the process advances to step S1610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S1610: YES), the process advances to step S1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the open/close execution mode is set (S1609: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S1610 (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<Standby processing>
Next, standby processing will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S509).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing standby processing. In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the standby state flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is ON (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S1701: NO), this standby processing ends.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0. If the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON. I judge. If it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON, the process proceeds to step S1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON, this standby processing ends.

In step S1703, the standby state flag is turned off, and the process advances to step S1704 to turn on the transition condition fulfillment flag. After that, the flow advances to step S1705 to set a transition condition establishment command. The transition condition satisfaction command is a command for making each sub-side control device recognize that 15 seconds have passed since the start of the standby state, that is, that the transition condition has been satisfied. After executing step S1705, this standby process ends.

A6. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

A7. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, command handling processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the received command. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, standby state transition processing is executed to reduce the audio output level (sound volume) in the standby state or to start a demonstration moving image. Details of the standby state transition processing will be described later. After executing step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804.

In step S1804, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command handling process of step S1802. After executing step S1804, the process advances to step S1805.

In step S1805, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S1802. After executing step S1805, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 32: S1802).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1901 that a start-up command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: YES), the process advances to step S1902 to execute start-up command handling processing. The details of the start-up command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the start-up command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1903 without executing step S1902.

In step S1903, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1903 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: YES), the process advances to step S1904 to execute pending command processing. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1904, the process advances to step S1905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1903 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing step S1904.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1905 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1907.

In step S1906, effect setting processing is executed. In the effect setting process, the advance notice effect to be executed in the current game round, the ready-to-win effect, the stop pattern, the variable display pattern, and the like are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1906, the process advances to step S1907.

In step S1907, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1907 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1907: YES), the process advances to step S1908 to execute opening effect setting processing. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot contained in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot are set, and the information corresponding to the content of the effect is set. An opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. - 特許庁After that, the process proceeds to step S1909.

In step S1909, opening/closing execution mode effect setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect setting process, the content of the effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the information on the number of rounds and the information on the jackpot type included in the opening command. After executing step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910.

If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has not been received (S1907: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910 without executing steps S1908 and S1909.

In step S1910, it is determined whether or not a condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1910 that the condition fulfillment command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (S1910: YES), the flow advances to step S1911 to Turn ON the side condition establishment flag. After executing step S1911, the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1910 that the condition establishment command has not been received (S1910: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912 without executing step S1911.

In step S1912, it is determined whether or not a command for avoiding duplication of effects has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S1912, when it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance command is received from the main side MPU 62 (S1912: YES), the process proceeds to step S1913, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 The light side effect duplication flag is turned ON. After executing step S1913, the process proceeds to step S1914. On the other hand, in step S1912, when it determines with not having received the production duplication avoidance command (S1912:NO), it progresses to step S1914, without performing step S1913.

In step S1914, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received. In step S1914, when it determines with having received the ending command (S1914:YES), it progresses to step S1915 and performs an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the ending effect for the ending period is set based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time and the ON/OFF information of the sound and light side condition establishment flag. be. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1915, the process proceeds to step S1920.

If it is determined in step S1914 that no ending command has been received (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1916 without executing step S1915.

In step S1916, it is determined whether or not a transition condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917 to turn on the volume reduction flag. The volume reduction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, is turned ON at the timing of starting processing for reducing the audio output level (volume), and is turned ON at the timing when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. This is a flag that is turned off. After executing step S1917, the process proceeds to step S1918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: NO), the process proceeds to step S1918 without executing step S1917.

In step S1918, it is determined whether or not a return condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition establishment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: YES), the process advances to step S1919 to turn ON the return condition establishment flag. The restoration condition satisfaction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, and is turned ON when starting the process of restoring the audio output level (volume) or the process of ending the demonstration video. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the volume is restored and the demonstration video ends. After executing step S1919, the process proceeds to step S1920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition fulfillment command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: NO), the process proceeds to step S1920 without executing step S1919.

In step S1920, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, setting of effect contents corresponding to the high-frequency support mode command, the low-frequency support mode command, the open command, and the close command is performed. Also, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . After executing step S1920, the command handling process is terminated.

<Startup command response processing>
Next, the startup command handling process will be described. The startup command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1902).

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the start-up command handling process. As described above, the start-up command response process is a process that is executed when a start-up command is received from the main MPU 62 . Processing of each step executed in the start-up command handling processing will be described below.

In step S<b>2001 , a demonstration moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . The demonstration moving image start command is a command for causing the display-side MPU 102 to start displaying the demonstration moving image. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, the demonstration moving image displaying flag is turned ON. The demonstration moving image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration moving image is being displayed on the pattern display device 41, and is turned ON when the display of the demonstration moving image is started, and is turned OFF when the display of the demonstration moving image is finished. is a flag that is set to After executing step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2003, the cue determination flag is turned ON. As described above, the cue determination flag starts outputting and displaying the background music and the background moving image from the temporal start position when the return condition is satisfied and the background music and the background moving image start to be displayed. This is a flag for determining whether or not If the cue determination flag is ON at the timing when the return condition is satisfied, when starting to output the background music and display the background video, the output and display of the background music and background video are started from the temporal start position. do. After executing step S2003, this start-up command handling process ends.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 33: S1904).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the pending command handling process is a process that is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62 . Processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step S2101, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the first starting port 33, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the second starting port 34, and these pending A process for enabling the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S2101 will be described later. In the following, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first pending number", and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 It is also referred to as the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as the "total reserved number". After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

In step S2102, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first starting port 33 specified in step S2101, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 and Based on, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first reservation display portion 37c and the second reservation display portion 37d is controlled. After executing step S2102, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update processing at the time of winning>
Next, update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command handling process (FIG. 35: S2101).

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. FIG. In step S2201, if it is determined that the pending command read this time is based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, sound light The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2204.

In step S2201, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not transmitted based on the winning to the first starting port 33 (S2201: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting port 34, the process advances to step S2203 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pending information items acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204.

The reason why steps S2202 and S2203 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the hold information is not displayed in the main controller 60. While the information is held in memory, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step S2204, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total pending number counter area, the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step S2204, the update process at the time of the main prize is ended.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 33: S1906).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the contents of the effect to be executed in the current game round. . Specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described below.

In step S2301, the variable command received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the information of the variable time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2302 that the sound and light side condition establishment flag is not ON (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2303.

In step S2303, a process for setting the effect type is executed. The effect type setting process executed in step S2303 is a process of setting the contents of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect in the game round. The effect type setting process will be described later. After executing step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304.

In step S2304, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R variable variable jackpot, an 8R variable variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 16R normal jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L, and the result is a stop result in which the combination of the ready-to-win symbols does not materialize on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S2304, the process advances to step S2305.

In step S2305, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol specified in step S2304 is obtained. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the received variation command. In step S2306, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery for the current game round has been won (S2306: YES), the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is stored. Specifically, the setting contents in the effect setting process of step S2303 are stored. This processing is performed to reproduce the effect in the game round in which the big winning lottery is won. After executing step S2307, the process proceeds to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S2306: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2307.

If it is determined in step S2302 that the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to case a2 described with reference to FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2308.

In step S2308, the information of the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process related to the previous game round is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S2309.

In step S2309, the setting processing of the effect type is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern read out in step S2308. That is, the same effect as the effect executed in the previous game round is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S2310.

In step S2310, a stop symbol setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern read out in step S2308. That is, the stop symbols having the same content as the stop symbols displayed in the previous game round are set. After that, the process proceeds to step S2311.

In step S2311, a variable display pattern setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern read out in step S2308. That is, a variable display pattern having the same contents as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game round is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S2312.

In step S2312, the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. After that, the flow advances to step S2313 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314, and after executing update processing at the time of fluctuation start, the effect setting processing ends. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2314).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (S2401: YES), the flow advances to step S2402 to count the first pending number counter stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. Subtract 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S2404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (S2401: NO), the flow advances to step S2403, and the second pending number stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 Decrease the counter by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S2404.

In step S2404, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Opening effect setting processing>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 33: S1908).

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the opening effect setting process. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is not ON (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2502.

In step S2502, a normal start effect is set as an opening effect. In this embodiment, as explained in case a2 of FIG. 9, as the opening effect in the special game state, an opening effect such as a specific start effect (see FIG. 10(c)) which is executed only in special cases is prepared. are doing. In step S2502, a start effect (ordinary start effect) to be executed except for a special case such as case a2 is set as an opening effect. After executing step S2502, the process advances to step S2505.

If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound and light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, a specific start effect is set as an opening effect. After executing step S2503, the process advances to step S2504 to turn off the sound and light side condition establishment flag. After that, the process advances to step S2505.

In step S2505, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S2502 or step S2503. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received opening effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2505, the opening effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending production setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 33: S1915).

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the sound and light effect duplication flag is ON. In step S2601, when it is determined that the sound and light effect duplication flag is not ON (S2601: NO), the process proceeds to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2602 that the sound and light side condition establishment flag is not ON (S2602: NO), the process proceeds to step S2603. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (suggestion effect, special game state reproduction effect and specific end effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round of case a1 in FIG. move on.

At step S2603, the information of the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern stored at step S2307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 37) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2604, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read out in step S2603. After that, the process advances to step S2605 to set the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect as the ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of FIG. 9 is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S2609.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is ON (S2602: YES), the process proceeds to step S2606. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (suggestive effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round of case a2 in FIG. 9, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2606, the suggestive effect is set as the ending effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S2609.

In step S2601, when it is determined that the sound and light effect duplication flag is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2607. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (normal ending effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the second game round of case a2 in FIG. 9, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is a effect suggesting the end of the special game state. After that, the process proceeds to step S2608.

In step S2608, the sound and light effect duplication flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S2609.

In step S2609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect content set in step S2605, step S2606 or step S2607 is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2609, this ending effect setting process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, as shown in steps S2603 to S2605 and S2609, the effect type executed in the first game round, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern are shown. When the information is stored by the sound emission control device 90 and the special game state reproduction effect is executed, the command indicating the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round is part of the ending command. , the symbol display device 41 is caused to display an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives a command indicating the type of effect executed in the first game cycle, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern as part of the ending command from the sound emission control device 90, it receives The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern indicated by the given command is read out from the program ROM 103 and written in the work RAM 104 . The pattern data table is necessary to display an image of one frame at the timing of updating the image when a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current game round is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing of the effect for the current game cycle is defined.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the information group corresponding to each frame, and gives a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 in order to display an image for one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 in accordance with the drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the pattern display device 41 to display the image. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially instructs the VDP 105 to draw the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, thereby displaying the effect type and stop pattern executed in the first game round. , the variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

In the present embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above processing. process may be adopted. For example, as in the present embodiment, the display from the sound emission control device 90 instead of the processing of storing the information indicating the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round in the sound emission control device 90 A command is transmitted to the control device 100 to instruct to temporarily store a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the performance type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game cycle. According to the command, the display control device 100 temporarily stores a pattern data table corresponding to a combination of the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game cycle.

After that, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, a command is output from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 to instruct the VDP 105 to draw according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. . According to the command, the display control device 100 can execute a special game state reproduction effect by instructing the VDP 105 to draw according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. As described above, various processes can be adopted in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the processing for executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Waiting state transition processing>
Next, the standby state transition processing will be described. The standby state transition processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 32: S1803).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing standby state transition processing. In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the return condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition establishment flag is not ON (S2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2702 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is not ON (S2702: NO), the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2702 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S2702: YES), this standby state transition processing ends.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the demonstration video start waiting flag is ON. The demonstration moving image start waiting flag is a flag for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is a period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image, and is turned ON at the timing when the sound output level (volume) becomes zero. This flag is turned OFF when 5 seconds have passed without the return condition being satisfied after the voice output level (sound volume) became zero. If it is determined in step S2703 that the demonstration moving image start wait flag is not ON (S2703: NO), the process proceeds to step S2704.

In step S2704, it is determined whether or not the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2704: YES), the process proceeds to step S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2704: NO), this standby state transition processing ends.

In step S2705, a process of reducing the output level (volume) of audio is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set to 3000 steps, and the process of lowering the audio output level by one step is executed. In the present embodiment, the standby state transition processing is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, so the output level (sound volume) of the sound drops from the maximum value to zero in about 6 seconds. After executing step S2705, the process advances to step S2706.

In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S2706: YES), the process advances to step S2707 to turn off the volume reduction flag, and advances to step S2708 to wait for the start of the demonstration video. Turn on the flag. After that, the process advances to step S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S2706: NO), this standby state transition processing ends.

In step S2709, a demonstration moving image start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, "2500" (that is, 5.0 sec) is set to the timer counter Tx waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image stored in the various counter area 94b. The demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the sound output level (sound volume) becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. be. After executing step S2709, this standby state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S2703 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON (S2703: YES), the process proceeds to step S2710.

In step S2710, it is determined whether or not the 5-second demonstration moving image start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter Tx waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image is 0. If the value of the timer counter Tx waiting to start the demonstration moving image is 0, the period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image of 5 seconds ends. It is determined that If it is determined in step S2710 that the demo moving image start waiting period has ended, the process advances to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2710 that the waiting period for starting the demonstration moving image has not ended, this waiting state transition processing ends.

In step S2711, background music output stop processing is executed. After that, the flow advances to step S2712 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2712, the process proceeds to step S2713.

In step S2713, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is turned off, and the flow advances to step S2714 to turn on the demonstration moving image displaying flag. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S2715 to turn on the cue determination flag and terminate this standby state transition processing.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition establishment flag is ON (S2701: YES), the flow advances to step S2716 to determine whether or not the cue determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2716 that the cue determination flag is not ON (S2716: NO), the process proceeds to step S2717 to return the sound output level (volume) to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2717, the process advances to step S2718.

In step S2718, it is determined whether or not the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2718: YES), the process advances to step S2719 to turn the volume reduction flag OFF. The process then proceeds to step S2720. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2718: NO), the process proceeds to step S2720 without executing step S2719.

In step S2720, it is determined whether or not the demonstration video start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2720 that the demonstration moving image start wait is ON (S2720: YES), the flow advances to step S2721 to turn the demonstration moving image start waiting flag OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S2722 to turn off the return condition establishment flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the demonstration moving image start wait flag is not ON (S2720: NO), the process advances to step S2722 without executing step S2721, and the return condition fulfillment flag is turned OFF. After executing step S2722, this standby state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S2716 that the cue determination flag is ON (S2716: YES), the process advances to step S2723 to transmit a demonstration moving image end command to display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image end command executes processing for ending the display of the demonstration moving image. After executing step S2723, the process advances to step S2724 to turn off the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S2725.

In step S2725, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process proceeds to step S2726.

In step S2726, the audio output level (volume) is returned to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2726, the process advances to step S2727.

In step S2727, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cue determination flag is ON, output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the flow advances to step S2728 to turn off the cue determination flag. After that, the flow advances to step S2729 to turn off the return condition fulfillment flag and terminate this standby state transition processing.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S2801, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step S2802.

In step S2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S2901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S3001, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 43) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S3001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step S3002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S3001), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S3002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S3004.

In step S3004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S3005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command correspondence processing is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of V interrupt processing (FIG. 44: S3001).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores an effect command. If it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is stored, the process advances to step S3102 to execute display start processing of the effect corresponding to the effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3103 without executing step S3102.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores an opening effect command. When it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is stored, the process advances to step S3104 to execute display start processing of the opening effect corresponding to the opening effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode designated by the opening effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Further, after the opening effect is completed, control of image drawing and display is started so that the opening/closing execution mode effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁After executing step S3104, the process advances to step S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing step S3104.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores an ending effect command. When it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is stored, the process advances to step S3106 to execute display start processing of the ending effect corresponding to the ending effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode designated by the ending effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S3106, the process advances to step S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 without executing step S3106.

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a demonstration moving image start command. If it is determined in step S3107 that a demonstration moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3108 to execute demonstration moving image display start processing. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the demonstration animation specified by the demonstration animation start command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Note that, in the present embodiment, display of the demonstration moving image is repeated until a demonstration moving image end command, which will be described later, is received. After executing step S3108, the process advances to step S3109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the demonstration moving image start command is not stored, the process advances to step S3109 without executing step S3108.

In step S3109, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a demonstration moving image end command. If it is determined in step S3109 that the demonstration moving image end command is stored, the process advances to step S3110 to execute processing for ending display of the demonstration moving image. After that, the process proceeds to step S3111. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3109 that the demonstration moving image end command is not stored, the process advances to step S3111 without executing step S3110.

In step S3111, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a background moving image start command. If it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112 to execute processing for starting display of the background moving image. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the background moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. After executing step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is not stored, the process advances to step S3113 without executing step S3112.

In step S3113, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, when the above-described effect operation command is stored, the processing in the case where the above-described effect operation command is stored is executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the case a1, when the big winning lottery related to the second game round is lost, the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed after the suggestion effect. And the result notification effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect for reproducing the effect executed in the first game cycle, and the player also recognizes that the effect is for reproducing the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed after the suggestive effect have already been executed in terms of effect. However, in reality, it is a game round reproduction effect executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. When the player has previously viewed the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1, the player executes the game cycle reproduction effect in the second game cycle of the case a2 in the first game cycle in the same manner as in the case a1. As well as recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the performance shown in the previous game, it is difficult to anticipate winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. In such a state, after the announcement effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the second game round, when the player is informed that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round by the result notification effect. At that time, for the first time, the notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the second game round are not merely reproductions of the effects executed in the first game round, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the time. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game cycle reproduction effect in the case a2 in this way, the game is given a sense of surprise, and at least part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is reproduced. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player for the performance to be performed. In addition, by making the second game round in case a2 develop unexpectedly by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the case of case a2, although the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, it suggests reproducing the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game round. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to anticipate winning the big winning lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

Further, in the case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the ready-to-win effect executed after the suggestive effect is executed as a reproduction of the already executed effect in terms of the effect, but in reality. is executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, when it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, when it is executed as a reproduction of the effect that has already been executed, At least three cases are set such that the performance is executed as a reproduction of the performance that has already been executed, but in reality it is executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the pattern display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the display control device 100 causes the background moving image to start displaying from a predetermined temporal position. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, from a predetermined temporal position of the background music Start output. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position of starting the display of the background moving image varies according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started ( FIG. 11 ), the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal start position "01" of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to the player compared to a configuration in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the background moving image and output is started from a temporally middle position of the background music. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started at a position in the middle of the background moving image and output is started at the position in the middle of the background music, the player may, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the background moving image and the background music are viewed from a position in the middle of time, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity, or feel unsatisfied that there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the player can appreciate the background moving image and the background music from the beginning position in terms of time. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that the background moving image and the background music can all be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started, if the return condition is met (FIG. 12), the display control The device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the state before the transition condition is established in a natural flow without discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image. , the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, so that the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the previous mode in a natural flow without discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the game round is completed, it is determined that the transition condition has been established when 15 seconds have elapsed without starting any of the special game state and the next game round. It is possible to reduce the volume of the background music with the lapse of time in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the game cycle is started in the standby state, it is determined that the return condition is established, and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the background music is played. Since the output mode returns to the mode of outputting the background music with the sound volume preset by the player, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation for the start of the game round and improve the amusement of the game.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 46 is a time chart showing processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the case a2 shown in FIG. 9B of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, and the first game round The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the second game round and the second game round are consecutive has been described.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as case b1 shown in FIG. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game round (hereinafter also referred to as preceding game round) between the first game round and the second game round will be described. In addition, the jackpot lottery in the preceding game round is out.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game cycle. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result notification effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. In the special game state, an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode and an ending effect are executed. In this embodiment, in the special game state after the first game round, the opening effect is the opening effect (normal opening effect) that suggests the beginning of the special game state, and the ending effect is the end of the special game state. Ending production (normal ending production) is executed. That is, as in the case a2 in FIG. 9B, the suggestion effect is not executed as the ending effect of the special game state.

When the special game state ends, the preceding game round is executed. In this embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the symbol display device 41 when the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round. As shown in the figure, when the suggestive effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, the variable display and stop display of the symbols are executed. Specifically, within the unit playing time, the variable display of the symbols is executed during the variable time, and the stop display of the symbols is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, a suggestion effect is executed. In this way, by displaying the variable display and the stop display of the symbols in a small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect without making the player feel uncomfortable in the preceding game round. Further, the variable display and the static display of the symbols may not be displayed on the display surface 41a, or the predetermined marks and characters displayed in synchronization with the variable display and the static display of the symbols may be blinked and lit. . Even in this way, the suggestive effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort in the preceding game round.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round after executing the preceding game round. As described above, in the example shown in case b1 of FIG. 46(a), the jackpot lottery is won even in the second game cycle. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game round reproduction production for reproducing the production executed in the first game round as the production in the second game round. That is, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect (jackpot notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, this result notification effect (jackpot notification) has a function as a part of the game round reproduction effect, and has a function as a result notification for the big win lottery in the second game round. Then, the second game round ends when the game round reproduction effect ends.

Since the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the second game round ends. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance in the opening performance of the special game state. The specific start performance is executed as the opening performance of the subsequent special game state when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round is won and the game round reproduction performance is executed in the second game round.

The second embodiment can be implemented, for example, by the processing described below.

When the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, similar to the process executed in the first embodiment (Fig. 37: S2307), the effect executed in the first game round (in this embodiment, the Effect, ready-to-reach effect, and result notification effect) are stored. The contents to be stored are not limited to the effect itself executed in the first game round, and may be other information as long as it is information that can specify the effect executed in the first game round. That is, information indicating the type (pattern) of the effect executed in the first game round, the address information of the memory storing the effect executed in the first game round, etc. The effect executed in the first game round can be called again.

After memorizing the performance executed in the first game round, the game round (second game round) to be executed after the first game round and winning the jackpot lottery is specified by the preceding determination processing. Then, the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect and the result notification effect in the first game cycle stored are executed as the game cycle reproduction effect in the second game cycle. At that time, for example, by setting the variation time to be the same for all game rounds in which the jackpot lottery is won, the ready-to-win effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game round are changed to the second game round. It can be executed within the variable time in the game round.

In addition, when there is a preceding game round between the first game round and the second game round, this embodiment is realized by executing a suggestive effect according to the fluctuation time of each preceding game round. can do. In addition, when there are a plurality of preceding game rounds, a suggestive effect corresponding to each variation time may be executed in each preceding game round, for example, the preceding game round executed immediately before the second game round The suggestive effect may be executed only in , and the normal effect may be executed in the other preceding game times.

Also, the number of preceding game rounds is not limited to one. An upper limit value may be set for the number of game rounds allowed as preceding game rounds between the second game round.

FIG. 46(b) is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when there are a plurality of consecutive preceding game rounds between the first game round and the second game round. As shown in the figure, for example, after winning the jackpot lottery in the first game round, if there are five or less preceding game rounds in which the jackpot lottery lottery results are out (Fig. 46 (b )), after that, in the second game round that wins the jackpot lottery, the game round reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game round is executed, and the number of preceding game rounds is 6 or more. (not shown), the game round reproduction effect may not be executed in the second game round in which the jackpot lottery is won after that. As for the processing, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the effect executed in the first game round (this embodiment , the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect) are stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 .

Further, a preceding game round counter for counting the number of preceding game rounds between the first game round and the second game round is provided, and when determining the performance of the second game round for winning the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. When the counter value is 5 or less, the effect executed in the first game round is read out from the sound and light side RAM 94, and in the second game round, the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced. A reproduction performance is executed, and when the counter value is 6 or more, a normal jackpot performance is executed in the second game cycle. By doing so, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. In addition, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round. Specifically, the previous determination process specifies the preceding game round immediately before the second game round, and determines to execute the suggestive effect in the preceding game round. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the preceding game round is determined, the suggestive effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of the preceding game round is selected and executed. By doing so, even if there are a plurality of consecutive preceding game rounds between the first game round and the second game round, the game round reproduction effect can be executed. can. In this description, if there are 6 or more preceding game rounds in which the jackpot lottery lottery results are out of the preceding game rounds after the first game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, After that, the game round reproduction performance is not executed in the second game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, but the number (threshold value) of the preceding game rounds for determining that the game round reproduction performance is not executed is limited to 6. can be set to any number.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round, the other game round is By executing the suggestive effect in each round, the suggestive effect and the game cycle reproduction effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, even if there are a plurality of other game rounds (preceding game rounds) between the first game round and the second game round, a suggestive effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of each preceding game round is provided. By executing it, the game round reproduction effect can be executed in the second game round without giving the player a sense of incompatibility.

C. Third embodiment:
FIG. 48 is a time chart explaining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, at least part of the effect executed in the game round before the first game round (FIG. 48: first preceding game round) is reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect and the game round reproduction effect. At the same time, a case of reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game cycle will be described. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described using two cases, case c1 and case c2, as examples.

FIG. 48(a) shows, as a case c1, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is lost in the second game round executed after the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shows the processing performed by . As shown in the figure, before the first game round in which the big win lottery is won, there is a first preceding game round in which the lottery results of the big win lottery are lost.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), in case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game round and the first game round. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is a effect that foretells that the jackpot lottery will be won in the first game cycle. After executing the continuous performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result notification effect.

Incidentally, the result notification effect in the first preceding game round when the continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 47 described above. . Specifically, within the unit playing time, the variable display of the symbols is executed during the variable time, and the stop display of the symbols is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, continuous effects are executed. By doing so, a series of continuous effects can be executed from the first preceding game round to the first game round without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), after executing the result announcement effect (jackpot announcement) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special game state.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance, a special game state reproduction performance, and a specific end performance during the ending period. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and the result notification effect (jackpot announcement) in the first game time are reproduced. do. In addition, when the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game round. The content of the design is partly different.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end performance after executing a special game state reproduction performance. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost. The pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect and a result notice effect (loss notice) in the second game round.

Next, case c2 shown in FIG. 48(b) will be described. In case c2, as in case c1, there is a first preceding game round in which the lottery result of the big win lottery is lost before the first game round in which the big win lottery is won. Furthermore, in the case c2, before the second game round in which the big win lottery is won, there is a second preceding game round in which the lottery results of the big win lottery are lost.

Similar to case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game round and the first game round. After executing the continuous performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result notification effect.

After executing the result notification effect (jackpot notification) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special game state.

In the case of case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect during the ending period. Then, the game round reproduction performance is executed over the second preceding game round and the second game round. In case c2, as the game round reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game round to the first game round and the result notification effect (jackpot announcement) in the first game round are executed.

After finishing the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance in the opening performance of the special game state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game round, the normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

The third embodiment can be implemented, for example, by the following specific processing.

In this embodiment, the RAM 96 always stores the effects executed in the already executed four game rounds. Then, every time a prize is awarded to the first start port 33, the result of the big winning lottery in the game round executed by the prize is grasped by the preceding determination processing.

When it is grasped that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game round is a jackpot as a result of the preceding determination processing, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game round held one before the first game round is grasped. If the result is a loss, the continuous performance is executed over the first preceding game round and the first game round.

Then, when there are two or more reserved game rounds after the first game round before the first game round is finished, the results of the jackpot lottery for the two game rounds are grasped by the preceding determination processing, If the results of the jackpot lottery for the two game rounds are consecutive failures, case c1 is executed. That is, the suggestive effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round.

Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first game round is a loss, and the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round to be executed later is a jackpot, case c2 is executed. . That is, the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round, and the game round reproduction effect is executed in the second preceding game round and the second game round.

In the case c2, when the second preceding game round does not exist, that is, when the jackpot lottery in the game round executed after the special game state after the first game round is a jackpot, the second game round , the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time may be executed as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, if the variation time of the second game cycle is shorter than the time required to reproduce the entire continuous effect, only a part of the continuous effect may be reproduced.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, even if continuous effects are executed from the game round before the first game round to the first game round, Also, the continuous effect can be reproduced as a special game state reproduction effect and a game cycle reproduction effect. In addition, by using the processing of case c1 and case c2 together, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the continuous effect.

D. Fourth embodiment:
FIG. 49 is a time chart explaining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost is executed as the game round reproduction effect in the second game round executed after the first game round. In this description, two cases, case d1 and case d2, are used as examples to describe the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

FIG. 49(a) shows, as case d1, when the jackpot lottery is lost in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round executed after the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates the processing to be executed. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a ready-to-win effect in the first game round. The ready-to-win production performed in this case is a production that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 performs a loss notification in the result notification performance.

After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a game round reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as the suggestive effect, an effect suggesting that the effect executed in the first game round be reproduced, and as the game round reproducing effect, the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect executed in the first game round. perform the performance. Also, as a result notification effect, a big hit notification is performed.

After executing the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance as an opening performance. Also, as the ending effect, a normal ending effect is executed.

Next, case d2 will be described. In the case d2, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the big winning lottery is lost in the first game round, and the big winning lottery is lost in the second game round executed after the first game round. , shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown in the figure, in the first game round, the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed. The ready-to-win production performed in this case is a production that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 performs a loss notification in the result notification performance.

After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a game round reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as the suggestive effect, an effect suggesting that the effect executed in the first game round be reproduced, and as the game round reproducing effect, the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect executed in the first game round. perform the performance. In addition, as a result notification effect, a failure notification is performed.

The fourth embodiment can be implemented, for example, by the following specific processing.

The propriety of the jackpot lottery related to the reserved game round is determined by executing the preceding determination process every time the winning to the first start port 33 occurs. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot lottery is won in the game rounds that are held two or more ahead, the game round that wins the jackpot lottery (corresponds to the second game round in case d1). In the game round (corresponding to the first game round) reserved one before (corresponding to the first game round), the notice performance and the ready-to-win performance are executed, and the executed notice performance and ready-to-win performance are stored. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect itself, and may be other information as long as the executed notice effect and ready-to-win effect can be read again. good.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a ready-to-win performance in the first game round, and then performs a loss notification as a result notification performance. After that, in the second game round, the suggestion performance is executed, and the stored advance notice performance and ready-to-win performance are executed as the game round reproduction performance. Further, the specific start effect executed in the special game state after the second game round is realized by executing the same processing as the opening effect setting process performed by the sound emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. Case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized by executing such processing.

Further, case d2 is executed first of the two pending game rounds when there are two consecutive game rounds in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out by executing the first determination process. It can be realized by executing the ready-to-win effect in the first game round, and reproducing the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect executed in the previous game round as the suggestive effect and the game round reproduction effect in the game round to be executed later. . In this case, in the second game round, the fluctuation time of the second game round is shorter than the time required to execute all of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect in the first game round as the game round reproduction effect. In this case, for example, part or all of the advance notice effect to be executed as the game repeat reproduction effect may be omitted according to the variation time of the second game cycle.

On the other hand, in the second game round, when the fluctuation time of the second game round is longer than the time required to execute all of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect in the first game round as the game round reproduction effect. , for example, the execution time of the suggestive effect may be extended according to the variation time of the second game cycle. By preparing a plurality of types of suggestive performances corresponding to the time required for the performance and selecting the optimum suggestive performance according to the fluctuation time of the second game cycle, the suggestive performance and the game cycle reproduction performance are required. time and the variable time of the second game cycle can be made the same.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, by executing the process of case d1, even though the jackpot lottery for the second game round has been won, Since the performance executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss is executed in the second game round as the game round reproduction performance, the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won. It is difficult to make the player expect that. In addition, by executing a suggestive effect suggesting reproduction of the effect in the first game round in which the jackpot lottery was lost before executing the game round reproduction effect, in the second game round, the first game can be reproduced. It is possible to further give the player the perception that the effect executed in the round is merely reproduced. Then, the player can be made to recognize that he or she has won the big winning lottery related to the second game round only after the notification means notifies the lottery result of the big winning lottery related to the second game round, thereby making the game unexpected. You can give it character. In other words, by making the second game turn unanticipated by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by executing the process of case d2, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, even when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost, Since the game round reproduction performance is executed, the player can be given recognition that the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the game round in which the game round reproduction performance is executed is not always a big win. As a result, when the game round reproduction performance is executed, the player is given an uplifting mood and a sense of anticipation, and the player's attention to the game round in which the already executed performance is reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. Fifth embodiment (an example of processing for setting the effect type):
Next, as a fifth embodiment, an example of processing executed in the effect type setting processing (FIG. 37: S2303) described in the first embodiment will be described. The effect type setting process is a process of setting the contents of the effect to be executed in the game round in the sound emission control device 90 (sound and light side MPU 92). In this description, first, an overview of the effect type setting process executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 in this embodiment will be described. After that, the details of the processing will be explained using a flowchart.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the effect type setting process. When the effect type setting processing is started, the sound and light side MPU 92 executes the display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter for object C in order to determine the details of the announcement effect. A counter value is acquired at a predetermined timing from each random number counter of C13.

Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a random number counter used for determining how to combine a plurality of object images that constitute the advance notice effect in each game round. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short intervals. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

In this embodiment, the advance notice effect in each game round is configured by combining three types of object images. The display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter C13 for object C are random numbers for determining the display modes of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, the method of combining these three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the timing of display are determined, and set as an advance notice effect. Here, three types of object images that constitute the preview effect in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A, which is an object image forming the advance notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object A shows the behavior of a character representing a person, and is composed of three images, image A1, image A2, and image A3. 51(a) shows the image A1, FIG. 51(b) shows the image A2, and FIG. 51(c) shows the image A3. The object A may be displayed as an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images A1, A2, and A3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. In some cases, one of the three images A1, A2, and A3 is displayed as a still image by continuously displaying for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an object B, which is an object image that constitutes the advance notice effect. As illustrated, the object B shows how the weather changes, and is composed of three images, an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3. 52(a) shows the image B1, FIG. 52(b) shows the image B2, and FIG. 52(c) shows the image B3. The object B may be displayed as an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images B1, B2, and B3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. In some cases, one of the images B1, B2, and B3 is displayed as a still image by continuously displaying for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an object C, which is an object image that constitutes the advance notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object C shows the movement of the dog in the box, and is composed of three images C1, C2 and C3. 53(a) shows the image C1, FIG. 53(b) shows the image C2, and FIG. 53(c) shows the image C3. The object C may be displayed as an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images C1, C2, and C3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. In some cases, one of the images C1, C2, and C3 is displayed as a still image by continuously displaying for a predetermined period of time.

As described above, in the effect type setting processing in this embodiment, the three types of object images (objects A to C) described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53 are combined to set the advance notice effect.

Returning to FIG. After acquiring the counter values from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the object A display pattern table, the object B display pattern table, and the object C display pattern table, and sets each display pattern random number counter. Each counter value obtained from C11 to C13 is compared to determine a display pattern for each object.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for object A as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for object A shows a case where the result of the big win lottery is a big win, a case where the result of the big win lottery is a loss and a ready-to-win effect is to be executed (“loss (with reach)”), and a big win. If the result of the lottery is out and the reach effect is not executed ("out (no reach)"), it is classified into three cases.And for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter of 0 to 99 and , and display patterns.In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, as the display pattern of object A, a pattern in which object A is not displayed (non-display) and a pattern in which only image A1 is displayed ( A1), a pattern (A1-A2) for displaying images A1 and A2 in order, and a pattern (A1-A2-A3) for displaying images A1, A2 and A3 in order are preset.

When setting the notice effect in a predetermined game round, the sound and light side MPU 92 confirms whether the game round corresponds to a big hit, a loss (with reach), or a loss (without reach). Then, of the display pattern table, the part corresponding to the game round is referred to. For example, if the game round is a jackpot, the "jackpot" column of the display pattern table is referred to. Then, the display pattern is determined by comparing with the obtained value of the display pattern random number counter C11.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, the method of assigning random numbers to each display pattern is different for each of the cases of big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the frequency displayed when the jackpot, the frequency displayed when the failure (with reach), and the frequency displayed when the failure (no reach) different from That is, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) has a higher probability of being displayed in the order of big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). Conversely, the display pattern (A1) has a higher probability of being displayed in the order of failure (no reach), failure (with reach), and big win. Therefore, in the announcement effect in the game round, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed is higher than the case where the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) is higher. It is set so that the probability of a big win is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed than when is displayed. That is, the effect by the object A indicates to the player the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game by suggesting the probability of a big win in the game round, and the degree of expectation of the big win to the player (hereinafter referred to as the degree of expectation). It functions as a step-up effect that indicates (also called).

In the present embodiment, the display pattern tables for each of object A, object B, and object C have different ways of distributing random number values in each case of big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). The degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the step-up effect of the object A, the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the step-up effect of the object B, and the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the step-up effect of the object C are different from each other. For example, in the case of object B, the value of the display pattern random number in the display pattern for object B is changed so that it is not displayed in the game round in the case of loss (no reach), but is displayed in the case of loss (with reach) and a big win. It may be distributed. Specifically, in the display pattern for the object B, it can be realized by setting "non-display" in all the cases of the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99 in the case of the deviation (no reach). In this way, the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the object A when the object B is not displayed can be made different from the degree of expectation for the big prize when the object A and the object B are displayed. That is, in the display pattern tables for each of object A, object B, and object C, by setting differently how to distribute the random number value in each case of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), In addition to the step-up mode of each object image, the presence or absence of display of each object can also express the degree of expectation for a big win. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

In the present embodiment, the display pattern tables for each of object A, object B, and object C are divided into three cases: jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). However, for example, the classification of the jackpot in the display pattern table of object B is further divided into 16R variable variable jackpot, 8R variable variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot. You may make it function as step-up production|presentation which shows degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine that has a latent variable probability state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is a high probability mode), the effect of the object C is set to the degree of expectation of the variable probability state of the current game round. It may be made to function as a step-up production showing . In this way, if the objects A, B, and C have the function of suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game by the display pattern, each object can be of a different type (for example, expected jackpot or The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game, such as the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot, may be indicated.

As shown in FIG. 50, after determining display patterns for object A, object B, and object C, the sound and light side MPU 92 arranges each object in order to combine each object and display them on the display surface 41a. Set the position and timing of each object's display. Specifically, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to a preset placement/timing setting table to determine the placement position and display timing of each object.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement/timing setting table. As shown in the figure, the placement/timing setting table contains the display objects decided to be displayed, the coordinates of the placement position of each object to be displayed on the display surface 41a, and the display start of each object on the display surface 41a. are set in association with each other. The display pattern determined in the process using the random number counter is, for example, a display pattern for object A (A1-A2), a display pattern for object B (non-display), and a display pattern for object C (C1-C2- In the case of C3), the objects to be displayed are object A and object C, so reference is made to "A and C" in the left column of the placement/timing setting table. In this case, as shown in the middle column of the placement/timing setting table, the placement coordinates of object A and object C are such that the center coordinates of object A are located at (Xa2, Ya2) on the display surface 41a. , and the object C is set so that the center coordinates of the object C are positioned at (Xc1, Yc1) on the display surface 41a. Furthermore, in this case, as shown in the right column of the placement/timing setting table, the display of object A starts ta2 seconds after the start of the game round, and the display of object C starts after the game round starts. It is set to start displaying after tc1 second.

Although the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement/timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, the placement position (coordinates) of each object may be set to change with time. That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes over time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having relevance, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is The placement and display start timings of the display objects are set in the placement/timing setting table so that they do not overlap each other.

In this embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the display surface 41a is displayed in a manner in which the relative positions of the objects are considered and the objects are associated with each other. , the placement of display objects (relative placement positions between objects) and display start timing (relative timing between objects) are set in the placement/timing setting table. Furthermore, the placement and display start timing of the display objects in the placement/timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period do not overlap each other.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an announcement effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. The example of FIG. 56 shows a case where the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement/timing setting table of FIG. 55 change over time. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 56(a), 56(b), and 56(c). FIG. 56 shows a preview effect in which object A, object B, and object C are combined. Object A is displayed in a display pattern (A1-A2-A3), and object B is displayed in a display pattern (B1-B2 -B3) is displayed, and for object C, the advance notice effect is set such that the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed.

In the preview effect shown in FIG. 56, there is a story in which a person walking on a sunny day finds a box, notices that there is a dog inside the box while the weather is getting worse, and gives the dog an umbrella. expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative positions of the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are associated with each other. Furthermore, the placement and display start timing of the display objects in the placement/timing setting table are set so that the display objects are displayed on the display surface 41a in a narrative manner. By doing so, it is possible to make the announcement effect that is executed by displaying a plurality of types of object images during the same period be a effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and to add a narrative to the game. Interest can be improved.

In the example shown in FIG. 56(c), the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a without an image frame indicating the area of the object image. Specifically, object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character representing a person, and processing to display only the layer image showing a character representing a person. is running. By doing so, it is possible to create an effect in which a plurality of object images are displayed that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is subjected to the process of not displaying the image frame. A configuration may be adopted in which the image frames of some or all of the images A2 and A3 are not displayed. Also, similar processing may be performed on other object images.

The sound and light side MPU 92 thus sets the arrangement position of each object and the timing of displaying each object, and sets the advance notice effect.

Next, the processing for setting the effect type described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the effect type. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2303).

In step S3201, a counter value is acquired from each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13. After that, the process proceeds to step S3202, and it is confirmed whether the game round for which the notice effect is to be set is a jackpot, a loss (with reach), or a loss (without reach). After executing step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, each display pattern table for objects A to C is referenced to determine the display pattern of each object. After that, the process proceeds to step S3204.

In step S3204, when the display pattern is set for each object, it is determined whether or not there is no object display in the advance notice effect of the game round. That is, it is determined whether or not the display patterns of all objects A to C are "non-display".

In step S3204, when it is determined that there is no object display (non-display) in the advance notice effect in the game round (S3204: NO), the process proceeds to step S3205, and the placement/timing setting table is referred to and displayed. The coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the timing of starting display on the display surface 41a are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S3206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3204 that there is no object display (non-display) in the advance notice effect of the game round (S3204: YES), the process proceeds to step S3206 without executing step S3205.

In step S3206, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display objects, the coordinates of the arrangement positions of the respective objects on the display surface 41a, and the timing of starting the display of the respective objects are set in the advance notice effect in the game round. After that, the process proceeds to step S3207.

In step S3207, it is determined whether or not the game round is a big hit or a loss (with reach). That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect after executing the advance notice effect in the game round.

In step S3207, when it is determined that the game round is a jackpot or a loss (with reach) (S3207: YES), the process advances to step S3208 to execute reach effect setting processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S3209.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3207 that the game round is not a big hit or a loss (with reach) (S3207: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 without executing step S3208.

In step S3209, the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect set in steps S3206 and S3208 are set as effect commands. After that, the processing for setting the effect type is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a mutually related manner when displayed in the same period as the advance notice effect. The performance executed by being displayed during the period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the performance can be improved. Each object may or may not be displayed at the same time as other objects (that is, when each object is displayed alone). A production can be executed, and an object can be effectively used.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 56, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed in a manner having a story in relation to each other. It is possible to make the performance executed by being displayed into a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect executed by displaying a plurality of object images in the same period has a narrative, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables for each of object A, object B, and object C have different ways of distributing random numbers in each case of big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). The degree of advantage/disadvantage in the game and the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the step-up effects of the object images of object A, object B, and object C are different from each other. That is, even when each object is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether other objects are also displayed during the same period. You can improve your expectations.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the aspect of setting the display pattern table, for example, the classification of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot By classifying the jackpot, the effect by the object B can be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable probability big win. That is, the effect by each object can be made to function as an effect indicating the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games. Therefore, each object can be used to indicate the degree of advantage/disadvantage in various types of games.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when each object image is displayed in the same period, the relative positions of the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a at predetermined arrangement positions. A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative position between each object is taken into consideration, and the arrangement and timing are adjusted so that each object is related. The arrangement of display objects and the timing of starting display are set in the setting table. Also, the placement and display start timing of the display objects in the placement/timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, since each object image may be displayed during the same period or may not be displayed during the same period (that is, when each object is displayed alone), multiple effects are executed using each object image. It is possible to effectively utilize the object image.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. ) may be displayed in three different display modes. Corresponding to each display mode, relative positions with respect to other object images (object B, object C) are displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be executed. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes (display patterns), each object image is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined relative position among the object images. No images are superimposed and displayed without any relevance. Therefore, various effects that are executed by displaying the respective object images in the same period do not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effects can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 55, the timing at which each object starts to be displayed on the display surface 41a is set in advance by the layout/timing setting table. Therefore, when the object images are displayed in the same period, the object images are displayed at predetermined timings relative to each other, so that the object images are displayed at unrelated timings. never Therefore, the effect executed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, each object image is an image that changes over time (moving image in this embodiment), so various effects can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big prize in the jackpot lottery when object A is displayed as the advance notice effect, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery when object B is displayed as the notice effect, and object C The probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery when is displayed as the advance notice effect is different. Furthermore, the probability of winning a big win in a big win lottery when each object image is combined and displayed as an advance notice effect is also different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

F. Sixth embodiment (another example of processing for setting effect type):
Next, another example of the effect type setting process (FIG. 37: S2303) will be described as a sixth embodiment. As described above, the effect type setting processing is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game round in the sound emission control device 90 (sound and light side MPU 92). In this description, first, an overview of the effect type setting process executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 in this embodiment will be described. After that, the details of the processing will be explained using a flowchart.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the above-described fifth embodiment is the method of determining the type of object to be displayed as the advance notice effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect is determined by the display pattern random number and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a combination of multiple types of objects to be displayed in the announcement effect is set in advance by the display object table, and the sound and light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21 and displays it. By collating with the object table, a combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect is determined.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the placement positions and display start timings of the objects displayed in the preview effect are determined by the placement/timing setting table. The arrangement position and display start timing of each object are set in advance corresponding to the display pattern of . A specific description will be given below.

When the effect type setting process is started, the sound and light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display object random number counter C21 at a predetermined timing. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, executes collation with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and determines the object to be displayed in the announcement effect. Decide on a combination.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a display object table. As shown, in the display object table, the counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and the combination of each object to be displayed as the advance notice effect are set in association with each other. For example, when the acquired value of the display object random number counter C21 is 75, the object A and the object C are set as the object images displayed in the advance notice effect. The display object table according to the present embodiment differs in the method of allocating display object random number values (the number of values to be allocated) for each combination of objects displayed as the advance notice effect. For example, when only object A is displayed as a display object, display object random number values range from 0 to 19, and 20 values are assigned. Display object random number values when object A and object B are displayed are 60 to 71, and 12 values are assigned. When object A, object B, and object C are displayed, display object random number values range from 96 to 99, and four values are assigned. In this way, the number of display object random number values assigned to each combination of objects differs, so that the frequency with which each combination of objects is displayed as the advance notice effect differs.

The description returns to FIG. After determining the combination of objects to be displayed in the announcement effect, the sound and light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display pattern random number counter C22 at a predetermined timing. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the previously determined combination of display objects, and compares it with the acquired counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22. to determine a display pattern corresponding to the combination of display objects. FIG. 58 shows a case where it is determined by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that object A and object C are to be displayed as a combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect. In this case, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown, the AC display pattern table is divided into three cases: big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). For each case, the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 and the display pattern of the effect using the object A and the object C are set in association with each other.

In this embodiment, as a display pattern using object A and object C, a pattern (non-display) in which neither object A nor object C is displayed, and an image A1 of object A and an image C1 of object C are combined. Display pattern (A1/C1), pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2) for displaying image A1 and image A2 of object A in order and displaying image C1 and image C2 of object C (A1-A2/C1-C2), image of object A A display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) is set in which A1 and image A2 are displayed in order and image C1, image C2 and image C3 of object C are displayed in order. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the timing of starting display of each object are set in advance for each display pattern. The placement position and display start timing are determined.

For example, when the game round is a jackpot, and it is determined by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that object A and object C are to be displayed as a combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect. , when the counter value obtained by the display pattern random number counter C22 is "62", the display pattern of the announcement effect is determined as (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3).

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), and 54(c). As shown in the figure, in the announcement effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are displayed in order, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are displayed in order on the display surface 41a. As described above, the display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) includes the arrangement positions and display start timings of the images A1 and A2 of the object A, and the display start timings of the images C1, C2, and C3 of the object C. Since the arrangement position and display start timing are set in advance, the mode of the advance notice effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3).

Although the display pattern table for AC has been described in FIG. 60, a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. In addition, a plurality of types of display patterns are set for each display pattern table by combining images of respective objects.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an A display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for A, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), non-display, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2), display pattern (A1 -A2-A3) (see FIG. 51) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the display pattern table for A, the display pattern (A1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of failure (no reach), and in the case of failure (with reach) In the above four display patterns, the display pattern (A1-A2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the most displayed among the four display patterns. Values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the display pattern random number counter C22 so as to increase the display frequency. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player will be more likely to see the image A2 displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image A1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, expectations for winning the big winning lottery have increased, and the big winning lottery is more likely to occur when the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that than when the image A2 is displayed after the image A1 on the display surface 41a. High hopes for the election.

Next, the display pattern table for B will be described.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for B. FIG. In the case of the display pattern table for B, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), respectively, non-display, display pattern (B1-B2-B3), display pattern (B1-B2), Four display patterns of display pattern (B1) (see FIG. 52) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the display pattern table for B, the frequency of displaying the display pattern (B1-B2-B3) among the above four display patterns is the highest in the case of failure (no reach). Yes), the display pattern (B1-B2) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (B1) is the most displayed among the four display patterns. Values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the display pattern random number counter C22 so as to increase the display frequency. That is, by allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, unlike the advance notice effect by the object A described above, the player can, after the image B1 is displayed on the display surface 41a, When the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lowered, and the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image B1 than when the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lowered.

Next, the display pattern table for C will be explained.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a C display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for C, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), non-display, display pattern (C1), display pattern (C1-C2), display pattern (C1 -C2-C3) (see FIG. 53) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the case of outage (no reach), the display pattern (C1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of outage (with reach), the above four displays Among the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns. , values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the display pattern random number counter C22. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player will be more likely to see the image C2 displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, expectations for winning the big winning lottery have increased, and the big winning lottery is more likely to be won when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that than when the image C2 is displayed after the image C1 on the display surface 41a. High hopes for the election.

Next, the display pattern table for AB will be explained.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an AB display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for AB, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), non-display, display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3), display pattern (A1 -A2-A3/B1) and four display patterns (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the display pattern table for AB, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) among the four display patterns is most frequently displayed in the case of deviation (no reach). , In the case of off (with reach), the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the above four display patterns are displayed. A display pattern random number counter C22 value of 0 to 99 is assigned so that the pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is most frequently displayed.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 66(a), FIG. 66(b), and FIG. 66(c). As shown in the drawing, the forewarning effect expresses a state in which a walking person gets wet in the rain while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rainy.

When an image consisting of images A1 and B1 shown in FIG. 66(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it does not give, the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 66(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the person has noticed that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. 66(a), giving the player the impression that it is generally not good compared to the image shown in FIG. gives an indescribable recognition. When an image composed of the image A2 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 66(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person getting wet in the rain, which generally gives a bad impression. To give a player an unfavorable perception of a game situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) changes the player's recognition of the game situation to a disadvantageous recognition as the display of the notice effect progresses.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) is set by the AB display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 67(a), FIG. 67(b), and FIG. 67(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect expresses a person walking by noticing that it is sunny and putting up an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it does not give, the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of image A2 and image B1 shown in FIG. As with the image in FIG. 67(a), since it generally does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person holding an umbrella to prevent sunburn, which is generally bad. It does not give an impression and gives a not unfavorable perception of the playing situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) gives the player a recognition that it is difficult to determine whether the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous even if the display of the notice effect progresses.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The advance notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 68(a), FIG. 68(b), and FIG. 68(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect shows that the person who was walking noticed the change in the weather while the weather changed from sunny to cloudy to rainy, and was able to put up an umbrella and appropriately cope with the deterioration of the weather. is expressed.

When an image composed of images A1 and B1 shown in FIG. 68A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it does not give, the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 68B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the person has noticed that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. 68(a), and generally gives an impression that it cannot be said to be good compared to the image shown in FIG. 68(a). Gives a recognition that can not be said. After that, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 68(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person who was able to appropriately cope with the deterioration of the weather by holding an umbrella. It gives a generally good impression and gives a favorable perception of the playing situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) gives the player a recognition that the game situation is not disadvantageous in the image of FIG. In the image of FIG. 68(b), the player is given recognition of the game situation that is not advantageous, and then in the image of FIG. 68(c), the player is given the recognition of the advantageous game situation. . By displaying such an announcement effect, it is possible to give the player's sense of anticipation for the game an intonation.

As shown in FIGS. 66, 67, and 68, the effects set by the AB display pattern table allow the player to recognize that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous as the advance notice effect progresses. configured to give In particular, when comparing the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) explained in FIG. 66 and the notice effect by (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) explained in FIG. , FIG. 66(a) and FIG. 68(a) are the same image, and FIG. 66(b) and FIG. 68(b) are the same image. , the player can be given a sense of urgency as to which of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 66 and the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 68 will be changed. More specifically, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency when the person who notices the change in the weather decides whether or not to put up an umbrella at the end. It is possible to improve and improve the interest of the game.

Next, the BC display pattern table will be described.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a BC display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for BC, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), respectively, non-display, display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3), display pattern (B2-B3 /C1-C3) and four display patterns (B1/C1-C2-C3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the BC display pattern table, the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of failure (no reach). In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, among the above four display patterns, the display pattern ( A display pattern random number counter C22 value of 0 to 99 is assigned so that B1/C1-C2-C3) is most frequently displayed.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 70(a), FIG. 70(b), and FIG. 70(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect expresses that while the weather changes from cloudy to rainy, the dog pokes its head out of the box and gets wet in the rain.

When an image composed of image B2 and image C1 shown in FIG. 70(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed in cloudy weather. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. Images also do not give the player an adverse perception of the game situation. However, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 70(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, the image shows a dog with its face sticking out from the box and getting wet in the rain. is expressed, generally giving a bad impression and giving the player an unfavorable perception of the playing situation. That is, the announcement effect by the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) gives the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation when the image of FIG. 70(c) is displayed.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3/C1) is set by the BC display pattern table. The advance notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71(a), FIG. 71(b), and FIG. 71(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect expresses a state in which the weather changes from cloudy to rainy, and the box is placed in such weather.

When an image consisting of images B1 and C1 shown in FIG. 71(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed in cloudy conditions. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. Images also do not give the player an adverse perception of the game situation. Then, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image does not change from the image shown in FIG. Do not give anyone a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1) does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 72(a), FIG. 72(b), and FIG. 72(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect expresses a dog coming out of a box on a sunny day.

When an image composed of images B1 and C1 shown in FIG. 72(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed on a sunny day. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of images B1 and C2 shown in FIG. 72(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a dog coming out of the box on a sunny day. 72(a), giving the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. When the advance notice effect is set according to the display pattern table for C in FIG. 72(a) to FIG. 72(b), the image of object C changes from image C1 to image C2. provide an advantageous perception of the playing situation. After that, when an image consisting of the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 72(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a dog sticking its head out of the box on a sunny day. It gives the player an advantageous perception of the playing situation because it generally gives a good impression. In this way, the effect by the display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is similar to the announcement effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. Since an image giving a bad impression is not displayed, the player can be given an advantageous recognition of the game situation as the advance notice effect progresses.

Here, among the effects set by the BC display pattern table, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) shown in FIG. 70 and the display pattern (B2-B3/C1 - A comparison with the advance notice effect by C3) will be described.

These two preview effects are the same image up to the middle image. Specifically, FIG. 70(a) and FIG. 71(a) are the same image, and FIG. 70(b) and FIG. 71(b) are the same image. Therefore, even if either of the two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle. However, depending on the image displayed after that, the player's perception of the game situation is greatly different between these two advance notice effects. The image in FIG. 70(c) is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3, and an image of a dog getting wet in the rain generally gives a bad impression. give an unfavorable perception of On the other hand, the image of FIG. 71(c) is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3, and the image of the box placed in the rain does not give a bad impression. On the other hand, do not give unfavorable recognition about the game situation. In other words, in a state in which an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed, if the image C1 changes to the image C3 after that, the image shown in FIG. is given an unfavorable perception of the game situation, and on the other hand, in a state in which an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed, if the image C1 does not change after that, Since the image is shown in FIG. 71(c), the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 70 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 71 and displaying an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined, whether or not the image C1 changes to the image C3 is the game. It is possible to attract the attention of other players and to give the player a sense of urgency.

In the advance notice effect based on the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed more than the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Specifically, an image depicting a dog peeking out from inside a box generally gives a better impression than an image depicting a box being placed. To provide a player with an advantageous perception of the game situation. Further, when the advance notice effect is set according to the display pattern table for C in FIG. When the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3, the player is more informed about the game situation than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3. Gives favorable recognition.

However, when the image B3 is combined with the image C1 and the image C3, when the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 71(c)), the image C3 This provides the player with more advantageous recognition of the game situation than when it is combined with the image B1 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 70(c)).

That is, when the image B3 (image of rain) is not combined with each of the images C1 and C3, the image C3 (image of the inside of the box) is displayed more than when the image C1 (image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Although the image of the dog) displayed on the display surface 41a gives the player more advantageous recognition of the game situation, the image B3 (the image of the rain) is added to each of the images C1 and C3. ), the image C1 (image of a box) displayed on the display surface 41a is more effective than the image C3 (image of a dog in a box) displayed on the display surface 41a. To give a player an advantageous perception of a game situation.

Therefore, depending on how the images are combined, it is possible to give the player various perceptions of the game situation. In the case of the present embodiment, when a predetermined image is combined with a performance image that steps up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation increases, the player will have a completely different recognition of the game situation. can be given to Even when the player recognizes the image C1 (image of a box) and the image C3 (image of a dog in a box) displayed on the display surface 41a, the player can determine whether or not the image B3 (image of rain) is displayed. It recognizes that the game situation differs depending on the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a.

Also, as described in the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64, in the case of the present embodiment, the image C3 (image C3) is displayed more than the image C1 (box image) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (rain image). The image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed without combining the image B3 (the image of the rain) with the image B3 (the image of the rain). When the image is displayed in combination with the image B3 (image of rain), the winning lottery is higher than when the image C3 (image of a dog in a box) is displayed in combination with the image B3 (image of rain). There is a high probability that Therefore, when the image C1 (image of a box) or the image C3 (image of a dog in a box) or an image of an object C or a part thereof is displayed, whether or not to display an image B3 (image of rain) is determined. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player.

Normally, the effect image in which the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the effect image progresses (for example, as the effect image progresses from image P1 to image P2 to image P3) is image P2 from image P1 and image P2 from image P2. P3 is configured to be an image that gives a better impression to the player. In other words, the images P1, P2, and P3 are configured so that the order of the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the order of the impression given to the player are the same. With such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be improved as the effect image steps up (progresses). Displaying [image P1 + image Q], [image P2 + image Q], and [image P3 + image Q] by combining other images (for example, image Q) with such a normal effect image. Even so, [image P2 + image Q] is better than [image P1 + image Q], and [image P3 + image Q] is better than [image P2 + image Q]. configured to That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the image Q is simply combined, [image P2 + image Q] is more likely to give the player a better impression than [image P3 + image Q]. It is difficult to create an image that gives a good impression. In this embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image displayed as the step-up effect image and the content of the combined image. In this embodiment, by devising the contents of the image P1, the image P2, the image P3, and the image Q, the image Q is combined even though the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2. In this case, [image P2+image Q] can give a better impression to the player than [image P3+image Q].

By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the following recognition to the player. That is, the effect image not combined with the image Q gives recognition that the game situation is more advantageous as the image P1→image P2→image P3 progresses. Q]→[image P2+image Q]→[image P3+image Q], it is possible to recognize that the game situation is disadvantageous.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an ABC display pattern table. In the case of the ABC display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), non-display and display patterns (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3 ), display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3), and display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3). there is As shown in the figure, in the ABC display pattern table, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is the most out of the four display patterns in the case of deviation (no reach). The frequency of display is high, and in the case of outliers (with reach), the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns, and the jackpot In the case of the above four display patterns, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is displayed most frequently, so that the display pattern of 0 to 99 The value of the random number counter C22 is assigned.

Next, the display pattern table for AC will be explained.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 74(a), FIG. 74(b), and FIG. 74(c). As shown in the figure, the preview effect expresses a person walking and a dog sticking its face out of the box getting wet in the rain while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rainy. there is

When an image composed of image A1, image B1, and image C1 shown in FIG. 74(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person and a box on a sunny day. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of image A2, image B2, and image C2 shown in FIG. 74(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows the weather changing from sunny to cloudy, and the person showing the change of weather. The image also shows a dog poking its head out of the box, and the image does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. However, when an image composed of images A2, B3, and C3 shown in FIG. 74(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, the image includes the person who noticed the change in weather and the person inside the box. A dog with its face sticking out from behind is shown getting wet in the rain, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) gives the player's expectation for the game an inflection, and at the end of the notice effect, the player , gives an unfavorable perception of the playing situation.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 75(a), FIG. 75(b), and FIG. 75(c). As shown in the figure, the advance notice effect expresses a person who notices the change in weather and a dog coming out of the box while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy.

When an image composed of images A1, B1, and C1 shown in FIG. 75(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking on a sunny day and a box placed there. is expressed, and generally does not give a bad impression, so the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of image A2, image B2, and image C2 shown in FIG. 75(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy, and the change in the weather is noticed in the image. A person and a dog peeking out from inside the box are represented, and this image does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. When an image composed of image A2, image B2 and image C3 shown in FIG. 75(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog sticking its head out of the box are represented in cloudy conditions. , the image does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The advance notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 76(a), FIG. 76(b), and FIG. 76(c). As shown in the illustration, the preview effect expresses a scene where the person walking while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rainy, notices the change in the weather, and gives an umbrella to the dog that sticks its face out of the box. It is

When the image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 76(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking on a sunny day and a box placed thereon. is expressed, and generally does not give a bad impression, so the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of image A2, image B2, and image C2 shown in FIG. 76(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy. A person and a dog peeking out from inside the box are represented, and this image does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Then, when an image consisting of images A3, B3, and C3 shown in FIG. 76(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a dog sticking its head out of the box in the rain and an umbrella for the dog. Since the person to whom the offer is made is represented and the image generally gives a moving impression, it gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation.

Here, among the effects set by the ABC display pattern table, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. A comparison with the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) will be described.

These two preview effects are the same image up to the middle image. Specifically, FIG. 74(a) and FIG. 76(a) are the same image, and FIG. 74(b) and FIG. 76(b) are the same image. Therefore, even if either of the two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle. However, depending on the image displayed after that, the player's perception of the game situation is greatly different between these two advance notice effects. The image of FIG. 74(c) is an image in which the image A2, the image B3, and the image B3 are combined. An image in which a person and a dog get wet in the rain generally gives a bad impression. On the other hand, it gives an unfavorable perception of the game situation. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 76(c) is an image in which image A3, image B3, and image C3 are combined, and is an image in which a person is holding an umbrella in the rain so that the dog does not get wet in the rain. is an image that gives a good impression, it gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. In other words, when the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined and the image A2 does not change after that, the image is shown in FIG. 74(c). , giving the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation, and on the other hand, in a state in which an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined is displayed, the image A2 is changed to the image A3 after that. , the image is shown in FIG. 76(c), giving the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 74 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 76 and displaying an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined, it is determined whether the image A2 changes to the image A3. This point can attract the player's attention and give the player a sense of urgency.

Further, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 76 has the following characteristics.

In the advance notice effect based on the display pattern table for B shown in FIG. 63, as the effect image progresses from image B1 to image B2 to image B3, the appearance of the weather getting worse is expressed, so the effect image progresses. As it does so, it gives the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. Further, when the notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 is set, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is set lower when the notice effect changes from the image B1 to the image B2 to the image B3. Therefore, as the image B1, image B2, and image B3 proceed, the player is given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. That is, the object B gives the player a disadvantageous recognition by advancing the images in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3.

However, object B is combined with object A whose images progress in order of image A1, image A2, and image A3, and object C whose images progress in order of image C1, image C2, and image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2- A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change the effect image to a content that impresses the player, and to give the player an advantage in terms of the game situation. It can be changed to an image that gives recognition. In this way, each image configured as object A, object B, and object C in this embodiment can be displayed as one object or displayed in combination with other objects by devising the content of the image. Depending on the situation, it is possible to greatly change the impression given by the image, and it is also possible to greatly change the player's recognition of the game situation.

Note that, in the present embodiment, an announcement effect by object A, object B, and object C, or an announcement effect consisting of a combination thereof, is used as an effect to suggest whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. That is, these advance notice effects are used as effects indicating the degree of expectation for the big win, but they may be used as effects for indicating the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot or the degree of expectation for the probability variable state to the player. In this case, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous, depending on how the images of the respective objects are combined.

Next, the processing for setting the effect type in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2303).

In step S3301, a counter value is acquired from the display object random number counter C21. After that, the flow advances to step S3302 to refer to the display object table, execute collation with the obtained counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and determine the combination of objects to be displayed as the announcement effect. After executing step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, a counter value is obtained from the display pattern random number counter C22. After that, the process proceeds to step S3304, and it is confirmed whether the game round for which the notice effect is to be set is a jackpot, a loss (with reach), or a loss (without reach). After executing step S3304, the process advances to step S3305.

In step S3305, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of objects to be displayed as the advance notice effect is referred to, and the obtained counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is collated to determine the display pattern. After that, the flow advances to step S3306 to set the determined display pattern as the announcement effect. After executing step S3306, the process advances to step S3307.

In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the game round is a jackpot. In step S3307, when it is determined that the game round is a jackpot (S3307: YES), the process proceeds to step S3308.

In step S3308, it is determined whether or not the display pattern of the announcement effect set in step S3306 is the full display pattern. Here, the full display pattern means that the combination of objects displayed as the advance notice effect is three objects, object A, object B, and object C, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2- B3/C1-C2-C3). That is, it refers to the display pattern shown in FIG. When it is determined in step S3308 that the set display pattern of the notice effect is the full display pattern (S3308: YES), the process proceeds to step S3309.

In step S3309, as setting processing of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-reach effect to be executed after the advance notice effect of the full display pattern is set to a sequel effect expressing a sequel to the effect expressed in the full display pattern.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sequel effect executed as a ready-to-win effect. The sequel effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 78(a), FIG. 78(b), and FIG. 78(c). As illustrated, the sequel effect is a effect showing how a person walks in the rain with a dog under his/her umbrella. By executing such a sequel effect, it is possible to show the player that the probability of winning a big win is high, and to improve the player's sense of expectation.

The description returns to FIG. In step S3309, after the sequel effect is set as the ready-to-win effect, the process proceeds to step S3310.

When it is determined in step S3307 that the game round is not a big hit (S3307: NO), the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the game round is reachable, that is, out (with reachable). When it is determined in step S3311 that the game round is ready (S3311: YES), or when it is determined in step S3308 that the display pattern of the notice effect set is not the full display pattern (S3308: NO), The process advances to step S3312.

In step S3312, normal ready-to-win effect is set as setting processing for ready-to-win effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S3310.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3311 that the game round is not reachable (S3311: NO), the process proceeds to step S3310 without executing step S3312.

In step S3310, the notice effect set in step S3306 and the ready-to-win effect set in step S3309 are set as effect commands. After that, the effect type setting processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the player's perception of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation depending on how the objects are combined. It is possible to use each object image effectively. For example, even when the object A is displayed, it is possible to determine the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation given to the player depending on how the object A is combined with other objects or whether it is displayed during the same period as the other objects. Since the recognition of disadvantages is different, it is possible to execute various effects using each object image, and each object image can be effectively used. In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed differs for each of various display patterns made up of combinations of object images, the degree of attention of the player to the effect constituted by each display pattern, It can improve interest and expectations.

Furthermore, when the object images are displayed in combination, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed according to the game situation (for example, big win, loss (with reach), loss (without reach)) is set, it is possible to give the player various recognitions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game by adjusting the arrangement position. Furthermore, when displaying a combination of object images, a display pattern is set in which the display start timing of each object is changed according to the game situation. , the player can be given various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. Seventh embodiment:
FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the above-described first to sixth embodiments is that an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) for outputting date information and time information is provided in the sound emission control device 90. be. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires the date information and time information output from the RTC 96, and executes the RTC presentation, which is a presentation based on the acquired date information and time information. In this embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition, and if it determines that they match, the RTC effect is started. Start processing for execution. The RTC effect of the present embodiment is composed of a 300-second RTC effect video and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect video, and is executed at 00 minutes past the hour.

FIG. 80 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is established while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the background moving image. The RTC effect in-progress flag shown in the drawing is a flag that is turned ON when the RTC effect start condition is established and the RTC effect is started, and is turned OFF when the RTC effect is finished.

When the pattern display device 41 is displaying the background moving image and the time reaches 00:00 every hour and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the background moving image. A mode of displaying a moving image is shifted to a mode of displaying an RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music. At the same time, while maintaining the sound output level (volume) preset by the player, the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position "01".

When a predetermined display period (300 seconds in this embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to display the RTC effect moving image. The mode is shifted to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed. When the display control device 100 shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the display control apparatus 100 starts the display from the temporal head position “01” of the background moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and While maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound produced, the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the background music.

Note that the sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music. , the type of background music for which cue processing is to be executed is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 can display a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to the plurality of types of background music. A configuration may also be adopted in which a background moving image corresponding to the background music is selected and cue processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to appreciate a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In FIG. 83, which will be described later, even when the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform background music and background video cueing processing, the background music and the background video are similarly selected from a plurality of types. can be adopted.

FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is established while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the demonstration moving image.

When the time reaches 00 minutes while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the demonstration video and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the demonstration video. is shifted from the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 changes the time of the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01" and the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the output level preset by the player.

When a predetermined display period (300 seconds in this embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to display the RTC effect moving image. The mode is shifted to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image. Then, the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal head position “01” of the demonstration moving image when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration video (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC production music, and the sound output level ( volume) to 0.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the transition condition is met while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the transition condition is to shift the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed, and to shift the sound output mode to the mode in which the volume is zero (silent state). It is a condition.

The display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the background video when the time reaches 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1) while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the background video. is shifted from the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music. At the same time, while maintaining the sound output level (volume) preset by the player, the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position "01".

The display control device 100 stops changing the pattern on the main display unit 45 while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t2), and 15 seconds after the stop of the pattern changing, the transition condition is set. is established (time t3), after a predetermined display period (300 seconds in this embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. Transition (time t4). Then, the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal head position “01” of the demonstration moving image when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration video (time t4), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC production music, and the sound output level ( volume) to 0.

FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is met while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the return condition is that the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the sound output mode is set to output background music at a preset volume. This is a condition for returning to the mode.

When the time reaches 00 minutes while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the demonstration video and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the demonstration video. is shifted from the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 changes the time of the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01" and the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the output level preset by the player.

When the pattern display device 41 starts to change the pattern on the main display unit 45 while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed and the return condition is satisfied (time t2), the display control device 100 returns the RTC effect moving image to the predetermined RTC effect moving image. After the display period (300 seconds in this embodiment) ends, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is restored to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3). Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and While maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound produced, the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the background music.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32) executed in the sound and light side MPU of the first embodiment is that the standby state transition processing (step S1803) is executed after the command response processing (step S1802) is executed. The only difference is that the RTC effect processing (step S1802a) is executed before performing the processing, and other processing is the same as in the first embodiment. In the RTC effect processing, a process for executing the RTC effect is executed. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described below.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing RTC effect processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the RTC rendering flag is ON. The RTC rendering flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC rendering is being executed. If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC rendering flag is not ON (S3401: NO), the flow advances to step S3402 to read time information output from the RTC 96. FIG. After that, the process advances to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches 00 minutes every hour. If it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information does not match the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S3403: NO), this RTC effect processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information coincides with the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3404, RTC presentation time setting processing is executed. Specifically, "150000" (that is, 5.0 min) is set in the RTC presentation time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter area 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S3404, the process advances to step S3405.

In step S3405, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts processing for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S3405, the process advances to step S3406.

In step S3406, RTC effect music output start processing is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC production music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped, and the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S3407 to turn on the RTC rendering flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S3408.

In step S3408, it is determined whether or not any of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. A situation in which any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON is a situation in which the transition condition described above is satisfied and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. means. If it is determined in step S3408 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S3408: YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

In step S3409, the reduced audio output level (volume) is returned to the value preset by the player. After that, the flow advances to step S3410 to turn on the post-RTC effect demonstration video start flag. The post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is a flag for starting the demonstration moving image after the RTC effect ends. is a flag that is turned ON when After executing step S3410, the process advances to step S3411 to turn off the ON flags among the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S3412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3408 that the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag are all OFF (S3408: NO), the processing from step S3409 to step S3411 is executed. Without, the process proceeds to step S3412.

In step S3412, it is determined whether or not the return condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition establishment flag is ON (S3412: YES), the flow advances to step S3413 to turn OFF the demo video start flag after the RTC effect, and the flow advances to step S3414 to establish the return condition establishment. Turn off the flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S3412: NO), this RTC effect processing ends without executing the processing in steps S3413 and S3414.

In step S3401, if it is determined that the RTC rendering flag is ON (S3401: YES), that is, if the RTC rendering is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3415.

In step S3415, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC rendering time timer counter Tr set in step S3403 is zero. If it is determined in step S3415 that it is time for the RTC effect to end (S3415: YES), the process advances to step S3416 to proceed to processing when the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3415 that it is not the timing for ending the RTC effect (S3415: NO), the process proceeds from step S3408 to step S3414. The reason for this is that there is a possibility that the transition condition and the return condition are established even during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S3408 to step S3414.

In step S3416, the RTC rendering flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S3417 to execute RTC effect music output stop processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S3418.

In step S3418, it is determined whether or not the RTC effected demonstration video start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3418 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is not ON (S3418: NO), the flow advances to step S3419 to transmit a background moving image start command to display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S3420 to execute background music output start processing. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3418 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is ON (S3418: YES), the process advances to step S3421 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to the display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the flow advances to step S3422 to turn off the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S3423.

In step S3423, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because, in the present embodiment, music to be output together with the demonstration video is not set. After executing step S3423, the process advances to step S3424 to turn on the cue determination flag. Through this processing, the cue determination flag can be turned ON during display of the demonstration moving image. After executing step S3424, the process advances to step S3425 to turn off the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag. After that, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing standby state transition processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition processing (FIG. 41) executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 of the first embodiment is that before executing the processing (step S2701) for determining whether or not the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. , a process (step S2700) for determining whether or not the RTC effecting flag is ON, and other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

In step S2700, it is determined whether or not the RTC effecting flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RTC effecting flag is ON (S2700: YES), this standby state transition processing ends. That is, it is configured so as not to shift to the standby state during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2700 that the RTC rendering flag is not ON (S2700: NO), the process advances to step S2701 to determine whether or not the return condition fulfillment flag is ON. Since the subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment, the description is omitted.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the display side MPU 102 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the command handling process (FIG. 45) executed in the display-side MPU 102 of the first embodiment is that after the process for starting the display of the background moving image (step S3112) is executed, other processes (step S3113) are executed. ) is executed, the processing of steps S3112a and S3112b, which will be described later, is executed, and other processing is the same as in the first embodiment.

In step S3112a, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores an RTC effect moving image start command. If it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112b to execute processing for starting display of the RTC effect moving image. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the RTC effect moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After executing step S3112b, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112b. Since the subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment, the description is omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the mode of displaying the background moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and then the RTC effect moving image is displayed in advance. When the period has expired, the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the background moving image is shifted from the predetermined temporal position. Start display. Therefore, control can be simplified compared to the configuration in which the temporal position at which the background moving image is started to be displayed varies when transitioning to the mode of displaying the background moving image. As a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes when transitioning to the mode of displaying the background moving image, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the RTC effect A configuration in which the display of the background moving image is started from the temporal position of the background moving image that was being displayed at the timing immediately before transitioning to the mode of displaying the moving image, or the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the background moving image. When the RTC effect moving image is displayed, the temporal position of the background moving image to start displaying is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed from the mode of displaying the background moving image. Even after shifting to the mode, the background moving image continues to be played as internal processing, and when the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the background that is continuously played back as internal processing. A configuration for displaying a moving image on the pattern display device 41 may be used.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and then the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends. In this case, the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is shifted to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, and when the mode is shifted to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the demonstration video. . Therefore, control can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which display of the demonstration moving image is started varies when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. It should be noted that, as a configuration in which the display of the demonstration video is started to change when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video ends, the RTC effect A configuration in which the display of the demonstration video is started from the temporal position of the demonstration video that was being displayed at the timing immediately before transitioning to the mode of displaying the video, or the mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed is shifted to the mode in which the demonstration video is displayed. When the RTC effect video is displayed, the temporal position of the demonstration video to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after shifting to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video, and the RTC effect video is displayed from the mode of displaying the demonstration video. Even after the transition to the mode, the demo video continues to be played as internal processing, and when the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is changed to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, the demo that is continuously played as internal processing. A configuration for displaying a moving image on the pattern display device 41 may be used.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, even if the transition condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed, the RTC effect moving image is not interrupted during the predetermined display period. However, after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image is over, the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, so that the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, even if the return condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed, the RTC effect moving image is not interrupted during the predetermined display period. However, since the mode of displaying the background moving image is restored after the end of the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. As the background moving image is displayed, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the background moving image from a predetermined temporal position when displaying the background moving image. Background videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this embodiment are installed witnesses a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the pachinko machine 10 .

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the temporal start position of the background moving image Since the display starts from , it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player compared to the configuration in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the time of the background moving image when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image. . For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display of the background moving image is started from a position in the middle of time when the background moving image is displayed, the player can watch the background moving image from the middle position in time. Therefore, there is a possibility that you may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there are parts of the background video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the player can be allowed to watch the background moving image from the temporal start position, so that the player can be less uncomfortable and the background moving image can be viewed from the beginning. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he or she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, Since the output of the background music is started, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, compared to a configuration in which the temporal position of starting the output of the background music varies. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music is started fluctuates, for example, in FIG. The output of the background music is started from the temporal position of the background music that was output at the timing immediately before the background music is output, or the output is started when the mode of outputting the RTC production music is changed to the mode of outputting the background music. A configuration for determining the temporal position of the background music to be played based on the elapsed time after shifting to the mode of outputting the RTC effect music, even after the mode of outputting the background music is shifted to the mode of outputting the RTC effect music. In addition to continuing the reproduction of the background music as an internal process, when the mode of outputting the RTC effect music is shifted to the mode of outputting the background music, the background music that is being reproduced is continuously output as an internal process. mentioned.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the temporal starting position of the background music Since the output is started from , it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player compared to the configuration in which the output is started from a position in the middle of the background music. For example, if a configuration were adopted in which the output of the background music is started from a position in the middle of time, the player would be able to appreciate the background music from the position in the middle of time. You may feel unsatisfactory that there are parts of the background music that you have not listened to. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the player can be made to listen to the background music from the beginning position in terms of time. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he or she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. As the demonstration moving image is displayed, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the demonstration moving image from a predetermined temporal position when displaying the demonstration moving image. Demo videos can be synced. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the demonstration moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this embodiment are installed witnesses a spectacular situation in which demo moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the pachinko machine 10 .

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the temporal start position of the demonstration moving image Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the display is started from a temporally middle position of the demonstration video when shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration video and displaying the demonstration video, it gives the player a sense of discomfort. can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a position in the temporal middle of the demo video when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video and displaying the demo video, the player will not be able to view the demo video temporally. Since you will be watching from a certain position in the middle, you may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfied that there are parts of the demo video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the player can be allowed to watch the demonstration video from the temporal start position, so that the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced and the demonstration video can be viewed. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he or she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. First, the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the eighth embodiment, and then the details of the processing will be described. The hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.

H1. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 88(a) shows the display surface 41a of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown, the display surface 41a of the pachinko machine 10 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first reservation display area Ds1, reservation displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14 indicating the number of reservations based on the winning to the first starting port 33 are displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, reservation displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24 indicating the number of reservations based on the winning to the second starting port 34 are displayed. Each pending display corresponds to the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired and stored based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. The maximum number of reserved displays is four Dm11 to Dm14 in the first reserved display area Ds1 and four Dm21 to Dm24 in the second reserved display area Ds2.

As for the respective pending displays displayed in the first pending display area Ds1, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13 and Dm14 is the object of the jackpot lottery. Similarly, for the respective pending displays displayed in the second pending display area Ds2, the value of the big winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23 and Dm24 is the object of the big winning lottery.

The display mode of each pending display suggests the possibility that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each pending display will win the jackpot lottery, and has a plurality of stages from high to low corresponding to the level of the possibility. is set. As the display mode of the reserved display becomes higher (ranked up) in a plurality of stages, the value of the big winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the reserved display suggests that the possibility of winning the big winning lottery is high.

FIG. 88(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the pending display set in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending display is set in a plurality of stages from high to low corresponding to the probability of winning the jackpot lottery. The display mode of the pending display is divided into five levels, from top to bottom, that is, an actual display level Lvr5, an actual display level Lvr4, an actual display level Lvr3, an actual display level Lvr2, and an actual display level Lvr1. A display mode corresponding to a higher actual display level Lvr is set as the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher, and a display mode corresponding to the lower actual display level Lvr is set as the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is lower. .

In this embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is expressed in color. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr5 is yellow, the actual display level Lvr4 is red, the actual display level Lvr3 is green, the actual display level Lvr2 is blue, and the actual display level Lvr1 is white. In addition, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is not limited to the mode represented by color, but may be a mode recognizable by the player, such as a mode represented by a pattern or a mode represented by a character. Various display modes can be adopted as long as the difference in each actual display level Lvr is expressed.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment executes an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display. For example, an effect of changing a white pending display to blue, an effect of changing a blue pending display to red, and the like are executed.

In the present embodiment, when executing the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display, the later the changing pending display becomes the target of the jackpot lottery, the more the display mode changes. An effect is executed so that the number of stages in which the actual display level Lvr has increased between before and after the change of the display mode in the suspended display is increased. More precisely, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the target of the big win lottery is the later among the displayed pending displays. is changed, the stepwise width (before the display mode change The display mode of the pending display is changed so that the difference in the actual display level Lvr between (1) and (2) after the change increases.

Specifically, when the display mode of the suspension display Dm11 is changed to a higher display mode, the display mode of the suspension display Dm12 is changed to a higher display mode than the difference between the stages before and after the change (the difference in the actual display level Lvr). The difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) is greater when changing the mode, and before and after the change when the display mode of the pending display Dm12 is changed to a higher display mode. The difference in stage (difference in actual display level Lvr) between before and after the change when the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is changed to a higher display mode (difference in actual display level Lvr) is larger than the difference in level (difference in actual display level Lvr). , the display mode of the suspension display Dm14 is changed to a higher display mode based on the difference between the stages before and after the change (the difference in the actual display level Lvr) when the display mode of the suspension display Dm13 is changed to the higher display mode. The display mode of the pending display is changed so that the difference between the stages before and after the change in the case (difference in the actual display level Lvr) becomes larger.

In the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm11, the display mode is changed to a display mode one level higher. That is, when the display mode of the pending display Dm11 is changed to a higher display mode, there is only one difference (difference in actual display level Lvr) between before and after the change. When changing the display mode of the pending display Dm12, it is changed to a display mode two levels higher. That is, there are two differences (differences in the actual display level Lvr) between before and after the change when the display mode of the pending display Dm12 is changed to a higher display mode. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, it is changed to a display mode three levels higher. That is, there are three differences (differences in the actual display level Lvr) between before and after the change when the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is changed to the higher display mode. When changing the display mode of the pending display Dm14, the display mode is changed to a display mode that is four levels higher. That is, there are four differences (differences in actual display level Lvr) between before and after the change when the display mode of the pending display Dm14 is changed to a higher display mode.

In the case of the pending display Dm11, for example, if the pending display Dm11 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to blue (actual display level Lvr2), which is the display mode of the next higher stage. is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4), which is the display mode one step higher. In the case of the pending display Dm12, for example, if the pending display Dm12 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to green (actual display level Lvr3), which is the display mode that is two levels higher. is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is the display mode two steps higher. In the case of the pending display Dm13, for example, if the pending display Dm13 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4), which is the display mode that is three levels higher. is blue (actual display level Lvr2), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is a display mode three levels higher. In the case of the pending display Dm14, for example, if the pending display Dm14 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is a display mode four steps higher.

Changing the display mode of the pending displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second pending display area Ds2 is the same as changing the display mode of the pending displays Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first pending display area Ds1. In addition, among the displayed pending displays, the display mode of the pending display that is later in the order of the big win lottery is changed, the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the pending display. The display mode of the pending display is changed so that the gradual width in the plurality of stages of .

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display will be changed, prior to changing the display mode of the pending display. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from among a plurality of prepared suggestive effects in accordance with an object whose display mode is to be changed from among displayed reserved displays. Hereinafter, an effect consisting of an effect for changing the display mode of the pending display and a suggestive effect will also be referred to as a pending effect.

FIG. 89 and FIG. 90 are explanatory diagrams for explaining suggestive effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

FIG. 89(a) shows a suggestion effect (pattern 1) executed prior to changing the display mode of the pending display Dm11. In the suggestion effect (pattern 1), a gun W1 with a short range is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W1 and hits the hold display Dm11. After that, the display mode of the pending display Dm11 changes. In other words, when the gun W1 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is the pending display Dm11.

FIG. 89(b) shows a suggestion effect (pattern 2) executed prior to changing the display mode of the suspension display Dm11 or the suspension display Dm12. In the suggestion effect (pattern 2), a gun W2 having a longer range than the gun W1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W2 and hits the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. Thereafter, the display mode of the bullet-hit holding display (holding display Dm11 or holding display Dm12) changes. In other words, when the gun W2 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is the pending display Dm11 or the pending display Dm12.

FIG. 90(a) shows a suggestion effect (pattern 3) executed prior to changing the display mode of the suspension display Dm12 or the suspension display Dm13. In the suggestive effect (pattern 3), a tank W3 having a cannon with a longer range than the gun W2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a cannonball is fired from the cannon of the tank W3 and hits the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12 or hold display Dm13) that has been hit by the shell changes. In other words, when the tank W3 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is the pending display Dm12 or the pending display Dm13.

FIG. 90(b) shows a suggestion effect (pattern 4) that is executed prior to changing the display mode of any one of the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, and the pending display Dm14. In the suggestive effect (pattern 4), the display surface 41a displays a missile W4 with a longer range than the cannon of the tank W3. Then, the missile W4 is launched and hits one of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12, hold display Dm13, or hold display Dm14) hit by the missile W4 changes. In other words, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is any one of the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, and the pending display Dm14.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, prior to changing the display mode of the pending display, executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display will change, and Of these, a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggested effects prepared according to the object whose display mode is to be changed.

For example, when missile W4 is displayed as a suggestive effect (see FIG. 90(b)), the pending display whose display mode may change is pending display Dm12, pending display Dm13, or pending display Dm14. When the hold display that the launched missile W4 hits is the hold display Dm13 rather than the hold display Dm12, and the hold display Dm14 rather than the hold display Dm13, the number of steps by which the actual display level Lvr rises before and after the display mode change is increased. growing. Therefore, when the suggestive effect is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes in which range the display mode of the pending display changes (for example, when the suggestive effect pattern 4 is displayed, Dm12 to Dm14 are displayed). The player recognizes that the display mode of any one of the reserved displays in the range changes, and makes the player guess which display mode of the reserved display will change among the reserved displays in the range, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation and urgency. can do.

An example of processing for realizing this embodiment will be described in detail below.

H2. Processing details:
The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment is the processing contents of the update processing (first embodiment: FIG. 36) and effect setting processing (first embodiment: FIG. 37) at the time of winning. Therefore, in this description, the update process and effect setting process at the time of winning in the present embodiment will be described, and description of other processes will be omitted.

<Update processing at the time of winning>
FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of winning in the eighth embodiment. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command handling process (FIG. 35: S2101).

The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 36) in the update process at the time of winning is that the present embodiment adds a pending effect parameter setting process as step S3505. Steps S3501 to S3504 in the update process at the time of winning in this embodiment and steps S2201 to S2204 in the update process at the time of winning in the first embodiment (FIG. 36) are the same process. Therefore, the description of the processing in steps S3501 to S3504 is omitted.

The pending effect parameter setting process in step S3505 is a subroutine that is executed to set various parameters necessary for executing the suggestive effect and changing the display mode of the pending display. The details of the parameter setting process for holding effect will be described later.

Here, the pending effect storage area used for the pending effect parameter setting process will be described. The parameters set by the parameter setting process for pending effect are stored in the storage area for pending effect provided in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. The holding effect storage area is a storage area provided in the sound and light side RAM 94 provided in the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the holding effect storage area. The storage area for suspension performance includes a storage area for first suspension performance and a storage area for second suspension performance. FIG. 92(a) shows the storage area for the first pending effect, and FIG. 92(b) shows the storage area for the second pending effect.

The first suspension effect storage area is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the suspension displays Dm11 to Dm14, which are the suspension displays in the first suspension display area Ds1. The second suspension effect storage area is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the suspension displays Dm21 to Dm24, which are the suspension displays of the second suspension display area Ds2. Since the first pending effect storage area and the second pending effect storage area have the same configuration, the first pending effect storage area shown in FIG. A description of the second pending effect storage area will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), the storage area for the first pending effect stores various parameters and flags for each pending game round (n) for the first starting port. The illustrated reserved game times (n=1 to 4) for the first starting port correspond to the reserved display Dm11 to the reserved display Dm14. That is, the reserved game rounds are executed in order from the reserved game rounds of the first starting opening (n=1) to the reserved game rounds of the first starting opening (n=4).

As shown in the figure, the storage area for the first pending effect stores an additional level Lva, a display level upper limit value Lvm, an actual display level Lvr, and a pending changeable flag for each pending game round (n) for the first starting port. memorize

The additional level Lva is a parameter whose value is fixed for each storage area corresponding to each reserved game round (n=1 to 4). That is, the additional level Lva of the reserved game round (n=1) of the first start opening is fixed at 1, and the additional level Lva of the reserved game round (n=2) of the first starting opening is fixed at 2. The additional level Lva of the reserved game round (n=3) of the first start opening is fixed at 3, and the additional level Lva of the reserved game round (n=4) of the first starting opening is fixed at 4. there is The additional level, when changing the display mode of the pending display, changes the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is later in the order of the big win lottery target among the displayed pending displays. It is possible to increase the stepwise width (difference in actual display level Lvr) in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the suspended display as the change is made. It is a parameter used for this purpose, and is a value corresponding to the number of steps of the actual display level Lvr that rises when the display mode of the pending display changes. Therefore, the value of the additional level Lva is larger for the pending display corresponding to the later value of the big win random number counter C1 in the order of the big win lottery target. In other words, it is the level value potentially given to each pending game round.

On the other hand, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are associated with various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 in each reserved game round, and each time the game round is executed, the stored area is moved to the next area. Shift to the storage area of the reserved game round. For example, as shown in FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b), the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr stored in the storage area of the pending game round (n=4) of the first starting port are Each parameter is shifted to the storage area of the pending game round (n=3) of the first starting port in the first pending effect storage area when the game round is executed once, and further the game round is executed once. Then, it shifts to the storage area of the pending game round (n=2) of the first starting port in the storage area for the first pending effect.

The display level upper limit value Lvm is a parameter that defines the upper limit value of how high the actual display level Lvr can be changed when changing the display mode of the pending display. For example, a suspended display with a display level upper limit value Lvm of 5 can change the actual display level Lvr up to 5. FIG. In the suspended display with the display level upper limit value Lvm of 3, the actual display level Lvr can be changed up to 3, but the actual display level Lvr cannot be changed to an actual display level Lvr higher than 3, such as 4 or 5. Can not.

The actual display level Lvr is a parameter indicating the level of the current pending display mode, as described with reference to FIG.

It should be noted that the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are values that are stored corresponding to the pending game round when a game ball enters the starting hole and there is a pending game round. Therefore, as an example is shown in FIG. 92(b), for example, at a certain time, there are reserved game times for the second starting port (n=3) and reserved game times for the second starting port (n=4). If not, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to the reserved game round are not stored.

The pending changeable flag is used when executing the process of changing the display mode of the pending display. Specifically, the pending changeable flag is turned ON in a pending game cycle that satisfies the condition that the display mode of the pending display can be changed, and is turned OFF after the pending display that changes the display mode is determined. be. A flowchart of the pending effect parameter setting process executed using the pending effect storage area will be described below.

<Parameter setting processing for pending effect>
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a parameter setting process for holding effects. The pending effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the update process at the time of winning (FIG. 91: S3505).

In step S3601, display level upper limit setting processing is executed. This process is a process executed to set the display level upper limit value Lvm. Details of the display level upper limit value setting process will be described later. After executing display level upper limit value setting processing in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602.

In step S3602, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry. This pending effect parameter setting process is a process that is executed each time a game ball enters the starting hole, and in step S3602, each time a game ball enters the starting hole, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game round corresponding to the ball entry in the storage area for one reserved effect or the storage area for the second reserved effect. In this process, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game round corresponding to the ball entry, so the display mode is set to white corresponding to 1 of the actual display level Lvr. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the actual display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game round corresponding to the entered ball is set to 1. When the acquired reach random number counter C3 is scheduled to execute a reach effect according to the reach determination table, the actual display level Lvr is set to 2, or the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired by the entering ball is set. If the value of is a value corresponding to the jackpot lottery, the actual display level Lvr is set to a value of 2 or more, and the actual display level Lvr is based on the values of various counters obtained by entering the starting hole. may be determined. After executing step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603.

In step S3603, an additional level Lva is set. As described above, the additional level Lva has a fixed value corresponding to each reserved game round. Therefore, if the reserved game round corresponding to the current entry of the game ball is the reserved game round (n=1), 1 is set as the additional level Lva, which is the reserved game round (n=2). In this case, 2 is set as the additional level Lva, and in the case of pending game rounds (n=3), 3 is set as the additional level Lva, and in the case of pending game rounds (n=4), 4 is set as the additional level Lva.

After executing step S3603, this parameter setting process for holding effect is terminated.

<Display level upper limit setting processing>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing display level upper limit value setting processing. The display level upper limit value setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 93: S3601) of the parameter setting process for holding effects.

In step S3701, the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm is acquired. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the sound and light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. After executing step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702.

In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry wins the jackpot lottery. Specifically, based on the information about the determination result of the ahead determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound and light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the ahead determination process executed with the ball entering the starting opening this time as a trigger. to judge.

In step S3702, when it is determined that the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry has won the jackpot lottery (S3702: YES), the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the jackpot upper limit table is referred to. Specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the jackpot upper limit value table.

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram of an upper limit value table. FIG. 95(a) shows a jackpot upper limit value table.

The jackpot upper limit value table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit value setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm are recorded in association with each other. The sound and light side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm with reference to the big win upper limit table.

As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit table, 80 values from 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm=5 as the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm, and as the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm Ten values from 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=4, and five values from 5 to 9 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=3. As values of the value setting counter Cm, five values from 0 to 4 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=2, and 0 values of the upper limit value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=1. is set. In other words, the display level upper limit value Lvm is configured to have the highest probability of becoming 5 in the reserved game round in which the big winning lottery is won.

FIG. 95(b) shows the reach upper limit value table. The reach upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step S3705, which will be described later. Similarly to the jackpot upper limit table, the reach upper limit table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other. is. It is configured such that the display level upper limit value Lvm has the highest probability of being 4, followed by the probability of being 5 or 3 in the suspended game rounds in which ready-to-win occurs.

FIG. 95(c) shows the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table. The non-reach upper limit value table is an upper limit value table used in step S3706, which will be described later. In the reach non-generating upper limit table, each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other, similarly to the jackpot upper limit table. It is table data. The display level upper limit value Lvm has the highest probability of being 1, and the probability of being 2 is the second highest in the hold game rounds in which no reach occurs.

The description returns to FIG. In step S3703, after referring to the jackpot upper limit table, the process proceeds to step S3707.

On the other hand, in step S3702, when it is determined that the reserved game round corresponding to the current entry of the game ball has not won the jackpot lottery (S3702: NO), the process proceeds to step S3704.

In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the reserved game turn corresponding to the current entry of the game ball corresponds to the game turn to generate reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current reserved game round corresponds to the occurrence of reach. Specifically, based on the information about the determination result of the ahead determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound and light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the ahead determination process executed in response to the ball entering the starting opening this time judge.

In step S3704, when it is determined that the reserved game round corresponding to the current entry of the game ball corresponds to the game round in which reach is generated (S3704: YES), the process proceeds to step S3705.

In step S3705, the reach upper limit table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the obtained upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach upper limit value table. After that, the process advances to step S3707.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3704 that the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry does not correspond to the game round in which reach is generated (S3704: NO), the process proceeds to step S3706.

In step S3706, the reach non-occurrence upper limit table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the non-reach upper limit value table. After that, the process advances to step S3707.

In step S3707, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm extracted in any of step S3703, step S3705, or step S3706 is stored in the current pending game in the first pending effect storage area or the second pending effect storage area. It is set in the storage area of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the time. After that, the display level upper limit value setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described.

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing in the eighth embodiment. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 33: S1906).

In the effect setting process, the difference between this embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 37) is that in this embodiment, a pending effect setting process is added as step S3801. Steps S3802 to S3815 in the effect setting process of this embodiment are the same as steps S2301 to S2314 in the effect setting process (FIG. 37) of the first embodiment. Therefore, the description of the processing in steps S3802 to S3815 is omitted.

The pending effect setting process in step S3801 is executed to determine the pending game round to be subjected to execution of the pending effect (effect of changing the display mode of the suggestive effect and the pending display) and to set the content of the pending effect. is a subroutine that Details of the pending effect setting process will be described below.

<Holding effect setting process>
FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing pending effect setting processing in the eighth embodiment. The pending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 96: S3801).

In step S3901, a holding effect execution lottery process is executed. The holding effect execution lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to execute the holding effect. Specifically, a value is acquired from a random number counter for lottery, and whether or not there is a number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number counter among a plurality of numbers stored in preset table data for lottery. determine whether If there is a number corresponding to the obtained random number among the numbers stored in the table data, it is decided to execute the suspension effect, and if there is no number corresponding to the obtained random number, it is suspended. Decide not to perform the rendition. After executing step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902.

In step S3902, it is determined whether or not to execute the suspension effect based on the result of the suspension effect execution lottery process. In step S3902, when it determines with performing a holding|holding effect|action (S3902:YES), it progresses to step S3903. On the other hand, in step S3902, when it is determined not to execute the pending effect (S3902: NO), this pending effect setting process is terminated.

In step S3903, the display level upper limit value Lvm of each reserved game round is read. Specifically, the display level upper limit value of each pending game cycle stored in the first pending effect storage area (see FIG. 92(a)) and the second pending effect storage area (see FIG. 92(b)) Load Lvm. After executing step S3903, the process advances to step S3904.

In step S3904, the actual display level Lvr of each reserved game round is read. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr of each pending game cycle stored in the first pending effect storage area and the second pending effect storage area is read. After executing step S3904, the process advances to step S3905.

In step S3905, the addition level Lva is added to the actual display level Lvr of each reserved game round, and the added value in each reserved game round is stored. After that, the process advances to step S3906.

In step S3906, the suspended game times satisfying the display level upper limit value Lvm≧actual display level Lvr+additional level Lva are extracted. Specifically, the added value of the actual display level Lvr and the additional level Lva calculated in step S3905 is compared with the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm in each reserved game round, and the added value is the display level. Suspended game times below the upper limit value Lvm are extracted. That is, the actual display level Lvr has not reached a predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is increased by a level value (additional level Lva) determined for each reserved game round. To extract reserved game times that have room for change. In addition, not limited to the above extraction method, the actual display level Lvr does not reach a predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is set to a level value determined for each reserved game round. Any other extraction method may be used as long as it is possible to extract reserved game times that have room to be changed upward by (additional level Lva). After executing step S3906, the process advances to step S3907.

In step S3907, the pending changeable flag of the pending game cycle satisfying the display level upper limit value Lvm≧actual display level Lvr+additional level Lva is turned ON. That is, the pending changeable flag of the pending game cycle, which is capable of changing the display mode of the pending display, is turned ON. After executing step S3907, the process advances to step S3908.

In step S3908, a pending effect content determination process is executed. The pending effect content determination process is a process for determining the content of the pending effect. The details of the pending effect content determination process will be described later. After executing step S3908, the process advances to step S3909.

In step S3909, a pending effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information about the content of the pending effect determined in step S3908 is set as a command and transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . After that, this pending effect setting process is terminated.

<Determination processing of contents of pending effect>
FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing a pending effect content determination process. The pending effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending effect setting process (FIG. 97: S3908).

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not there is a pending game turn in which the pending variable flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pending changeable flag is ON in any one of the pending game rounds of the first pending effect storage area and the second pending effect storage area. do.

In step S4001, when it is determined that the pending change possible flag is not ON (S4001: NO), this pending effect content determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4001 that the pending changeable flag is ON (S4001: YES), the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the pending change possible flag is ON in any of the pending game rounds in the storage area for the first pending effect. In step S4002, when it is determined that the pending change possible flag is ON in any one of the pending game rounds in the first pending effect storage area (S4002: YES), the process proceeds to step S4003.

In step S4003, among the pending game rounds in which the pending changeable flag is ON in the first pending effect storage area, the pending game round to be executed first is determined as an object to change the display mode of the pending display. That is, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the pending game round to be executed as early as possible is changed. After executing step S4003, the process proceeds to step S4005.

On the other hand, in step S4002, when it is determined that the pending changeable flag is not ON in any of the pending game rounds in the first pending effect storage area (S4002: NO), the process proceeds to step S4004.

In step S4004, the hold game round to be executed first among the hold game rounds in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the second hold effect storage area is determined as an object to change the display mode of the hold display. After that, the process proceeds to step S4005.

In step S4005, the value of the pending effect counter Ce is acquired. The holding effect counter Ce is used when the sound/light side MPU 92 determines the content of the holding effect. The holding performance counter Ce is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Thereafter, after executing step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4006.

In step S4006, reference is made to the pending effect determination table corresponding to the pending game round which is the target of changing the display mode of the pending display.

FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pending effect determination table. The reserved effect determination table is set separately for each reserved game round.

FIG. 99(a) shows that the game round determined to change the pending display is the pending game round (n=1) for the first starting port (see FIG. 92(a)) or the second starting port. In the case of a pending game round (n=1) (see FIG. 92(b)), that is, pending effect determination used when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm11 or the pending display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88(a) It is a table for In the case of n=1, 80 values from 22 to 99 are set as the value of the holding effect counter Ce for selecting the suggestive effect pattern 1 (see FIG. 89(a)). Twenty values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the holding effect counter Ce for selecting the suggestive effect pattern 2 (see FIG. 89(b)). That is, when changing the display mode of the suspension display Dm11 or the suspension display Dm21 shown in FIG.

FIG. 99(b) shows that the game rounds determined as the target for changing the holding display are the first starting opening holding game rounds (n=2) or the second starting opening holding game rounds (n=2). , that is, when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm12 or the pending display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88(a). In the case of n=2, pattern 2 (see FIG. 89(b)) of suggestion effect is selected and 70 values from 30 to 99 are set as the value of the counter Ce for suspension effect. Pattern 3 (see FIG. 90(a)) of suggestion effect is selected, and 20 values from 10 to 29 are set as the value of the counter Ce for holding effect. In addition, pattern 4 (see FIG. 90(b)) of suggestion effect is selected, and 10 values from 0 to 9 are set as the value of the counter Ce for holding effect. That is, when the display mode of the pending display Dm12 or the pending display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88(a) is changed, the suggestive effect pattern 2 is most likely to be executed, followed by the suggestive effect pattern 3. High probability.

FIG. 99(c) shows that the game round determined to change the pending display is the pending game round (n=3) for the first starting port (see FIG. 92(a)) or the second starting port. Suspended game round (n=3) (see FIG. 92(b)), that is, suspension effect determination used when changing the display mode of the suspension display Dm13 or suspension display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88(a) It is a table for In the case of n=3, 80 values from 20 to 99 are set as the values of the pending effect counter Ce for selecting the suggestive effect pattern 3 (see FIG. 90(a)). Twenty values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the holding effect counter Ce for selecting the suggested effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90(b)). That is, when changing the display mode of the suspension display Dm13 or the suspension display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88(a), the probability that the suggestive effect pattern 3 is executed is high.

FIG. 99(d) shows that the game rounds determined as the object for changing the holding display are the first starting opening holding game rounds (n=4) or the second starting opening holding game rounds (n=4). , that is, when changing the display mode of the suspension display Dm14 or the suspension display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88(a). In the case of n=4, 0 to 99 (100 pieces), which are the values of all of the pending effect counters Ce, are set to the suggestive effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90(b)). That is, when changing the display mode of the suspension display Dm14 or the suspension display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88(a), the suggestive effect pattern 4 is executed in all cases.

By setting the pending effect determination table as described above, for example, when the gun W2 is displayed, that is, when the suggestive effect pattern 2 is displayed, the pending display Dm11 (Dm21) or Dm12 (Dm22) is displayed. The display mode of changes. When the display mode of the pending display Dm11 changes, the actual display level Lvr rises only one level according to the value of the additional level Lva, but when the display mode of the pending display Dm12 changes , the value of the additional level Lva, the actual display level Lvr rises two levels higher.

Further, for example, when missile W4 is displayed, that is, when pattern 4 of suggestive effect is displayed, the display mode of suspension display Dm12 (Dm22), Dm13 (Dm23), or suspension display Dm14 (Dm24) is changed. Change. When the display mode of the pending display Dm12 changes, the actual display level Lvr rises two levels higher according to the value of the additional level Lva, and when the display mode of the pending display Dm13 changes, the additional level According to the value of Lva, the actual display level Lvr is increased by three levels, and when the display mode of the pending display Dm14 changes, the actual display level Lvr is increased by four levels according to the value of the additional level Lva. rise to the level of

Therefore, by executing the suggestive effect, the player is made to roughly guess which display mode of the pending display will change. Moreover, since the number of levels in which the actual display level Lvr rises differs depending on the pending display whose display mode is to be changed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After executing step S4006, the process proceeds to step S4007.

In step S4007, the content of the determined pending effect is set to the pending effect command. For example, when it is decided to change the display mode of the pending display Dm13, the suggestive effect to be executed is the suggestive effect (pattern 3), and the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is changed from white to blue. Identifiable information is set as a command. After that, the process proceeds to step S4008.

In step S4008, all of the pending changeable flags turned ON in the first pending effect storage area and the second pending effect storage area are turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S4009.

In step S4009, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the pending game round whose display mode is to be changed is updated to Lvr←Lvr+Lva. That is, since the actual display level Lvr is changed (increased) by changing the display mode of the pending display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for the pending effect is changed to the actual display level Lvr after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of the display level Lvr. After that, this pending effect content determination process is ended.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the pending display, among the displayed pending displays, the jackpot lottery target order is the later jackpot random number counter C1. When changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the value of the suspension display, so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the suspension display increases. to change the display mode of The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the following effects by executing such processing.

Normally, when the pending display is displayed, the chance of changing the display mode decreases as the remaining time until the value of the big winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display becomes the object of the big winning lottery becomes shorter. In other words, the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in which the order of the big win lottery targets is first among the displayed pending displays is the order of the big win lottery targets among the displayed pending displays. The remaining time to be displayed is relatively shorter than the holding display corresponding to the later big hit random number counter C1, and the possibility of changing the display mode is low. Therefore, when the display mode of the pending display changes, the player preferentially displays the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the big win lottery target among the displayed pending displays. hope to change. However, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the value of the big winning random number counter C1, which is the later target of the big winning lottery among the displayed pending displays, may change. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is lowered.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in which the jackpot lottery target is later among the displayed pending displays. The display mode of the pending display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the pending display increases as the display mode of the pending display is changed. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the holding display that is relatively later in the order of the target of the big winning lottery among the displayed holding displays changes, the holding display is changed. Since the gradual width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation, and rather to further increase the expectation. It can give you a feeling.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment determines the display mode of the pending display based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the other pending display different from the pending display whose display mode is to be determined. Determines the display mode of the display. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the pending game round corresponding to the other pending display by using the target pending display whose display mode has been determined.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the pending display, changes the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display different from the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. Based on the value, the post-change display mode of the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is determined. Therefore, by using the pending display whose display mode is to be changed, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the pending game rounds corresponding to the other pending displays.

In addition, when determining the display mode of the pending display, based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the other pending display different from the pending display whose display mode is to be determined, the process of determining the display mode of the pending display As another example, it is also possible to perform the following processing.

For example, when determining the display mode of the pending display, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be determined is the jackpot random number counter that is the target of the jackpot lottery prior to the jackpot random number counter C1. If it is more advantageous to the player than the value of C1, the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of determining the display mode, is determined to be a specific display mode. Additionally, information about other pending indications may be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one pending display, the player can not only guess the outcome of one pending game round corresponding to the pending display, but also perform other actions before and after that. Various speculations are also made about the return trend of the pending game times. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game by using the display mode of the hold display, to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, when changing the display mode of the pending display, based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the other pending display different from the pending display of the object whose display mode is to be changed, the pending display of the target whose display mode is to be changed As another example of the processing for determining the display mode after the display is changed, the following processing can be executed.

For example, based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display of the pending game times to be executed prior to the pending display corresponding to the pending display of the object whose display mode is to be changed, the pending display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. It is possible to determine the display mode after the change of. As a result, the following playability can be realized. For example, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 to be determined by the determination means is performed prior to the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. The display mode can be changed to a higher level display mode (a display mode that is advantageous to the player). In this way, it is possible to create various new game features and improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display will change prior to changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display changes. , it is possible to draw the player's attention and give a sense of anticipation. In other words, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestive effect and the change in the display mode of the pending display, and to use the execution of the suggestive effect to respond to the change in the display mode of the pending display. It is possible to make the player pay attention to it. In other words, in addition to the effect of executing suggestive effects such as imparting a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as imparting a sense of anticipation and sense of urgency for subsequent game rounds, the suggestive effects By changing the display mode of the pending display afterward, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency in response to the change in the display mode of the pending display, thereby synergistically improving the amusement of the game. be able to.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment selects a suggestive effect to be executed from a plurality of prepared suggestive effects according to an object whose display mode is to be changed from among displayed reserved displays. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the suggestive effect, and to give the player a sense of anticipation as to which of the pending displays the display mode is to change.

In the present embodiment, when the suggestive effect is executed, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed (before the change of the display mode A process of selecting a suggestive effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggested effects prepared according to the magnitude of the difference in the actual display level Lvr between and after the change) may be adopted. By doing so, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the pending display, before the display mode of the pending display changes, the effect executed as the suggestive effect is displayed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player with respect to the type as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the pending display Dm11 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode one level higher, and when the display mode of the pending display Dm12 is changed, the display mode is changed to the level two levels higher. When the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the third higher stage, and when the display mode of the pending display Dm14 is changed, the display mode of the fourth higher stage is changed. However, the gradual width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed (the actual display between before and after the change of the display mode Another aspect may be adopted as the magnitude of the level Lvr difference).

For example, when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm11, it is changed to a display mode one step higher, and when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm12, it is changed to a display mode four steps higher, When the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the 6th higher stage, and when the display mode of the pending display Dm14 is changed, the display mode is changed to the 10th higher stage. In the case of changing the display mode, the more the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is the target of the jackpot lottery, is changed in the displayed pending display, the more relative Specifically, a stepwise width (before and after the change in display mode) in a plurality of stages (actual display level Lvr1 to actual display level Lvr5) of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the pending display Any other mode may be employed as long as the display mode of the pending display is changed so that the difference in the actual display level Lvr between the The value of the additional level in the first pending effect storage area shown in FIG. 92(a) and the second pending effect storage area shown in FIG. This can be achieved by setting the order in which the jackpot lottery target becomes a relatively larger value in the pending game rounds as compared to the previous pending game rounds. In this case, the upper limits of the possible actual display level Lvr and display level upper limit value Lvm may be set to values such as 15 and 20, which are larger than the maximum possible additional display level Lva. In addition, it is sufficient to set a display mode pattern of the pending display corresponding to each possible value of the actual display level Lvr.

Further, there are a plurality of additional level patterns in which the later reserved game rounds for which the order of the big win lottery is targeted has a relatively larger value as compared with the earlier reserved game rounds for which the big win lottery is targeted. may be That is, as in the present embodiment, the values of the additional level Lva corresponding to the pending display Dm11, the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, and the pending display Dm14 are (1, 2, 3, 4), or (2, 4). , 6, 10) and (1, 5, 8, 10), and the like.

Alternatively, the display mode of the pending display may be changed by applying the processing described in the above embodiment only when a specific condition is satisfied. Also, a lottery determines whether the display mode of the pending display is changed by applying the processing described in the above embodiment or the display mode of the pending display is changed without applying the processing described in the above embodiment. You may

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, but the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS, etc. , may be determined based on various parameters linked to each reserved game round. Further, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be determined based on a plurality of parameters among these various parameters. For example, based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are set to values higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a failure, and the jackpot type counter Based on the value of C2, the probability variable jackpot may be set higher than the normal jackpot. Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, when reach occurs, the display level upper limit value Lvm and actual display level Lvr may be set higher than when reach does not occur.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. First, the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the ninth embodiment, and then the details of the processing will be described. Note that the hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

I1. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
A feature of the present embodiment is that, like the eighth embodiment, suspension effects (effects and suggestion effects for changing the display mode of the suspension display) are executed. The difference from the eighth embodiment is how to change the display mode of the hold display.

In the eighth embodiment, when the display mode of the pending display is changed, the pending display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the target of the big win lottery is later among the displayed pending displays. In the case of changing the display mode of the display mode, the gradual width in multiple stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the suspended display (actual width between before and after the change in the display mode) The display mode of the pending display is changed so that the difference in the display level Lvr) increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the pending display is changed, the pending display of the pending game round to be executed prior to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is higher than the pending display mode. change the display. More precisely, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the pending corresponding to the big winning random number counter C1 to be the target of the big winning lottery before the big winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. The display mode of the display is changed to a display mode of a higher level.

To show a specific example using FIG. 88(a), for example, when the display mode of the pending display Dm11 is green and the display mode of the pending display Dm12 is white, when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm12 , the display mode is changed to a display mode higher than green, which is the display mode of the suspension display Dm11 which is the suspension display of the suspension game cycle executed before the suspension display Dm12. That is, when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm12, it is changed to a display mode of red or yellow, which is a display mode higher than green.

As another example, when the display mode of the suspension display Dm11 is blue, the display mode of the suspension display Dm12 is green, and the display mode of the suspension display Dm13 is white, when changing the display mode of the suspension display Dm13, The display mode of the pending display Dm11, which is the pending display of the pending game cycle to be executed before the pending display Dm13, is changed to a higher display mode than the display mode of the pending display Dm11, and the display mode of the pending display Dm12, which is green. That is, when the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is to be changed, it is changed to a display mode of red or yellow, which is a display mode higher than blue and green.

In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second pending display area Ds2, when changing the display mode of the pending displays Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first pending display area Ds1 Similarly, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display of the pending game cycle to be executed prior to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is changed to a higher pending display.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display will change, prior to changing the display mode of the pending display, as in the eighth embodiment. . In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from among a plurality of prepared suggestive effects in accordance with an object whose display mode is to be changed from among displayed reserved displays.

FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

FIG. 100 shows a suggestive effect (pattern 1), a suggestive effect (pattern 2), and a suggestive effect executed prior to changing the respective display modes of the pending display Dm11, the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, and the pending display Dm14. (Pattern 3), suggestive effects (Pattern 4).

This suggestive production is a production that imitates the long jump. For example, when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm11, the suggestion effect (pattern 1) is executed. The suggestion effect (pattern 1) is a effect in which the character Ch jumps after running up and lands on the hold display Dm11. After the suggestive effect (pattern 1) is executed, the display mode of the pending display Dm11 changes. As another example, when changing the display mode of the pending display Dm14, the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is executed. The suggestive effect (pattern 4) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after running up and lands on the hold display Dm14. After the suggestive effect (pattern 4) is executed, the display mode of the pending display Dm14 changes.

When changing the display mode of the pending displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second pending display area Ds2, the same effect as the above-described suggestive effect is executed, and then the pending display Dm21, the pending display Dm22, The display mode of the pending display Dm23 or the pending display Dm24 changes.

The suggestive effect is a effect in which a hold display that changes the display mode is determined according to the flying distance of the jump after the character Ch has run up. Therefore, for example, by lengthening the flight time after the jump of the character Ch, it is possible to make the player guess which holding display the character Ch will land on, and to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of tension.

An example of processing for realizing this embodiment will be described in detail below.

I2. Processing details:
In this description, differences from the processing in the eighth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the holding effect storage area in the ninth embodiment. The pending effect storage area in the ninth embodiment includes a first pending effect storage area and a second pending effect storage area, as in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 101(a) shows the storage area for the first pending effect, and FIG. 101(b) shows the storage area for the second pending effect.

The difference between this embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the first pending effect storage area and the second pending effect storage area in this embodiment do not have a storage area for storing the additional level Lva. In the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed to each reserved game round, but is set to the reserved game round of the reserved display that changes the display mode in the course of a series of processes for changing the display mode of the reserved display. (See step S4305 in FIG. 104). Other points of the holding effect storage area of the ninth embodiment are the same as those of the eighth embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

<Parameter setting processing for pending effect>
FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing a parameter setting process for holding effect in the ninth embodiment. The pending effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the update process at the time of winning (FIG. 91: S3505).

The difference between the pending effect parameter setting process in this embodiment and the pending effect parameter setting process in the eighth embodiment is that the pending effect parameter setting process in this embodiment includes the additions executed in the eighth embodiment. This is because there is no processing (FIG. 93: S3603) for setting the level Lva in the pending information storage area 64b. As described above, in the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed for each pending game round in the pending information storage area 64b, but is determined in the course of a series of processes for changing the display mode of the pending display. be done. Therefore, in the pending effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment, the process of setting the additional level Lva is not executed.

The rest of the processing is the same as the pending effect parameter setting processing in the eighth embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted. Note that the processing contents of the display level upper limit value setting processing, which is a subroutine executed in step S4101, are also the same, so the description will be omitted.

<Holding effect setting process>
FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing pending effect setting processing in the ninth embodiment. The pending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 96: S3801).

Steps S4201 to S4204 of the pending effect setting process in this embodiment and steps S3901 to S3904 of the pending effect setting process (FIG. 97) in the eighth embodiment are the same processes. Therefore, processing after step S4205 will be described.

The processing of steps S4205 to S4209 is processing executed to extract pending display whose display mode can be changed. That is, it is a process of extracting a pending display that can be changed to a higher pending display than the display mode of the pending display of the pending game cycle that is executed prior to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed.

In step S4205, the actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit value Lvm of each suspended game cycle recorded in the first suspended effect storage area and the second suspended effect storage area are read, and any suspension to be executed first is read. Suspended game times recorded with a display level upper limit value Lvm greater than the value of the actual display level Lvr of the game times are extracted.

Taking the first pending effect recording area shown in FIG. Since it is larger than the value of the actual display level Lvr of any pending game run before n=3), the condition in step S4205 is satisfied. Therefore, the pending game round (n=3) is the game round extracted in step S4205.

On the other hand, the display level upper limit Lvm (=1) of the pending game rounds (n=2) (holding display Dm12) is the number of pending game rounds (n=1) executed prior to the pending game rounds (n=2). Since it is smaller than the actual display level Lvr (=2), the condition in step S4205 is not satisfied. Therefore, the pending game round (n=2) is a game round not extracted in step S4205.

Among the reserved game rounds, there is no game round to be executed prior to the reserved game rounds corresponding to the reserved display Dm11 and the reserved display Dm21. That is, there is no game round to be executed prior to the pending game round (n=1) in the first pending effect storage area. Further, there is no game round to be executed prior to the pending game round (n=1) in the second pending effect storage area. Therefore, it cannot be determined whether or not the condition of step S4205 is satisfied for the pending game times corresponding to the pending display Dm11 and the pending display Dm21. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if there is a pending game round corresponding to the pending display Dm11 and the pending display Dm21, it is automatically considered that the condition in step S4205 is satisfied, Extracted in this process. After executing step S4205, the process advances to step S4206.

In step S4206, the reserved game times satisfying the display level upper limit value Lvm>actual display level Lvr are extracted from the reserved game times extracted in step S4205. In other words, it extracts the reserved game times with room to change the display mode.

Taking the first pending effect recording area shown in FIG. = 4). Therefore, in this case, the pending game round (n=3) satisfies the condition in step S4206 and is extracted by the process.

After executing step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, the pending change possible flag of the pending game round extracted in the process of step S4206 is turned ON. After executing step S4207, the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4208, a pending effect content determination process is executed. The pending effect content determination process is a process for determining the content of the pending effect. The details of the pending effect content determination process will be described later. After executing step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

In step S4209, a pending effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information about the content of the pending effect determined in step S4208 is set as a command and transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. After that, this pending effect setting process is terminated.

<Determination processing of contents of pending effect>
FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing pending effect content determination processing in the ninth embodiment. The pending effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending effect parameter setting process (FIG. 103: S4208).

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not there is a pending game turn in which the pending variable flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pending changeable flag is ON in any one of the pending game rounds of the first pending effect storage area and the second pending effect storage area. do.

In step S4301, when it is determined that the pending change possible flag is not ON (S4301: NO), this pending effect content determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4301 that the pending changeable flag is ON (S4301: YES), the process proceeds to step S4302.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the pending change possible flag is ON in any of the pending game rounds in the first pending effect storage area. In step S4302, when it is determined that the pending change possible flag is ON in any one of the pending game rounds in the first pending effect storage area (S4302: YES), the process proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4303, among the pending game rounds in which the pending changeable flag is ON in the first pending effect storage area, the pending game round to be executed last is determined as an object to change the display mode of the pending display. In the above eighth embodiment, in step S4003 (FIG. 98), the holding game round to be executed first among the holding game rounds in which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area is displayed on hold. However, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending display is changed for the pending game round to be executed most recently. In the present embodiment, as described in step S4205 of the pending effect setting process (FIG. 103), in the pending game rounds corresponding to the pending display Dm11 and the pending display Dm21, if there is such a pending game round, It is automatically assumed that the condition in step S4205 is satisfied, and extracted in the process. Therefore, in the pending game times corresponding to the pending display Dm11 and the pending display Dm21, there is a high possibility that the pending changeable flag is turned ON. When the hold game round to be executed first among the hold game rounds in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the hold performance storage area is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display Dm11 is highly probable. and the pending display Dm21 are subject to change in display mode, and it becomes difficult to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency even if the display mode of the pending display is changed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the pending game rounds for which the pending changeable flag is ON in the first pending effect storage area, the pending game round to be executed last is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the pending display. do. After executing step S4303, the process advances to step S4305.

On the other hand, in step S4302, when it is determined that the pending change possible flag is not ON in any of the pending game rounds in the first pending effect storage area (S4302: NO), the process proceeds to step S4304.

In step S4304, among the pending game rounds in which the pending changeable flag is ON in the second pending effect storage area, the holding game round to be executed most recently is determined as an object to change the display mode of the pending display. After executing step S4304, the process advances to step S4305.

In step S4305, the additional display level Lva is determined. That is, when changing the display mode of the pending display, it is determined how high the display mode should be changed. More specifically, the gradual width in multiple stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the pending display is determined.

Specifically, a difference value between the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr in the reserved game round corresponding to the reserved display whose display mode is to be changed is calculated, and one value is determined from the difference values. do. For example, when the pending game round corresponding to the pending display Dm13 shown in the first pending effect recording area of FIG. 4) and the actual display level Lvr (=1), the difference value (=3) is calculated. Then, one value is determined from among the values from 1 to 3, which is the difference value, and the determined value is determined as the additional display level Lva. As a method of determining one value, a random number may be used for determination, or the maximum possible value (3 in this specific example) may always be employed. Thus, the additional display level Lva is determined. After executing step S4305, the process advances to step S4306.

In step S4306, the content of the pending effect is determined. Specifically, the contents of the suggestive effect corresponding to the pending display of the object whose display mode is to be changed and the display mode of the pending display after the change are determined. For example, when the object whose display mode is to be changed is the pending display Dm11, the suggestive effect (pattern 1) shown in FIG. 100 is determined as the suggestive effect. Similarly, when the object whose display mode is to be changed is the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, or the pending display Dm14, respectively, suggestive effect (pattern 2), suggestive effect (pattern 3), or suggestive effect ( Decide on pattern 4).

Further, when determining the display mode of the pending display after the change, the added value of the actual display level Lvr of the pending display whose display mode is to be changed and the additional display level Lva is calculated, and the added value corresponding to the added value is calculated. The display mode is determined based on the correspondence relationship between the actual display level Lvr shown in FIG. 88(b) and the display mode of the hold display. For example, when the pending game round corresponding to the pending display Dm13 shown in the first pending effect recording area in FIG. In this case, since the sum of the actual display level Lvr (=1) and the additional display level Lva (=2) is 3, the display mode of the actual display level Lvr and the suspended display shown in FIG. , the display mode of the pending display after the change is determined to be green. After executing step S4306, the process advances to step S4307.

In step S4307, the content of the determined pending effect is set to the pending effect command. After that, the process advances to step S4308.

In step S4308, all of the pending changeable flags turned ON in the first pending effect storage area and the second pending effect storage area are turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S4309.

In step S4309, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the pending game round whose display mode is to be changed is updated to Lvr←Lvr+Lva. That is, since the actual display level is changed by changing the display mode of the suspended display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for the suspended effect is changed to the actual display level Lvr after the display mode is changed. to the value of After that, this pending effect content determination process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the target of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is the object of the jackpot lottery. The display mode is changed to a display mode of a higher stage than the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the following effects by executing such processing.

For example, if there is already a suspended display whose display mode has changed, and the player wishes to change the suspended display to a higher display mode, the player may change the display mode of a specific suspended display. You may want change. However, contrary to the player's wishes, the reserved display corresponding to the value of the big-hit random number counter C1 that is subject to the big-hit lottery after the value of the big-hit random number counter C1 that corresponds to the reserved display that the player desires to change the display mode. display mode may change. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the predetermined pending display, the jackpot random number counter C1 to be the target of the jackpot lottery is selected prior to the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the predetermined pending display. The display mode is changed to a higher-level display mode than the display mode of the corresponding hold display. Therefore, even if, contrary to the wishes of the player, the display of the pending display corresponding to the big winning random number counter C1 to be the target of the big winning lottery after the big winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display for which the player wishes to change the display mode. Even when the mode is changed, the suspended display whose display mode is changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the suspended display for which the player wishes to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation. While being able to suppress the fall of , rather, it is possible to give a further sense of expectation.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, when determining the display mode of the pending display, corresponds to a pending display different from the pending display whose display mode is to be determined. The display mode of the pending display is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the pending game round corresponding to the other pending display by using the target pending display whose display mode has been determined.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the pending display, changes the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display different from the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. Based on the value, the post-change display mode of the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is determined. Therefore, by using the pending display whose display mode is to be changed, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the pending game rounds corresponding to the other pending displays.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display will change, prior to changing the display mode of the pending display, as in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the pending display and to give the player a sense of anticipation. In other words, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestive effect and the change in the display mode of the pending display, and to use the execution of the suggestive effect to respond to the change in the display mode of the pending display. It is possible to make the player pay attention to it. In other words, in addition to the effect of executing suggestive effects such as imparting a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as imparting a sense of anticipation and sense of urgency for subsequent game rounds, the suggestive effects By changing the display mode of the pending display afterward, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency in response to the change in the display mode of the pending display, thereby synergistically improving the amusement of the game. be able to.

In the present embodiment, when the suggestive effect is executed, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed (before the change of the display mode A process of selecting a suggestive effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggested effects prepared according to the magnitude of the difference in the actual display level Lvr between and after the change) may be employed. By doing so, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the pending display, before the display mode of the pending display changes, the effect executed as the suggestive effect is displayed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player with respect to the type as well.

J. Tenth embodiment:
It is also possible to employ suggestive effects different from those of the eighth and ninth embodiments. Other suggestive effects that can be employed will be described below.

<Another example of suggestive production 1>
FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 1 of the suggestive effect. As shown in FIG. 105(a), in the suggestive effect of this example, the player selects the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. Specifically, at the same time as the game round is started, a display prompting the player to select the pending display whose display mode is to be changed within the time limit by operating the effect operation button 24 is displayed on the display surface 41a. do. The time limit is set to a time that allows the player to select the pending display within the variable time of the game being executed, for example, set to a time that is one second shorter than the variable time of the game to be executed. do.

Each time the player operates the effect operation button 24, the arrow YJ displayed above the pending display moves to the left by one, and after the arrow YJ moves to the end of the existing pending display, the effect operation button 24 is operated. If so, the arrow YJ is again moved onto the pending display Dm11.

As shown in FIG. 105(b), at the timing when the time limit expires, the pending display positioned below the arrow YJ is temporarily displayed to another object ("smoke" object X1 in FIG. 105(b)). By doing so, the player cannot visually recognize the hold display.

After that, if the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105(c), the pending display is displayed in the changed display mode.

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the pending display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

Hereinafter, a specific description will be given of the processing for realizing the suggestive effect in Example 1. FIG.

FIG. 106 shows a holding effect storage area in another example 1. FIG. FIG. 106(a) shows the storage area for the first pending effect in the example 1, and FIG. 106(b) shows the storage area for the second pending effect in the example 1. The storage area for pending effect in Example 1 includes a storage area for storing a display level upper limit value Lvm and an actual display level Lvr corresponding to each pending game round. The method of determining the display level upper limit value Lvm and the value of the actual display level Lvr for each pending game round is the same as in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, and is determined in the pending effect parameter setting process.

In the suggestion performance, when the time limit has elapsed and the reserved game round selected by the player is determined, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr in the selected reserved game round, and the display level upper limit value is determined. When Lvm>actual display level Lvr, the display mode of the pending display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. For example, in FIG. 106, if the pending game round selected by the player is the pending display Dm13, the pending display Dm13 satisfies the display level upper limit value Lvm>actual display level Lvr. The display mode is changed to correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). That is, from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (=1) of the pending display Dm13 before changing the display mode, to the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). change the mode. After changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the pending display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4. FIG.

If the pending game round selected by the player does not satisfy the display level upper limit value Lvm>actual display level Lvr (for example, pending display Dm11 in FIG. 106(a)), the display mode of the selected pending display is Do not change.

It should be noted that the suggestive effect in Example 1 can be applied to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment described above.

First, a case will be described in which the suggestive effect in Example 1 is applied to the above-described eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment described above, in step S4003 or step S4004 (FIG. 98) when determining the pending display that changes the display mode, the first pending effect The reserved display corresponding to the reserved game round to be executed first in the second reserved effect storage area or the second reserved effect storage area is determined as an object to change the display mode, but instead of the processing, the player performs the effect operation. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by operating the button 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold change possible flag of the hold display selected by the player by operating the performance operation button 24 is not ON. In some cases, a process of not changing the pending display may be applied.

Then, the suggestive effect of another example 1 is applied, and at the timing when the time limit ends, the pending display located below the arrow is temporarily changed to another object (“smoke” object X1 in FIG. 105(b)). The display prevents the player from visually recognizing the holding display.

After that, if the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105(c), the pending display is displayed in the changed display mode.

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the pending display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

By doing so, a new game feature is created in which the player selects the pending display whose display mode is desired to be changed, and whether or not the display mode of the pending display selected by the player can be changed. Such a sense of urgency can be imparted to the player. Further, when the display mode of the pending display selected by the player is changeable, the later the pending display selected by the player among the existing pending displays becomes the object of the jackpot lottery. , the number of steps in which the display mode is ranked up between before and after the change of the display mode in the pending display, which is the target of the change of the display mode, is increased, and the same effect as the eighth embodiment is achieved, and the game is played. It can give people hope.

Next, a case will be described in which the suggestive effect in Example 1 is applied to the ninth embodiment. In the above-described ninth embodiment, in step S4303 or step S4304 (FIG. 104) when determining the pending display to change the display mode, the first pending effect out of the pending game rounds in which the pending changeable flag is ON The reserved display corresponding to the reserved game round to be executed most recently in the second reserved effect storage area or the second reserved effect storage area has been determined as the target for changing the display mode, but instead of this processing, the player presses the effect operation button. When the pending changeable flag of the pending display selected by the operation of 24 is ON, the pending display is changed, and when the pending changeable flag of the pending display selected by the player by operating the production operation button 24 is not ON. may apply a process of not changing the pending display.

Then, the suggestive effect of another example 1 is applied, and at the timing when the time limit ends, the pending display located below the arrow is temporarily changed to another object (“smoke” object X1 in FIG. 105(b)). The display prevents the player from visually recognizing the holding display.

After that, if the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105(c), the pending display is displayed in the changed display mode.

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the pending display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

By doing so, a new game feature is created in which the player selects the pending display whose display mode is desired to be changed, and whether or not the display mode of the pending display selected by the player can be changed. Such a sense of urgency can be imparted to the player. Furthermore, when the display mode of the pending display selected by the player is changeable, the display mode of the pending display of the pending game cycle to be executed prior to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed is higher than the display mode of the pending display. Since the display is changed to the hold display, the same effects as those of the ninth embodiment can be obtained, and the player can be given a feeling of anticipation.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 1 can create a new playability such as allowing the player to select the pending display in the suggestive effect. Further, as described above, the suggestive effect in which the player selects the hold display in Example 1 can be applied to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment. Specifically, depending on whether or not the changeable pending flag corresponding to the pending display selected by the player is ON, it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the pending display. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game feature such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player himself/herself changes.

In this case, when the pending changeable flag corresponding to the pending display selected by the player is not ON, the display mode of the pending display is not changed despite the execution of the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to overturn the player's perception that the display mode of the pending display changes after the suggestive effect is executed, and to add surprise to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the display mode of the pending display will change after that, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as described in the eighth embodiment, in another example 1, when executing the suggestive effect, a plurality of set display modes are displayed between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Select a suggestive effect to be executed from a plurality of prepared suggestive effects according to the size of the gradual width (the difference in the actual display level Lvr between before and after the display mode is changed). You may adopt the processing to do. By doing so, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the pending display, before the display mode of the pending display changes, the effect executed as the suggestive effect is displayed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player with respect to the type as well.

<Another example of suggestive production 2>
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggestive effect. FIG. 107(a) shows a suggestive effect in this example. FIG. 107(b) shows a pending display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestive effect in this example is finished.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the suggestive effect of this example is a suggestive effect in which the missile W5 is launched toward the hold display, which is the target of the change in display mode. However, in the suggestive effect in this example, the missile W5 explodes without hitting any of the hold displays even though it is launched toward the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 107(b), the display mode of the pending display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestive effect is completed does not change even though the suggestive effect in this example is executed. . Specific processing will be described below.

This example 2 also uses the storage area for the first pending effect and the storage area for the second pending effect shown in FIG. Then, a holding display whose display mode is to be changed is determined by lottery. It is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr in the determined reserved game round, and if the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr, the process shown in FIG. 90 of the eighth embodiment ( As in the suggestive effect (pattern 4) shown in b), the suggestive effect of changing the display mode of the pending display is executed, and then the display mode of the pending display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. change to

For example, in FIG. 106, if the suspended display whose display mode is to be changed is the suspended display Dm13, the suspended display Dm13 satisfies the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr. A suggestive effect similar to the suggestive effect (pattern 4) shown in 90(b) is executed, and then the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). That is, from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (=1) of the pending display Dm13 before changing the display mode, to the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). change the mode. After changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the pending display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4. FIG.

On the other hand, when the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied in the reserved game round corresponding to the reserved display whose display mode is to be changed, the display level shown in FIG. Execute the suggestive action.

By executing the suggestive effect in this example 2 in combination with the suggestive effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the pending display changes after the suggestive effect is executed. Recognition can be overturned, and unexpectedness can be imparted to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the display mode of the pending display will change after that, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Another example 3 of suggestion production>
FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggestive effect. FIG. 108(a) shows a suggestive effect in this example. FIG. 108(b) shows a pending display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestive effect in this example is finished.

As shown in FIG. 108(a), the suggestive effect of this example is a suggestive effect in which the missile W5 is launched toward the hold display, which is the target of the change in display mode. However, in the suggestive effect in this example, although the missile W5 is launched toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode, and hits the hold display, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the pending display displayed on the display surface 41a does not change after the suggestive effect is finished.

The suggestive effect can be realized by executing the same processing as in Example 2 above. Specifically, the storage area for the first pending effect and the storage area for the second pending effect shown in FIG. 106 are used. Then, a holding display whose display mode is to be changed is determined by lottery. It is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr is satisfied in the determined pending game round. Like the suggestive effect shown (pattern 4), a suggestive effect of changing the display mode of the pending display is executed, and then the display mode of the pending display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. .

For example, in FIG. 106, if the suspended display whose display mode is to be changed is the suspended display Dm13, the suspended display Dm13 satisfies the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr. A suggestive effect similar to the suggestive effect (pattern 4) shown in 90(b) is executed, and then the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). That is, from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (=1) of the pending display Dm13 before changing the display mode, to the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). change the mode. After changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the pending display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4. FIG.

On the other hand, if the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied in the reserved game round corresponding to the reserved display whose display mode is to be changed, the suggestive effect in FIG. to run.

By executing the suggestive effect in this example 3 in combination with the suggestive effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the pending display changes after the suggestive effect is executed. Recognition can be overturned, and unexpectedness can be imparted to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the display mode of the pending display will change after that, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Another example 4 of suggestion production>
After the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of two or more adjacent pending displays may be changed. For example, in the storage area for the first pending effect and the storage area for the second pending effect shown in FIG. The display modes of the two or more adjacent hold displays are changed substantially simultaneously.

Also, prior to changing the display mode of two or more adjacent pending displays, for example, the following suggestive effect can be executed.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 4 of the suggestive effect. FIG. 109(a) shows a suggestive effect in this example. FIG. 109(b) shows a pending display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestive effect in this example is finished.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), the suggestive effect of this example is a suggestive effect in which the missile W5 is launched toward the hold display, which is the target of the change in display mode. In the suggestive effect of this another example, the missile W5 is launched toward the holding display whose display mode is to be changed, and hits two adjacent holding displays. After that, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the display modes of the two adjacent hold displays change.

By executing such a suggestive effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation as to how many display modes of the pending display will change after the suggestive effect is executed.

K. Eleventh embodiment:
K1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the game machine in this embodiment will be described. Components having the same functions as those of the above embodiments are described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a jackpot lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

111 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 , a variable winning device 36 and a V winning port 48 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start hole 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The V winning opening 48 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is a ball entrance that is a condition for operating the high-probability mode. The V winning opening 48 is provided with an opening/closing door 48a. After winning a jackpot by a jackpot lottery, the opening/closing door 48a changes from a closed state to an open state at a predetermined timing in a round game that occurs in an opening/closing execution mode executed with the jackpot lottery as a trigger, and then changes to a closed state after a certain period of time. return. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 while the opening/closing door 48a is open, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the round game ends. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes 120 game rounds in the high-probability mode game state, and then shifts the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. Although not shown, a sorting piece is provided on the path through which the game balls flow from the opening/closing door 48a to the V winning opening 48. As shown in FIG. A game ball entered from the opening/closing door 48a is sorted by a sorting piece into a path for entering the V winning opening 48 and a path not entering the V winning opening 48.例文帳に追加When it is detected that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 in a case other than the case where the open/close door 48a is controlled to be opened as internal control and the sorting piece is controlled in the direction in which the ball enters the V winning opening 48. , it is judged as fraudulent prize winning, and the fact that fraudulent prize winning has occurred is notified. In this embodiment, a notification sound is output and an LED lamp is blinked.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display part 37b causes the segment display device to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 112(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal that is variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. The first liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41, and is a pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a. The pattern for the second liquid crystal is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41, and is a pattern corresponding to the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display portion 37b.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal pattern or the second liquid crystal pattern. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 112(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a first sub-display area SA1 are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are cases where the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed and where the image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed. Similarly, in the first sub-display area SA1, as in the main display area MA, there are cases where the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed and where the image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed. Specifically, when the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA, the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1, and the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA. is displayed, the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. That is, the liquid crystal pattern displayed in the main display area MA and the liquid crystal pattern displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 are switched and displayed in a predetermined case.

Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, patterns of numerals 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers as the first liquid crystal pattern or the second liquid crystal pattern shown in FIG. 112(a). A floating display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 112(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. The mode of the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of fluctuation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc., the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols. can adopt various aspects.

In the first sub-display area SA1, three pattern rows Z4, Z5 and Z6 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the pattern rows Z4 to Z6, patterns of numerals 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers as the first liquid crystal pattern or the second liquid crystal pattern shown in FIG. 112(a). A floating display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 112(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L2.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6 and the symbol row Z5, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L2. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L2. The mode of the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern in the first sub-display area SA1 is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, the number of symbol rows in the first sub-display area SA1, the number of effective lines, the direction of variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc., the display of the symbols for the first liquid crystal and the symbols for the second liquid crystal. can adopt various aspects.

In this embodiment, the same type of pattern is used as the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern. Specifically, patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 were adopted as the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern. In this manner, by making the types of symbols displayed as the first liquid crystal symbols and the symbols displayed as the second liquid crystal symbols the same, for example, the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols can be displayed. When the display area to be displayed is switched between the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display switching of the liquid crystal pattern. Also, the player can distinguish between the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern, which are variably displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1. can be made difficult. By doing so, for example, from a state in which the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA and the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1, the main display area MA is displayed with the second liquid crystal pattern. When switching to a state in which the pattern for the second liquid crystal is displayed and the pattern for the first liquid crystal is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1, the display can be switched naturally without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, by making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the liquid crystal patterns that are variably displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1, the patterns displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 Regardless of the type of pattern displayed (first liquid crystal pattern or second liquid crystal pattern), it is possible to focus the player on the liquid crystal pattern displayed in the main display area MA, or to It is possible to add a playability that makes the player guess whether the pattern for liquid crystal displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 is the first pattern for liquid crystal or the pattern for second liquid crystal.

Also, different kinds of patterns can be employed between the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern. For example, eight patterns representing numerals 1 to 8 may be employed as the first liquid crystal symbols, and eight patterns representing alphabetic characters A to H may be employed as the second liquid crystal symbols. By doing so, the player can tell which of the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in each of the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1. can be easily identified. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the state of the game.

Also, different kinds of patterns can be adopted between the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1. For example, eight patterns representing the numbers 1 to 8 are adopted as the liquid crystal patterns to be displayed in the main display area MA, and eight patterns representing the letters A to H are used as the liquid crystal patterns to be displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. You may adopt the design of Further, a display mode for displaying different types of patterns (numbers 1 to 8 and alphabetic patterns A to H) between the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern, and a main display area MA. A display mode in which different types of patterns are displayed may be combined with the first sub-display area SA1. In this manner, various display modes can be adopted as the display modes of the liquid crystal patterns displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), the display surface 41a displays a normal map display area NA for liquid crystal. A pattern corresponding to the normal pattern unit 38 is displayed in the normal pattern display area NA for the liquid crystal. Specifically, a pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the electric accessary item open lottery performed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is displayed. In this embodiment, the numbers 1 to 8 are vertically displayed three times in the normal diagram display area NA for liquid crystal. The three numbers arranged vertically fluctuate with periodicity. After the variable display, a set of three numbers is displayed in a stationary state.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs the blinking display and the lighting display synchronized with the second design variable display and stop display displayed on the second design display unit 37b of the special design unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first sub-display area SA1, the first synchronization display area Sync1, and the second synchronization display area Sync2. A configuration in which 41a does not display some or all of these displays may be employed.

K2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entrances such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 48, etc. Various detection sensors provided on the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , an opening/closing door driving portion 48b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display portion 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, the V winning port 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game. - The drive control of the opening/closing door drive part 48b is performed so that the closing door 48a may be opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the first start port 44, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball entry is retained information storage. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball entry is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. stored chronologically.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. , it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is transferred to the first A process of moving to the execution area, collating with the winning/failing table stored in the winning/failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and determining whether or not there will be a big hit, and entering the game ball into the second start port 34. In this case, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 A process of collating and determining whether or not a jackpot will be achieved is executed in parallel. Below, the process of determining whether or not a big hit will be triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, and whether or not a big hit will be triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 A simultaneous variation machine is a pachinko machine capable of executing in parallel a process of determining whether or not the first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b are displayed in a variable manner. Also called

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

As another specific example, in the first sub-display area SA1 of the display surface 41a shown in FIG. 112(b), the symbols are first stopped in the symbol row Z4, and then the same symbols as Z4 are stopped in the symbol row Z6. As a result, a reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z5 is displayed in a variable manner, thereby becoming a reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z5.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 463, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=464, 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

At least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb are also called reservation information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33. The success/failure table and the success/failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. FIG. 115(a) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for low probability mode), and FIG. 115(b) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 115(a), in the success/failure table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the second start port. FIG. 116(a) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 116(b) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 116(a), in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to be the jackpot. . In addition, 500 values of 5 to 504 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the first small hit, and 50 values of 505 to 554 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the second small hit. 50 values of 555 to 604 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the third small hit. Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than 605 values from 0 to 604 are outliers.

Here, the "minor win" is a success or failure result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger the transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode, which will be described later. be. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first small win, the second small win, and the third small win are set as the small wins. In the first small win, the variable winning device 36 is opened once with an opening period of 1.6 sec in the open/close execution mode. In the second small win, the variable winning device 36 is opened 6 times with an opening period of 60 msec in the open/close execution mode. In the third small win, the variable winning device 36 is opened 8 times with an opening period of 60 msec in the open/close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the second start port (for high probability mode). . In addition, 500 values of 16 to 515 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the first small hit, and 50 values of 516 to 565 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the second small hit. 50 values from 566 to 615 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the third small hit. Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than 616 values from 0 to 615 are outliers.

Thus, in the success/failure table for the second starting port, the probability of winning a big win in the jackpot lottery is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, similarly to the success/failure table for the first starting port. ing. Furthermore, in the success/failure table for the second starting port, both the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and the success/failure table for the high-probability mode have a small win (first small win, second small win, third small win ) is set to 500 values of the jackpot random number counter C1, and when the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port, the probability of the jackpot is 500/1200. is set to be

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. In this embodiment, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. is set to On the other hand, two kinds of low-frequency winning modes are set. The first is a low frequency that is set so that one opening of the door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the door 36b reaches 10. Winning mode. The second is a low frequency that is set to continue until 0.06 seconds have passed since the door 36b was opened once in the opening/closing execution mode, or until the number of balls entering the door 36b reaches 10. Winning mode.

In addition, the opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the occurrence of balls entering the variable prize winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 117(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 117(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to in the big win lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes 8R first-class jackpot and 8R-th jackpot as the jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. Two kinds of jackpots are set.

In the 8R type 1 jackpot, the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. is. Also, the 8R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the V winning opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the fifth round of the round game. When a game ball enters the opened V winning port 48, the lottery mode of the big win lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. However, the number of game rounds executed in the high-probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times the first start-up game round and the second start-up game round executed in the high-probability mode are executed. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In addition, in the game round executed in the high probability mode, if the game ball wins the jackpot and the game ball wins the V winning opening 48 that is opened with the opportunity of the jackpot, the game ball in the high probability mode executed so far The number of game rounds is reset, and after a round game executed with the big win as a trigger, 120 game rounds are again counted from the game rounds in the high-probability mode to be executed thereafter. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, the game rounds in the high-probability mode may be continuously executed 120 times or more.

In the 8R type 2 jackpot, the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the opening and closing control aspect of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. is. Also, the 8R type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the V winning opening 48 is opened for 0.006 seconds in the fifth round of the round game. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. The probability that the game ball will enter the V winning port 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is substantially the low probability mode.

Thus, in the first type jackpot, compared to the second type jackpot, the opening time of the V winning opening 48 during the round game is longer, and the game ball is more likely to enter the V winning opening 48, so the open/close execution mode There is a high probability that the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end will be the high probability mode. On the other hand, in the second type jackpot, compared to the first type jackpot, the opening time of the V winning port 48 during the round game is shorter, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning port 48, so after the end of the opening and closing execution mode The probability that the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery will be the high probability mode is very low.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 8R first type jackpot, and "20 to 39" corresponds to the 8R second It is set to correspond to the seed jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 117(b), the distribution table for the second starting port includes 16R first-class jackpot and 8R-th jackpot as the jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. One type of jackpot is set.

In the 16R type 1 jackpot, the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the opening and closing control aspect of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. is. Also, the 16R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the V winning opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the 13th round of the round game. When a game ball enters the opened V winning port 48, the lottery mode of the big win lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. However, the number of game rounds executed in the high-probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times the first start-up game round and the second start-up game round executed in the high-probability mode are executed. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In addition, in the game round executed in the high probability mode, if the game ball wins the jackpot and the game ball wins the V winning opening 48 that is opened with the opportunity of the jackpot, the game ball in the high probability mode executed so far The number of game rounds is reset, and after a round game executed with the big win as a trigger, 120 game rounds are again counted from the game rounds in the high-probability mode to be executed thereafter. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, the game rounds in the high-probability mode may be continuously executed 120 times or more.

In the 8R type 1 jackpot, as described above, the number of times of opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, the 8R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode on the condition that the V winning opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the fifth round of the round game and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48. It is a jackpot where the lottery mode is a high probability mode. However, the number of game rounds executed in the high-probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times the first start-up game round and the second start-up game round executed in the high-probability mode are executed. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 16R first type jackpot, and "20 to 39" corresponds to the 8R first. It is set to correspond to the seed jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of game balls continues in the same mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric role product 34a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 118(a) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) contains 464 values from 0 to 463 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Two values of 464 and 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 232/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

FIG. 118(b) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 118(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for the low frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

K3. Gaming machine playability:
Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 114, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment includes processing for determining whether or not a big hit will occur when a game ball enters the first start port 33, and It is a simultaneous variation machine that executes in parallel the process of determining whether or not a big hit will occur when a game ball is entered. Therefore, a game round triggered by the game ball launched by the player operating the operation handle 25 entering the first start hole 33 (a game round for the first start hole), and a game ball A game round (second starting game round) triggered by the entry of the ball into the second starting hole 34 is executed in parallel.

In addition, as described above, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the electric accessory opening lottery is executed, and in the high frequency support mode, the electric role opening lottery is won with a probability of 232/233, and the low frequency support mode. At the time, the electric role is elected with a probability of 231/233. Therefore, when the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the electric accessory 34a is opened with a high probability. That is, when the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 with a high probability. Therefore, the player adjusts the shooting intensity of the game ball using the operation handle 25, circulates the game ball to the left side of the game board 30 (see FIG. 111), and makes the game ball enter the first start hole 33. At the same time, the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 (see FIG. 111), and the game ball is entered into the second start hole 34, and the game round for the first start hole and the game round for the second start hole are arranged in parallel. It is possible to execute

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the variation time of the game round for the second start port is set to be much longer than the variation time of the game round for the first start port. is set. Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode, the variation time of one game round for the first starting port is in the range of 5 seconds to 2 minutes, and the variation of one game round for the second starting port is Time is set to 10 minutes.

On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the variation time of the game round for the second start opening is set to be shorter than the variation time of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the variation time for one game round for the first starting port is 1 minute, and the variation time for one game round for the second starting port is 0.5. seconds.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment circulates game balls on the left side of the game board 30, enters the game balls into the first start hole 33, and starts the game round for the first start hole. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, the flow of the game is to circulate the game ball to the right side of the game board 30, enter the game ball into the second start hole 34, and execute the game round for the second start hole. , and has game characteristics that are advantageous to the player.

Also, as shown in the success/failure table for the second starting port in FIG. Win a small hit (first small win, second small win, third small win). When a small win is won, the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the opening/closing door 36b is opened, the game ball enters the big winning hole 36a, and the prize ball is paid out to the player. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player circulates the game balls on the right side of the game board 30, and in addition to the prize balls based on the balls entering the second start port 34, the small wins (first small wins, In some cases, it is possible to obtain a prize ball based on the ball entering the big winning hole 36a opened by the second small win, the third small win.

As described above, the standard game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as follows.

In the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, game balls are circulated to the left side of the game board 30 and entered into a first start port 33.例文帳に追加

Winning a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, and when the jackpot is a second-class jackpot, after a round game, 100 game rounds are executed in a high-frequency support mode. It is possible. In this case, the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, the electric role open winning is generated based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35, and the electric accessory 34a is opened to the second start port 34. A game ball is entered, and a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball into a second starting port. Even if a big winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 does not result in a big winning, the open/close door 36b is opened if the lottery result is a small winning, so that the game ball enters the big winning opening 36a. You may be able to get a prize ball by letting it.

When a big win is not won in a big win lottery during 100 game rounds in the high frequency support, the mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The lottery mode is a low probability mode. When shifting to the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is again circulated to the left side of the game board 30 and entered into the first start port 33. - 特許庁

In a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, game balls are circulated on the left side of the game board 30 to enter the game balls into the first start port 33, and a big hit is made based on the entry of the game balls into the first start port 33. If the lottery is won and the jackpot is a first-class jackpot, and the game ball enters the V winning port 48 during the round game, a high probability mode and a high frequency are performed after the round game. 120 games can be played in support mode. In this case, the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, the electric role open winning is generated based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35, and the electric accessory 34a is opened to the second start port 34. A game ball is entered, and a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball into a second starting port. Even if a big winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 does not result in a big winning, the open/close door 36b is opened if the lottery result is a small winning, so that the game ball enters the big winning opening 36a. You may be able to get a prize ball by letting it.

When a jackpot is not won in a jackpot lottery during 120 game rounds in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, and the high probability mode is changed to the low probability mode. transition to When shifting to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is again circulated to the left side of the game board 30 and entered into the first start port 33.例文帳に追加

A jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery during 120 game rounds in a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and the jackpot is a first-class jackpot, and a game ball enters a V winning port 48 during a round game. When a ball is entered, after the round game is completed, 120 rounds of the game can be executed again in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode.

If a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery during 120 game rounds in a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and if the jackpot is a second-class jackpot, after the round game, a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support are performed. 100 game rounds can be executed in the mode.
The game characteristics of the game machine have been described above.

K4. Processing overview:
<result image>
FIG. 119 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this time chart, the game times for the first start opening, the game times for the second start opening, the special 2 main display flag, the high probability mode flag, and the display mode in the symbol display device 41 are shown.

The numbers (115 to 125) shown in the convex part of the waveform indicating the execution of the first starting game round and the convex part of the waveform indicating the execution of the second starting game round are the most recent first type jackpot. It shows the number of game rounds executed after the high probability mode is started (hereinafter also referred to as the number of game rounds executed after probability variation). That is, the time chart of FIG. 119 shows how 120 game rounds in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are completed (time Tm4) and the mode is shifted to the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode.

In the example shown in the time chart of FIG. 119, in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, the player enters the game ball into the second start hole 34 to execute the game round for the second start hole (see FIG. 119). 119 after the probability variation, the number of game rounds executed is 115 to 120), the game round for the first start hole is entered by entering the game ball into the first start hole 33 with the transition to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. is executed (the number of games executed after the probability variation in FIG. 119 is 121 to 125). As described in the game characteristics of the gaming machine above, the variation time of the game round for the second starting port from 115 to 120 after the probability change is 0.5 seconds (eg, time Tm1 to Tm2 = 0.5 seconds).

The special 2 main display flag is a flag used for switching between the liquid crystal pattern displayed in the main display area MA and the liquid crystal pattern displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. The special 2 main display flag turns ON when the high-frequency support mode starts, and turns OFF when the low-frequency support mode starts. However, in the present embodiment, by entering the game ball into the second start hole 34 in the low frequency support mode, the game round for the second start hole is executed and the jackpot lottery is won (hereinafter referred to as "special jackpot") ), the special 2 main display flag is not turned ON.

As can be seen from the correspondence relationship between the special 2 main display flag and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shown in FIG. 119, when the special 2 main display flag is ON, the second starting port game A second liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the game round is displayed, and a first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first starting opening game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. On the other hand, when the special 2 main display flag is OFF, the first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first starting game round is displayed in the main display area MA, and the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. A pattern for the second liquid crystal, which is a pattern corresponding to the game round for the start opening, is displayed.

As described in the above-described game characteristics of the game machine, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment circulates game balls to the left side of the game board 30 in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, and distributes the game balls to the first position. A game round for the first starting hole is executed by entering the ball into the starting hole 33, and the game balls are circulated to the right side of the game board 30 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (including the low probability mode). The flow of the game in which the game ball is entered into the second start hole 34 and the game round for the second start hole is executed has the playability that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player executes the first starting opening game round and the second starting opening game round according to the game characteristics of the gaming machine, A liquid crystal pattern (first liquid crystal pattern or second liquid crystal pattern) corresponding to the game round to be executed is displayed in the main display area MA. The chart showing the display mode of the pattern display device shown in FIG. 119 shows the second sub-display area SA2, which will be described later.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the last two game rounds to be executed after the start of the last game round to be executed before the end of the high probability mode (hereinafter also referred to as the final specific game round) The variable time is set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time. When specifically described with reference to FIG. 119, immediately after starting the last game round to be executed before the end of the high probability mode (the number of game rounds executed after the probability variation is the 120th second starting port game round) The variation time of the game round with the number of game rounds to be executed after the probability change is 121 times (time Tm5 to Tm7) and the variation time of the game round with the number of game rounds executed after the probability change being 122 times (time Tm8 to Tm9) is set to 12 seconds.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 displays a result image, which is an image showing information about the privilege granted to the player in the high probability mode, during the execution of two game rounds in which the variation time is set to 12 seconds, in the main display area. Display on MA for 10 seconds.

FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the result image on the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 120(a) shows the display mode of the symbol display device 41 until the game round of the 120th game round execution count after probability variation is completed. FIG. 120(b) is a period in which the last two game rounds to be executed after the start of the last game round (hereinafter referred to as the final specific game round) to be executed before the end of the high probability mode are executed. It shows the display mode of the pattern display device 41 during the period when the result image is displayed. FIG. 120(c) shows the display mode of the pattern display device 41 after the display of the result image is completed. 120 and the time chart of FIG. 119, FIG. 120(a) corresponds to the display mode of the pattern display device 41 up to time Tm4 (FIG. 119), and FIG. It corresponds to the display mode of the pattern display device 41 up to Tm6, and FIG. 120(c) corresponds to the display mode of the pattern display device 41 after time Tm6.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), up to 120 times the number of game rounds executed after probability variation, the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 (display surface 41a) displays a symbol corresponding to the game round for the second starting port. is displayed, and in the first sub-display area SA1, the first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the game cycle for the first starting port is displayed.

A guide display GD1 is also displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The guide display GD1 is a guide display indicating that it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the right side of the game board 30 . As described above, up to 120 times the number of game rounds executed after the probability change is in the high frequency support mode state, and it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls to the right side of the game board 30, so the symbol display device 41 displays a guidance display GD1. By displaying the guide display GD1, it is possible to guide the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 120(b), two game rounds to be executed immediately after starting the final specific game round (in this embodiment, the number of game rounds executed after the probability variation is the 120th game round) are executed. During the period during which the result image is displayed, the result image is displayed in the main display area MA of the pattern display device 41, and the second starting game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. The second liquid crystal pattern, which is the corresponding pattern, is displayed. As explained in FIG. 119, since the special 2 main display flag is turned OFF at the end of the final specific game round (the number of game rounds executed after probability variation is the 120th game round), the main display area MA has the In principle, the pattern for the first liquid crystal, which is the pattern corresponding to the game round for the first starting port, is displayed. However, since the result image is displayed in the main display area MA, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a second sub-display area SA2 is provided above the left end of the display surface 41a. A pattern for the first liquid crystal is displayed in SA2. By doing so, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the visibility of the pattern for the first liquid crystal when the result image is displayed.

Further, a guide display GD2 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The guide display GD2 is a guide display indicating that it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls to the left side of the game board 30 . As described above, after the game round of the 120th game round execution count after probability variation is completed, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, since it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the left side of the game board 30, the guide display GD2 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁By displaying the guidance display GD2, it is possible to guide the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 120(c), after the display of the result image is finished, the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA of the pattern display device 41, and the first sub-display area SA1 of the pattern display device 41 is displayed. , the pattern for the second liquid crystal is displayed.

Here, the result image will be explained. As described above, the result image is an image showing information about the privilege given to the player in the high probability mode. For example, when the high-probability mode is entered due to a first-class jackpot, the first-class jackpot may be won again during the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode may continue. During the high-probability mode, information such as the number of times the first-class jackpot was won again during the high-probability mode and entered the high-probability mode, and the information about the prize balls paid out by winning the jackpot are given to the player in the high-probability mode. Information about the privilege is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as a result image.

Next, another example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

FIG. 121 is a time chart illustrating another example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 121, although the number of game rounds executed after the probability change is 120th, the game round for the second starting port is finished and the high probability mode is ended, but the number of game rounds executed after the probability change is 121st. This shows the case where the game round for the second starting port is executed as the game round. Such a time chart is when the number of times of execution of the game rounds after the probability change is 120th. When the game round for the second start port is completed, the reserved game round for the second start port remains, or after the probability change. This is the case where the game ball enters the second starting hole 34 before and after the game round for the second starting hole having the 120th game round execution count ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variation machine in which the first start-up game round and the second start-up game round are executed in parallel. During the execution of the second starting port game round of which the execution count is 121, there is a case where the first starting port game round of which the post-probability variation game round execution count is 122 is executed in parallel.

Even in such a case, similar to the example described in FIG. The fluctuation time in the game cycle is set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time. That is, the variation time of the second starting opening game round with the 121st game round execution number after the probability change and the first starting opening game round with the 122nd after probability change game execution number is set to 12 seconds. After the end of the final specific game round, the result image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 for 10 seconds.

That is, as shown in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 in the time chart of FIG. 121, the number of game rounds executed after probability variation is 120 times (final specific game round), the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, A second liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the second starting game round is displayed, and a first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first starting opening game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. Is displayed.

During the period in which the last two game rounds to be executed after the start of the final specific game round are executed and the result image is displayed, the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 A result image is displayed, and a pattern for the second liquid crystal, which is a pattern corresponding to the game round for the second start opening, is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

After the display of the result image is finished, the pattern for the first liquid crystal is displayed in the main display area MA of the pattern display device 41, and the pattern for the second liquid crystal is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 of the pattern display device 41. .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays on the pattern display device 41 a result image showing information about the privilege given to the player in the high probability mode when the high probability mode is ended. Since it takes several seconds for the player to visually recognize the information displayed as the result image and understand the displayed content, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the result image for a fixed period of 10 seconds. indicate.

For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment predetermines the variation time in the two game rounds executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round in order to display the result image on the pattern display device 41. Set to 12 seconds, which is the time.

In the case of a simultaneous variation machine, either the first starting game time or the second starting game time is executed during the period in which either the first starting game time or the second starting game time is executed. may be executed. Therefore, during the period in which the result image is displayed on the pattern display device 41, for example, the game cycle for the first starting port ends and a new game cycle for the first starting port is started, or the game cycle for the second starting port is started. There is a case where a round ends and a new game round for the second starting port is started. Hereinafter, the timing of starting a game cycle and the timing of ending a game cycle will also be referred to as a "break of a game cycle".

If the "break of the game cycle" occurs while the result image is being displayed on the pattern display device 41, there is a possibility that the player will have a complicated impression. In addition, the player may not be able to concentrate on the result of the big winning lottery in each game round.

When displaying a result image on the symbol display device 41, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment uses the variation time of a plurality of game rounds executed continuously or in parallel as the time for displaying the result image (this embodiment). Since the time (12 seconds) is set to be longer than 10 seconds), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of break in the game cycle during the period when the result image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

In addition, since the game round in which the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds, which is the predetermined time, is the two game rounds to be executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round, the result image is displayed on the pattern display device 41. It is possible to minimize the number of game rounds set to a variable time equal to or longer than the time during which the result image is displayed, while suppressing the occurrence of breaks in the game rounds in the period during which the result image is displayed.

<Demo image>
FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the demonstration image displayed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. The demo image is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the game cycle is not started for a predetermined period set in advance. In this embodiment, a moving image (hereinafter also referred to as a demonstration moving image) is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as a demonstration image. The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment displays a demonstration video on the symbol display device 41 when the first starter game round or the second starter game round is not started for a predetermined period of time or longer.

Specifically, when the first starting game round is not started for a predetermined period of time or longer, the display area ( In the main display area MA or the first sub-display area SA1), a demonstration moving image for the area is displayed. In addition, when the second starting game round is not started for a predetermined period or longer, the display area (main display area) displaying the pattern (second liquid crystal pattern) corresponding to the second starting game round at that time In the MA or the first sub-display area SA1), a demonstration moving image for the area is displayed.

Usually, in a pachinko machine, a demo video is displayed on the entire display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 when neither the first starting game round nor the second starting opening game round is started for a predetermined period of time. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the time until the demo animation is displayed is set separately for the first start-up game round and the second start-up game round, and the main display is set. Demonstration moving images are displayed in each of the area MA and the first sub-display area SA1.

FIG. 122(a) shows that a demo video is displayed in the main display area MA, and a game round (a game round for the first starting point or a second starting point) corresponding to the first sub-display area SA1 is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. 2 shows a state in which symbols (symbols for the first liquid crystal or symbols for the second liquid crystal) are displayed.

When the special 2 main display flag is OFF, the state shown in FIG. 122(a) occurs in the following cases. A first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first starting game round is displayed in the main display area MA, and a second liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the second starting opening game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. In this case, when the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 33 and the game cycle for the first starting hole does not start for a predetermined period, a demonstration video set for the main display area MA is displayed in the main display area MA. is displayed as shown in FIG. 122(a). At this time, when the second start-up game round is being executed, the second liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the second start-up game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

When the special 2 main display flag is ON, the state shown in FIG. 122(a) occurs in the following cases. A second liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the second starting game round is displayed in the main display area MA, and a first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first starting opening game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. In this case, when the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 34 and the game round for the second starting hole does not start for a predetermined period, a demonstration video set for the main display area MA is displayed in the main display area MA. is displayed as shown in FIG. 122(a). At this time, when the first start-up game round is being executed, the first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first start-up game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

FIG. 122(b) shows a pattern (first liquid crystal pattern or second liquid crystal pattern) of a game round (first starting opening game round or second starting opening game round) corresponding to the main display area MA. pattern for liquid crystal) is displayed, and a demonstration moving image is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

When the special 2 main display flag is OFF, the state shown in FIG. 122(b) occurs in the following cases. A first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first starting game round is displayed in the main display area MA, and a second liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the second starting opening game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. , when the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 and the second starting port game round does not start for a while, the first sub-display area SA1 is set for the first sub-display area SA1. A demo video is displayed as shown in FIG. 122(b). At this time, when the first start-up game round is being executed, the first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first start-up game round is displayed in the main display area MA.

When the special 2 main display flag is ON, the state shown in FIG. 122(b) occurs in the following cases. A second liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the second starting game round is displayed in the main display area MA, and a first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first starting opening game round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. , when the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 33 and the game round for the first starting hole does not start, the demo set for the first sub-display area SA1 is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. A moving image is displayed as shown in FIG. 122(b). At this time, when the game round for the second starting opening is being executed, the pattern for the second liquid crystal corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening is displayed in the main display area MA.

In FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b), the demo video is displayed in either the main display area MA or the first sub-display area SA1, and the pattern corresponding to the display area is displayed in the other. Although an example of display is shown, if each of the game rounds corresponding to both display areas is not started for a predetermined period of time or longer, both the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 are displayed. A corresponding demo video is displayed. That is, the demonstration video for the main display area MA shown in FIG. 122(a) is displayed in the main display area MA, and the first sub-display area SA1 shown in FIG. 122(b) is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. A demo video for is displayed.

In addition, when a game round corresponding to the display area where the demonstration movie is displayed is started while the demonstration movie is being displayed, the display area changes from the display of the demonstration movie to the display of the symbols corresponding to the game round. return to

FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between an RTC (RTC: Real-Time Clock) effect video and a demonstration video.

FIG. 123(a) shows a case where the RTC effect moving image is displayed when the pattern corresponding to the display area is displayed in both the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1. . In this case, on the pattern display device 41, the patterns corresponding to the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 are displayed as higher layer images than the layer image corresponding to the RTC effect moving image.

FIG. 123(b) shows a case where the RTC moving image rendering is started in a state where the demonstration moving images can be displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the main display area MA is in a state where a demonstration video can be displayed, when an RTC effect video is displayed, the RTC effect video is preferentially displayed, After the end of the RTC effect animation, the display of the demonstration animation is started. On the other hand, in the first sub-display area SA1, the demo video is preferentially displayed even when the RTC effect video is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 123(b), if the game round corresponding to the main display area MA is started, the main display area MA will be displayed like the main display area MA shown in FIG. 123(a). The pattern of the corresponding game round is displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image of the RTC effect animation. In this case, if the game cycle corresponding to the first sub-display area SA1 is not started, the first sub-display area SA1 maintains the state in which the demo moving image is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 123(b), if the game cycle corresponding to the first sub-display area SA1 is started, the first sub-display area SA1 shown in FIG. 123(a) is displayed. The pattern of the game cycle corresponding to one sub-display area SA1 is displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image of the RTC effect moving image. In this case, when the game cycle corresponding to the main display area MA is not started, the main display area MA maintains a state in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed with priority over the demonstration moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed. After the end, display of the demonstration video is started.

K5. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

MPU 62 of main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In step S5101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (entering ball detection information) is saved. After that, the process proceeds to step S5102.

In step S5102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S5104.

In step S5104, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step S5104 will be described later. After executing step S5104, the process advances to step S5105.

In step S5105, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball into the through-gate 35 is executed. Details of the ball entry processing for the through gate in step S5105 will be described later. After executing step S5105, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 124: S5104).

FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting opening. In step S5201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (start winning). In step S5201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step S5203.

In step S5203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the first start hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step S5204.

In step S5204, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension number RaN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S5204, when the first start suspension number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (S5204: NO), the ball-entering process for the main start opening ends.

On the other hand, in step S5204, if the first start suspension number RaN is less than the upper limit (S5204: YES), the process proceeds to step S5205, and 1 is added to the first start suspension number RaN in the first reservation area. After that, the process advances to step S5206.

In step S5206, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 125) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area, that is, step In S5205, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added. After executing step S5206, the process advances to step S5207.

In step S5207, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the reservation information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the big hit lottery (determination process). After executing step S5207, the process advances to step S5208.

In step S5208, processing for setting the first pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (reservation information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the first reservation command.

The first suspension command is the result of the determination by the previous determination process based on the suspension information acquired based on the occurrence of the entry of the game ball to the first starting port 33 and the entry, and the suspension information is the main control. This is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize it before it becomes an object of the jackpot lottery by the device 60 . The first pending command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 127 : step S5402) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the first suspension command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the first suspension display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in response to the increase in the number of reserved items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

In step S5201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (S5201: NO), the process proceeds to step S5209, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step S5209, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S5209: YES), the process proceeds to step S5210, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S5211. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5209 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S5209: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S5211, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the second start hole 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step S5212.

In step S5212, it is determined whether or not the second start pending number RbN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S5212, when the second start suspension number RbN is not less than the upper limit value (S5212: NO), the ball-entering process for the main start opening ends.

On the other hand, in step S5212, when the second start-holding number RbN is less than the upper limit (S5212: YES), the process proceeds to step S5213, and 1 is added to the second start-holding number RbN of the second reservation area. After that, the process proceeds to step S5214.

In step S5214, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 125) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area, that is, step In S5213, the value of the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value. After executing step S5214, the process advances to step S5215.

In step S5215, a first determination process is executed. As described above, the first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of determining the type, presence or absence of reach, and the like before the reservation information is subject to the big hit lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60 . After executing step S5215, the process advances to step S5216.

In step S5216, processing for setting a second pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (reservation information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the second reservation command.

The second suspension command is the result of the determination by the previous determination process based on the suspension information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 and the entrance, and the suspension information is the main control. This is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize it before it becomes an object of the jackpot lottery by the device 60 . The second pending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 127 : step S5402) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the second suspension command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the second suspension display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in response to the increase in the number of reserved items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After step S5216 is executed, the ball entry processing for this starting opening ends.

<Ball entry processing for through gate>
Next, the ball entry processing for the through gate will be described. The ball entry process for the through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 124: S5105).

FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a through gate. In step S5301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 or not. In step S5301, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S5301: YES), the process proceeds to step S5302, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four.

In step S5302, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S5302: YES), the process proceeds to step S5303, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S5304.

In step S5304, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 124) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the ball entry processing for the through gate ends.

On the other hand, in step S5301, when it is determined that the game ball did not enter the through gate 35 (S5301: NO), and in step S5302, when it is determined that the value of the accessory reserved number SN is not less than the upper limit (S5302: NO), without storing the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 in the electricity holding area 64d of the RAM 64, the through-gate ball-entering process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S5401, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process advances to step S5402.

In step S5402, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to effects such as variable commands and pending commands, which will be described later, are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S5402, the process advances to step S5403.

In step S5403, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process advances to step S5404.

In step S5404, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S5405, the process advances to step S5406.

In step S5406, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process advances to step S5407.

In step S5407, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step S5408.

In step S5408, game ball launch control processing is executed. The game ball shooting control process is a process executed to shoot a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 or the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player. Details of the game ball launch control process will be described later. After executing step S5408, the process advances to step S5409.

In step S5409, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (start of command output processing in step S5402 in the second and subsequent rounds). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process.

In step S5409, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S5409: NO), in steps S5410 and S5411, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S5410, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S5411, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (S5409: YES), the process returns to step S5402, and each process from step S5402 to step S5408 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S5402 to step S5408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 127: S5405).

FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated.

In step S5501, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (S5501: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step S5502. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S5501: NO), the process proceeds to step S5502.

In step S5502, it is determined whether or not the special 1 fluctuating flag is ON. Special 1 fluctuating flag is a flag for determining whether or not the pattern in the first pattern display portion 37a is fluctuating. It is turned ON when the pattern of the pattern display portion 37a starts to fluctuate, and is turned OFF when the pattern stops fluctuating. If it is determined in step S5502 that the special 1 fluctuating flag is not ON (S5502: NO), the process proceeds to step S5503.

In step S5503, variation start processing for the first symbol display portion is executed. The variation start processing for the first symbol display portion is processing for starting the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S5503, the process advances to step S5504.

On the other hand, in step S5502, if it is determined that the special 1 during fluctuation flag is ON (S5502: YES), without executing the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display unit in step S5503, go to step S5504 move on.

In step S5504, it is determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuating flag is ON. The special 2 fluctuating flag is a flag for determining whether or not the pattern is fluctuating in the second pattern display portion 37b. This flag is turned ON when the pattern of the pattern display portion 37b starts to change, and turned OFF when the pattern stops changing. If it is determined in step S5504 that the special 2 fluctuating flag is not ON (S5504: NO), the process proceeds to step S5505.

In step S5505, a variation start process for the second symbol display portion is executed. The variation start processing for the second symbol display portion is processing for starting the variation of the symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b. The details of the variation start process for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S5505, the process advances to step S5506.

On the other hand, in step S5504, if it is determined that the special 2 during fluctuation flag is ON (S5504: YES), without executing the fluctuation start processing for the second symbol display unit in step S5505, to step S5506 move on.

In step S5506, fluctuation stop processing is executed. The fluctuation stop processing is processing for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Details of the fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S5506, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first symbol display unit>
Next, the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display section will be described. The variation start process for the first symbol display section is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game cycle control process (FIG. 128: S5503).

FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing variation start processing for the first symbol display section. In step S5601, it is determined whether or not the value of the first start suspension number RaN is zero. If it is determined in step S5601 that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S5601: NO), the process proceeds to step S5602. On the other hand, in step S5601, when it is determined that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is 0 (S5601: YES), the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display section ends.

In step S5602, game number count processing is executed. The number-of-games count process is a process for counting the number of times of game rounds (symbol fluctuations) executed after the high-probability mode or the high-frequency support mode is started. Details of the number-of-games counting process will be described later. After executing step S5602, the process advances to step S5603.

In step S5603, hold information shift processing for the first symbol display portion is executed. The reservation information shift process for the first symbol display section is a process of shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra. The details of the hold information shift process for the first symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S5603, the process advances to step S5604.

In step S5604, determination processing for the first symbol display portion is executed. In the determination process for the first symbol display section, a big winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, the judgment of whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit , Distribution determination for distributing the jackpot type, and reach determination for determining the presence or absence of reach occurrence. The details of the determination processing for the first symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S5604, the process advances to step S5605.

In step S5605, a variable time setting process for the first symbol display portion is executed. In the process of setting the variation time for the first symbol display portion, the variation time, which is the time from when the symbols of the first symbol display portion start to change to when they stop, is set. Details of the processing for setting the variable time for the first symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S5605, the process advances to step S5606.

In step S5606, high probability mode end processing is executed. The high-probability mode termination process is a process for terminating the high-probability mode when a predetermined number of (120 times in this embodiment) determination processes (jackpot lottery) have been performed after shifting to the high-probability mode. Details of the high-probability mode end processing will be described later. After executing step S5606, the process advances to step S5607.

In step S5607, a special 1 variation command is set. The special 1 variation command includes information indicating that the game round to be started this time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. , information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, information on the type of jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variable time set in step S5604. The set special 1 variation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step S5402) in the normal process (FIG. 127). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received special 1 variation command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined performance is executed. After executing step S5607, the process advances to step S5608.

In step S5608, the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is started. After that, the flow advances to step S5609 to turn on the special 1 fluctuating flag. After executing step S5609, the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display section ends.

<Game number counting process>
Next, the number-of-games counting process will be described. The number-of-games count process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the first symbol display section (FIG. 129: S5602).

FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the number-of-games counting process. In step S5701, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games count flag for ST is ON. The number-of-games count flag for ST is a flag that is referred to for determining whether or not it is necessary to count the number of games played after the high-probability mode is started. In step S5701, when it is determined that the number-of-games-count flag for ST is ON (S5701: YES), the process proceeds to step S5702, and 1 is added to the value of the number-of-games counter for ST PNC1. After that, the process proceeds to step S5703. On the other hand, in step S5701, when it is determined that the number-of-games count flag for ST is not ON (S5701: NO), the process proceeds to step S5705 without executing the processing of steps S5702 to S5704.

In step S5703, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is 123. When it is determined in step S5703 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is 123 (S5703: YES), the process proceeds to step S5704 to turn off the number-of-games-count flag for ST. The reason for this is that, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to count the number of times the game has been played after the high-probability mode is started after 123 times. After executing step S5704, the process advances to step S5705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5703 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is not 123 (S5703: NO), the process proceeds to step S5705 without executing step S5704.

In step S5705, it is determined whether or not the power support game count flag is ON. When the high-frequency support mode is started without transitioning to the high-probability mode, the power support game number count flag needs to count the number of times the game is played after the high-frequency support mode is started. This flag is referenced to determine whether or not In step S5705, if it is determined that the power support game number count flag is ON (S5705: YES), the process proceeds to step S5706, and 1 is added to the value of the power support game number counter PNC2. After that, the process advances to step S5707. On the other hand, in step S5705, if it is determined that the power support game number count flag is not ON (S5705: NO), the game number count process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S5706 to S5708.

In step S5707, it is determined whether or not the value of the power support game number counter PNC2 is 100. In step S5707, when it is determined that the value of the power support game number counter PNC2 is 100 (S5707: YES), the process proceeds to step S5708, and the power support game number count flag is turned OFF. The reason for this is that in this embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode is started without transitioning to the high-probability mode, the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode is started is 100 times or later. This is because there is no need to count. After executing step S5708, this game number counting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S5707, when it is determined that the value of the power support game number counter PNC2 is not 100 (S5707: NO), the game number counting process is terminated without executing step S5708.

<Holding information shift processing for the first symbol display unit>
Next, the hold information shift process for the first symbol display section will be described. The hold information shift process for the first symbol display section is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display section (FIG. 129: S5603).

FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing a hold information shift process for the first symbol display section. In step S5801, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra. After that, the process advances to step S5802.

In step S5802, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process advances to step S5803.

In step S5803, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S5803, the hold information shift process for the first symbol display section ends.

<Determination processing for the first symbol display unit>
Next, determination processing for the first symbol display section will be described. The determination process for the first symbol display section is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display section (FIG. 129: S5604).

FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing determination processing for the first symbol display section. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When the ball enters, it is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the game ball does not enter the V prize opening 48 in the opening/closing execution mode relating to the winning of the jackpot, or in the high-probability mode. It is turned OFF when execution of 120 times of the big winning lottery is completed without winning the big winning in the big winning lottery in the middle. If it is determined in step S5901 that the mode is the high probability mode (S5901: YES), the process proceeds to step S5902.

In step S5902, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the jackpot in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode). It is determined whether or not they match. After that, the process advances to step S5904. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S5901: NO), the process proceeds to step S5903.

In step S5903, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the first start port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the jackpot in the success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode). It is determined whether or not they match. After that, the process advances to step S5904.

In step S5904, it is determined whether or not the result of the success determination in step S5902 or step S5903 is a big hit. In step S5904, when it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot (S5904: YES), the process proceeds to step S5905.

In step S5905, the special 1 win flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The special 1 hit flag is a flag that is turned ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 as a trigger is "big hit". After executing step S5905, the process advances to step S5906.

In step S5906, the allocation determination is performed with reference to the allocation table for the first starting port. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is included in which jackpot type numerical range. After executing step S5906, the process advances to step S5907.

In step S5907, it is determined whether or not the result of distribution determination (jackpot type) in step S5906 is the first type jackpot. In step S5907, when it is determined that the sorted jackpot type is the first type jackpot (S5907: YES), the process proceeds to step S5908.

In step S5908, the first type jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) for special 1 corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is turned ON. In this embodiment, since the type of the set first-class jackpot is only the 8R first-class jackpot, the 8R first-class jackpot flag for special 1 is turned ON. After executing step S5908, the process advances to step S5909.

In step S5909, stop symbol setting processing for the first kind jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the first kind jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stopped display) in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display part 37a in the current game turn to be the first kind jackpot. Execute processing to set whether Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S5909, the process advances to step S5910.

In step S5910, if the special jackpot flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, the special jackpot flag is turned OFF. After that, the determination processing for the first symbol display section ends. As will be described later, the special jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 during the period in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. is a flag that

In step S5907, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the first type jackpot (S5907: NO), that is, when the distributed jackpot type is the second type jackpot, the process proceeds to step S5911.

In step S5911, the second type jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) for special 1 corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is turned ON. In this embodiment, since the type of the second type jackpot that is set is only the 8R second type jackpot, the special 1 8R second type jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step S5911, the process advances to step S5912.

In step S5912, stop symbol setting processing for the second type jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the second type jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stopped display) in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a in the current game turn to be the second type jackpot. Execute processing to set whether Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S5912, the process proceeds to step S5910 described above, and the special jackpot flag which is ON is turned OFF in the process. After that, the determination processing for the first symbol display section ends.

In step S5904, if it is determined that the result of the success or failure determination in step S5902 or step S5903 is not a big hit (S5904: NO), the process proceeds to step S5913, the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM63 With reference to the determination table, reach determination is performed as to whether or not reach occurs. Specifically, whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table referred to judge. The processing of this step S5913 is executed when the result of the success/failure determination (big win lottery) in the above step S5904 is not a big win. That is, in step S5913, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which reach occurs among the game rounds in which the result of the winning/failure determination is not a jackpot. After executing step S5913, the process proceeds to step S5914.

In step S5914, it is determined whether or not the result of reach determination in step S5913 is reach occurrence. In step S5914, when it is determined that reach has occurred (S5914: YES), the process advances to step S5915 to turn on the special 1 reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. FIG. After executing step S5915, the process advances to step S5916. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5914 that reach has not occurred (S5914: NO), the process proceeds to step S5916 without executing step S5915.

In step S5916, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for loss, in the current game turn to be a loss, the first symbol display portion 37a is used for setting which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63e, the stop result corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c The address information of the data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S5916, the determination processing for the first symbol display section ends.

<Processing for setting variation time for first symbol display section>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first symbol display section will be described. The process of setting the variation time for the first symbol display section is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the first symbol display section (FIG. 129: S5605).

FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the variation time for the first symbol display section. In step S6001, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is "121". When it is determined in step S6001 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not "121", the process proceeds to step S6002 to determine whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "122". . When it is determined in step S6002 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is not "122", the process proceeds to step S6003.

In step S6003, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6003 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S6003: NO), the process proceeds to step S6004.

In step S6004, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S6005.

In step S6005, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 8R first type jackpot flag for special 1 or the 8R second type jackpot flag for special 1 is ON, and if any flag is ON (S6005: YES ), and the process proceeds to step S6006.

In step S6006, the variable time table for big hit stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S6006, the process advances to step S6010 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first symbol display section is terminated.

In step S6005, if it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (S6005: NO), the process proceeds to step S6007, and the result of the reach determination related to the current game round is the occurrence of reach. Determine whether or not Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag is ON, and if it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (S6007: YES), the process proceeds to step S6008.

In step S6008, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S6008, the process advances to step S6010 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first symbol display section is terminated.

In step S6007, when it is determined that the reach determination result related to the game round this time is not reach occurrence (S6007: NO), the process proceeds to step S6009, reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d By referring to the variable time table, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S6009, the process advances to step S6010 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first symbol display section is terminated.

In step S6003, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S6003: YES), the process proceeds to step S6011 to determine whether or not the special jackpot flag is ON. In step S6011, when it is determined that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6011: YES), the process proceeds to step S6004 described above. On the other hand, in step S6011, when it is determined that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6011: NO), the process proceeds to step S6012, and a value corresponding to 1 min is stored in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. to set. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first symbol display section is terminated.

In step S6001, when it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "121" (S6001: YES), and in step S6002, it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "122" If so (S6002: YES), the process advances to step S6013 to set a value corresponding to 12 seconds in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first symbol display section is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension numbers RaN increases. . However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of the first start suspension number RaN. may

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Further, the variable time table for the first type jackpot and the variable time table for the second type jackpot may be individually set.

<Process for ending high probability mode>
Next, the processing for ending the high probability mode will be described. The high-probability mode ending process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation starting process for the first symbol display section (FIG. 129: S5606).

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing high-probability mode termination processing. In step S6101, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6101 that the high-probability mode flag is not ON (S6101: NO), the high-probability mode end processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6101 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S6101: YES), the process proceeds to step S6102.

In step S6102, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is 120 or not. When it is determined in step S6102 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is not 120 (S6102: NO), the high-probability mode end processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step S6102, if it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is 120 (S6102: YES), proceed to step S6103, turn off the high-probability mode flag, proceed to step S6104, Turn off the high-frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S6105.

In step S6105, it is determined whether or not the special jackpot flag is ON. In step S6105, when it is determined that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6105: NO), the process proceeds to step S6106, and the final specific game round flag is turned ON. The final specific game round flag is a flag for specifying that it is the game round (120th game round) related to the last big win lottery in the high probability mode. After executing step S6106, the high-probability mode termination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S6105, when it is determined that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6105: YES), the process proceeds to step S6107, and the special jackpot flag is turned OFF. After that, the high-probability mode termination process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the second symbol display unit>
Next, the variation start processing for the second symbol display section will be described. The variation start process for the second symbol display section is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game cycle control process (FIG. 128: S5505).

FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing variation start processing for the second symbol display section. In step S6201, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start suspension number RbN is zero. If it is determined in step S6201 that the value of the second start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S6201: NO), the process proceeds to step S6202. On the other hand, in step S6201, when it is determined that the value of the second start suspension number RaN is 0 (S6201: YES), the variation start processing for the second symbol display section ends.

In step S6202, game number count processing is executed. The number-of-games count process is, as described above, a process for counting the number of times of games (symbol fluctuations) executed after the high-probability mode or high-frequency support mode is started. After executing step S6202, the process advances to step S6203.

In step S6203, hold information shift processing for the second symbol display portion is executed. The pending information shift process for the second symbol display section is a process of shifting the pending information stored in the second pending area Ra. The details of the hold information shift process for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S6203, the process proceeds to step S6204.

In step S6204, determination processing for the second symbol display portion is executed. In the determination process for the second symbol display section, a big winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, the judgment of whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit , Distribution determination for distributing the jackpot type, and reach determination for determining the presence or absence of reach occurrence. The details of the determination process for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S6204, the process advances to step S6205.

In step S6205, a variable time setting process for the second symbol display portion is executed. In the process of setting the variation time for the second symbol display portion, the variation time, which is the time from when the symbols of the second symbol display portion start to change to when they stop, is set. The details of the process of setting the variable time for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S6205, the process advances to step S6206.

In step S6206, high probability mode end processing is executed. In the high-probability mode end processing, as described above, the high-probability mode is ended when the determination processing (jackpot lottery) is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times in this embodiment) after shifting to the high-probability mode. processing. The details of the high-probability mode end processing will be described later. After executing step S6206, the process advances to step S6207.

In step S6207, a special 2 variation command is set. The special 2 variation command includes information indicating that the game round to be started this time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 33. , information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, information on the type of jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variable time set in step S6204. The set special 2 variation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step S5402) in the normal process (FIG. 127). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received special 2 variation command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S6207, the process advances to step S6208.

In step S6208, the variable display of symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b is started. After that, the flow advances to step S6209 to turn on the special 2 fluctuating flag. After executing step S6209, the variation start processing for the second symbol display section ends.

<Holding information shift processing for the second pattern display unit>
Next, the hold information shift process for the second symbol display section will be described. The hold information shift process for the second symbol display section is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second symbol display section (FIG. 135: S6203).

FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing a hold information shift process for the second symbol display section. In step S6301, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second start reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S6302.

In step S6302, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process proceeds to step S6303.

In step S6303, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing the step S6303, the second symbol display unit reservation information shift process is terminated.

<Determination processing for the second symbol display unit>
Next, the determination processing for the second symbol display section will be described. The determination processing for the second symbol display portion is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: S6204) of the variation start processing for the second symbol display portion.

FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing determination processing for the second symbol display section. In step S6401, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6401 that the mode is the high probability mode (S6401: YES), the process proceeds to step S6402.

In step S6402, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the jackpot in the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode). It is determined whether or not they match. After that, the process proceeds to step S6404. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S6401: NO), the process proceeds to step S6403.

In step S6403, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the second start port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the jackpot in the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode). It is determined whether or not they match. After that, the process proceeds to step S6404.

In step S6404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is a big hit. In step S6404, when it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot (S6404: YES), the process proceeds to step S6405.

In step S6405, the special 2 winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The special 2 winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the lottery result of the big winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 33 as a trigger is "big winning" or "small winning". . After executing step S6405, the process advances to step S6406.

In step S6406, allocation determination is performed with reference to the allocation table for the second starting port. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c is included in which jackpot type numerical range. After executing step S6406, the process advances to step S6407.

In step S6407, it is determined whether or not the result of distribution determination (jackpot type) in step S6406 is the first type jackpot. In step S6407, when it is determined that the sorted jackpot type is the first type jackpot (S6407: YES), the process proceeds to step S6408.

In step S6408, the first type jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) for special 2 corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is turned ON. In this embodiment, when the distributed jackpot type is the 8R first type jackpot, the special 2 8R first type jackpot flag is turned ON, and when the distributed jackpot type is the 16R first type jackpot, the special 2 Turn ON the 16R first-class jackpot flag. After executing step S6408, the process advances to step S6409.

In step S6409, stop symbol setting processing for the first kind jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the first kind jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stopped display) in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the second symbol display part 37a in the current game turn to be the first kind jackpot. Execute processing to set whether Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S6409, the process advances to step S6410.

In step S6410, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S6410, when it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S6410: NO), the process proceeds to step S6411 to turn on the special jackpot flag. That is, as described above, the special jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 during the period in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. is a flag that After executing step S6411, the determination process for the second symbol display section ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6410 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (S6410: YES), the determination process for the second symbol display section ends without executing step S6411.

In step S6407, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the first type jackpot (S6407: NO), that is, when the distributed jackpot type is the second type jackpot, the process proceeds to step S6412. In this embodiment, since the second type jackpot is not set in the success/failure table for the second starting port, the processing of steps S6412 and S6413 described below is not executed.

In step S6412, the second type jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) for special 2 corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is turned ON. After executing step S6412, the process proceeds to step S6413.

In step S6413, stop symbol setting processing for the second type jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the second type jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stopped display) in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the second symbol display section 37a in the current game turn to be the second type jackpot. Execute processing to set whether Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is acquired. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S6413, the flow advances to step S6410 described above to determine whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In step S6410, when it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S6410: NO), the process proceeds to step S6411 to turn on the special jackpot flag. After executing step S6411, the determination process for the second symbol display section ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6410 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (S6410: YES), the determination process for the second symbol display section ends without executing step S6411.

In step S6404, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is not a big hit (S6404: NO), the process proceeds to step S6414, and the result of the success/failure determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is a small hit. Determine whether or not In step S6414, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit (S6414: YES), the process proceeds to step S6415, and the special 2 hit flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step S6416 and turns ON the small hit flag corresponding to the result of right or wrong determination. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the result of the success/failure determination is the first small hit, the first small hit flag is turned ON, and when the result of the success/failure determination is the second small hit, the second small hit A win flag is turned ON, and when the result of the win/deny determination is the third small win, the third small win flag is turned ON. After executing step S6416, the process proceeds to step S6417.

In step S6417, stop symbol setting processing for a small hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the small win, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the second symbol display section 37a in the current game turn to be the small win. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is obtained. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S6417, the determination process for the second symbol display section ends.

In step S6414, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is not a small hit (S6414: NO), the process proceeds to step S6418.

In step S6418, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for loss, in the current game turn to be a loss, the second symbol display portion 37a is used for setting which stop result is to be displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, the stop result corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c The address information of the data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S6418, the determination process for the second symbol display section ends.

<Processing for setting variation time for second symbol display section>
Next, the process of setting the variation time for the second symbol display section will be described. The process of setting the variation time for the second symbol display section is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second symbol display section (FIG. 135: S6205).

FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the variable time for the second symbol display section. In step S6501, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is "121". In step S6501, if it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not "121" (S6501: NO), the process proceeds to step S6502, and whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "122" determine whether or not When it is determined in step S6502 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST is not "122" (S6502: NO), the process proceeds to step S6503.

In step S6503, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6503 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (S6503: NO), the flow advances to step S6504 to store a value corresponding to 10 min in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. to set. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the second symbol display section is terminated.

In step S6503, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S6503: YES), the process proceeds to step S6505 to determine whether or not the special jackpot flag is ON. In step S6505, when it is determined that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6505: YES), the process proceeds to step S6504 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6505: NO), the process proceeds to step S6506.

Here, in step S6505, when it is determined that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6505: YES), the reason for proceeding to step S6504 is as follows. In a low-frequency support mode, game balls are circulated on the right side of a game board 30 and entered into a second start port 34 to execute a game round for the second start port, and a special big win is won in a big win lottery. becomes. Due to the playability of this gaming machine, it is more advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the left side of the game board 30 during the low-frequency support mode. It is desirable to induce the player to circulate the ball. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, game balls are circulated on the right side of the game board 30, and the game balls are entered into the second start hole 34, thereby executing the game round for the second start hole and winning the jackpot lottery. In the low-frequency support mode, the game balls are circulated on the left side of the game board 30 and the game balls enter the first start hole 33, thereby executing the game round for the first start hole and winning the jackpot lottery. It is desirable to make settings that are advantageous. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, game balls are circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and entered into the second start hole 34 to execute the game round for the second start hole and win the jackpot lottery (special jackpot). In this case, the internal control is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, but the second start is executed by circulating the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 and entering the game ball into the second start port 34. By setting the fluctuation time of the opening game times to 10 minutes, the game action of circulating the game balls on the right side of the game board 30 and entering the game balls into the second start opening 34 during the low frequency support mode does not become advantageous. I'm trying In addition, by setting the effects and sounds on the pattern display device 41 when the transition to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the special jackpot does not change from those in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally throwing a game ball. It may not be distributed to the right side of the game board 30 .

In step S6506, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S6507.

In step S6507, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 8R first type jackpot flag for special 2 or the 16R first type jackpot flag for special 2 is ON, and if any flag is ON (S6507: YES ), and proceeds to step S6508.

In step S6508, the variable time table for big hit stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to acquire the variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step S6508, the process advances to step S6509 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the second symbol display section is terminated.

In step S6507, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination related to this game round is not a big hit (S6507: NO), the process proceeds to step S6510, and in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64 Set a value corresponding to 0.5 sec. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the second symbol display section is terminated.

In step S6501, when it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "121" (S6501: YES), and in step S6502, it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "122" If so (S6502: YES), the process advances to step S6511 to set a value corresponding to 12 seconds in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the second symbol display section is terminated.

<Variation stop processing>
Next, fluctuation stop processing will be described. The fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 128: S5506).

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing. In step S6601, it is determined whether or not the special 1 fluctuating flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the first symbol display section 37a. If it is determined in step S6601 that the special 1 fluctuating flag is ON (S6601: YES), the process proceeds to step S6602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6601 that the special 1 fluctuating flag is not ON (S6601: NO), the process proceeds to step S6619, which will be described later.

In step S6602, it is determined whether or not the pattern variation time in the first pattern display portion 37a has ended. When it is determined in step S6602 that the pattern variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a has ended (S6602: YES), the process proceeds to step S6603, and the symbol variation in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S6604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6602 that the symbol variation time in the first symbol display section 37a has not ended (S6602: NO), the process proceeds to step S6620, which will be described later.

In step S6604, the special 1 fluctuating flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S6605 to determine whether or not the special 1 hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is a big win. In step S6605, when it is determined that the special 1 hit flag is not ON (S6605: NO), the process proceeds to step S6606.

In step S6606, it is determined whether or not the final specific game round flag is ON. In step S6606, when it is determined that the final specific game round flag is ON (S6606: YES), the process proceeds to step S6607 to set the final specific game round end command. The final specific game round end command is for making the sub-side control device recognize that the last game round in the high probability mode (in this embodiment, the 120th game round after shifting to the high probability mode) ends. is a command. The set final specific game round end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6607, the process proceeds to step S6608 to turn off the final specific game round flag. After that, the process advances to step S6609. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6606 that the final specific game round flag is not ON (S6606: NO), the process proceeds to step S6609 without executing steps S6607 and S6608.

In step S6609, it is determined whether or not the value of the first start suspension number RaN is zero. If it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is 0 (S6609: YES), the process advances to step S6610 to set a special 1 customer waiting command. The special 1 customer waiting command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the fluctuation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a has stopped and the value of the first start suspension number RaN has become 0. . The set special 1 customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 127 : step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6610, the process advances to step S6619, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S6609: NO), the process proceeds to step S6619, which will be described later, without executing step S6610.

In step S6605, when it is determined that the special 1 hit flag is ON (S6606: YES), the process proceeds to step S6611, and the special 1 hit flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S6612.

In step S6612, it is determined whether or not the final specific game round flag is ON. In step S6612, when it is determined that the final specific game round flag is ON (S6612: YES), the process proceeds to step S6613, and the final specific game round flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S6614. On the other hand, in step S6612, when it is determined that the final specific game round flag is not ON (S6612: NO), the process proceeds to step S6614 without executing step S6613.

In step S6614, it is determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuating flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the pattern is being variably displayed in the second pattern display section 37b. If it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 fluctuating flag is ON (S6614: YES), the process proceeds to step S6615. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 fluctuating flag is not ON (S6614: NO), the flow advances to step S6637 to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag, after which this fluctuation stopping process ends. .

In step S6615, the variation of the symbol in the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped with the symbol for failure. After that, the flow advances to step S6616 to turn off the special 2 fluctuating flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S6617.

In step S6617, it is determined whether or not the special 2 hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery corresponding to the variation display of the symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b is a big win or a small win. In step S6617, if it is determined that the special 2 hit flag is ON (S6617: YES), the process proceeds to step S6618, the special 2 hit flag is turned OFF, and the special 2 first kind jackpot flag or Of the small hit flags, the ON flag is turned OFF. After that, the flow advances to step S6637 to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag, and then the fluctuation stopping process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S6617, if it is determined that the special 2 hit flag is not ON (S6617: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 without executing step S6618, the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON, and then This fluctuation stopping process is ended.

As described above, in step S6601, when it is determined that the special 1 during fluctuation flag is not ON (S6601: NO), in step S6602, if the fluctuation time of the pattern in the first pattern display section 37a has not ended, If so (S6602: NO), if it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S6609: NO), and if in step S6610 the special 1 customer waiting command is set After that, the process proceeds to step S6619 described below.

In step S6619, it is determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuating flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the pattern is being variably displayed in the second pattern display section 37b. If it is determined in step S6619 that the special 2 fluctuating flag is ON (S6619: YES), the process proceeds to step S6620. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6619 that the special 2 fluctuating flag is not ON (S6619: NO), this fluctuation stopping process is terminated.

In step S6620, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation time in the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. In step S6620, when it is determined that the pattern variation time in the second pattern display portion 37b has ended (S6620: YES), the process proceeds to step S6621, and the pattern variation in the second pattern display portion 37b is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S6622. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6620 that the symbol variation time in the second symbol display portion 37b has not ended (S6620: NO), this variation stop processing is terminated.

In step S6622, the special 2 fluctuating flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S6623 and it is determined whether the hit flag for special 2 is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery corresponding to the variation display of the symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b is a big win. In step S6623, when it determines with the hit flag for special 2 not being ON (S6623:NO), it progresses to step S6624.

In step S6624, it is determined whether or not the final specific game round flag is ON. In step S6624, when it is determined that the final specific game round flag is ON (S6624: YES), the process proceeds to step S6625 to set the final specific game round end command. The final specific game round end command is for making the sub-side control device recognize that the last game round in the high probability mode (in this embodiment, the 120th game round after shifting to the high probability mode) ends. is a command. The set final specific game round end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6625, the process proceeds to step S6626, and the final specific game round flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S6627. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6624 that the final specific game round flag is not ON (S6624: NO), the process proceeds to step S6627 without executing steps S6625 and S6626.

In step S6627, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start suspension number RbN is zero. If it is determined in step S6627 that the value of the second start pending number RbN is 0 (S6627: YES), the process proceeds to step S6628 to set a special 2 customer waiting command. The special 2 customer waiting command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the fluctuation of the pattern in the second pattern display portion 37b has stopped and the value of the second start pending number RbN has become 0. . The set special 2 customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 127 : step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6628, this fluctuation stopping process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6627 that the value of the second start suspension number RbN is not 0 (S6627: NO), this fluctuation stopping process is terminated without executing step S6628.

In step S6623, when it is determined that the special 2 hit flag is ON (S6623: YES), the process proceeds to step S6629, and the special 2 hit flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S6630.

In step S6630, it is determined whether or not the final specific game round flag is ON. In step S6630, when it is determined that the final specific game round flag is ON (S6630: YES), the process proceeds to step S6631, and the final specific game round flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S6632. On the other hand, in step S6630, when it is determined that the final specific game round flag is not ON (S6630: NO), the process proceeds to step S6632 without executing step S6631.

In step S6632, it is determined whether or not the special 1 fluctuating flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the first symbol display section 37a. If it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 fluctuating flag is ON (S6632: YES), the process proceeds to step S6633. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 fluctuating flag is not ON (S6632: NO), the flow advances to step S6637 to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag, and then terminate this fluctuation stop processing. .

In step S6633, the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped with the symbols for failure. After that, the flow advances to step S6634 to turn off the special 1 fluctuating flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S6635.

In step S6635, it is determined whether or not the special 1 hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is a big win. In step S6635, if it is determined that the special 1 hit flag is ON (S6635: YES), the process proceeds to step S6636, the special 1 hit flag is turned OFF, and the special 1 first kind jackpot flag or Among special 1 type 2 jackpot flags, ON flags are turned OFF. After that, the fluctuation stopping process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S6635, if it is determined that the special 1 hit flag is not ON (S6635: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 without executing step S6636, the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON, and then This fluctuation stopping process is ended.

As described in this process, in the fluctuation stop process of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special 2 during fluctuation flag is ON in step S6614 (S6614: YES), the second symbol display unit in step S6615 The variation of the symbols in 37b is stopped at the winning symbols. Also, when it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 fluctuating flag is ON (S6632: YES), in step S6633, the fluctuation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped with the symbols for failure. In other words, when both the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b are performing variable display, one of the two symbol display portions is stopped and displayed before the other. In this case, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round corresponding to the one pattern display portion is a big win or a small win, the fluctuation of the other pattern display portion is stopped with the off pattern. Therefore, there is a case where the lottery result corresponding to the symbol display portion whose symbol variation stops first is given priority. By doing so, the following problems can be solved.

Normally, in the simultaneous variation machine, when both the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b start to vary, the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to either one of the symbol display portions is a jackpot or When it is determined that it is a small win, the other pattern display part is automatically stopped and displayed with a pattern for losing without executing a big win lottery corresponding to the other pattern display part. However, when this process is executed, the following problems arise.

When the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode and the player switches from the game in which the game balls are circulated on the right side of the game board 30 to the game in which the game balls are circulated on the left side of the game board 30, the high frequency support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode. The reserved game times corresponding to the remaining game times for the second start hole after the game ball is entered into the second start hole 34 just before the end of the frequency support mode, even after shifting to the low frequency support mode. executed. The player switches from the game in which the game balls are circulated on the right side of the game board 30 to the game in which the game balls are circulated on the left side of the game board 30, and enters the game balls into the first start port 33. However, if the game round for the second starting port of the reserved game round is executed first and the jackpot or small win is won in the jackpot lottery, the above-described normal simultaneous variation machine processing is executed, the jackpot lottery for the game round for the first start opening is not executed. At this time, since the support mode has already shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the variation time of the game cycle for the second starting port is 10 minutes. As a result, for 10 minutes until the second symbol display portion 37b stops with the symbol for the big win or the small win, the player enters the game ball into the first start hole 33 and starts the game round for the first start hole. Even if it is executed, the jackpot lottery itself will not be executed. That is, the player is substantially forced to suspend the game for 10 minutes until the second symbol display portion 37b stops with the symbol for the big win or the small win, which is a great disadvantage to the player. will give

In this respect, as in the present embodiment, when the process of prioritizing the lottery result corresponding to the symbol display portion in which the variation of the symbols stops first is adopted, the game round for the second starting port of the pending game round is executed. Even if a big win or a small win is won in the big win lottery and the variation time of the second symbol display part 37b is set to 10 minutes, the game ball enters the first start port 33 after that. When the ball is played, the jackpot lottery is executed as the game round for the first starting port. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the fluctuation of the pattern of the first pattern display portion 37a stops earlier than the fluctuation of the pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b, the first start The lottery result of the mouth game round is prioritized, the pattern of the first pattern display portion 37a is stopped with the pattern for big winning, and at the same time, the pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b is stopped with the pattern for winning. That is, the second symbol display portion 37b stops the symbols earlier than the initially set variation time of 10 minutes. Therefore, the game is interrupted until the second symbol display portion 37b stops with the symbol for the big win or the small win (10 minutes), as in the case of adopting the normal simultaneous variation machine processing. It is possible to avoid the problem of being forced to

For this reason, in the fluctuation stop processing in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special 2 fluctuation flag is ON in step S6614 (S6614: YES), in step S6615 the second symbol display unit 37b When it is determined that the fluctuation flag for special 1 is ON in step S6632, the fluctuation in the pattern in the first pattern display section 37a is stopped in step S6633. It adopts a process to stop at the design for out.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 127: S5406).

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S6701, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is a flag that is referenced to determine whether or not it is the ending period, and is turned ON at the start of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S6701 that the ending period flag is not ON (S6701: NO), the process advances to step S6702 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is a flag that is referred to for determining whether or not it is the opening/closing process period, and is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing process period and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing process period. The opening/closing process period is a period for executing the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. FIG.

If it is determined in step S6702 that the open/close processing period flag is not ON (S6702: NO), the process advances to step S6703 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is a flag that is referred to for determining whether or not it is the opening period, and is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S6703 that the opening period flag is not ON (S6703: NO), the flow advances to step S6704 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step S6704, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S6704: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6704 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S6704: YES), the process proceeds to step S6705.

In step S6705, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6.0 sec) or "0" (ie, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To indicating the remaining time of the opening period. The timer counter area To is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area To is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S6705, the process advances to step S6706.

In step S6706, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). This opening command includes information on the set opening time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening time based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step S6706, the process advances to step S6707 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S6703 that the opening period flag is ON (S6703: YES), the process proceeds to step S6708.

In step S6708, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area To is "0". In step S6708, when it is determined that the opening period has not ended (S6708: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6708 that the opening period has ended (S6708: YES), the process advances to step S6709 to turn off the opening period flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step S6710.

In step S6710, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S6710, the process advances to step S6711.

In step S6711, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R first class jackpot flag, special 1 8R second class jackpot flag, special 2 16R first class jackpot flag, special 2 8R first 1 type big hit flag) and small hit flags (first small hit flag, second small hit flag, third small hit flag) are checked, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM 64 is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened. Details of the round number setting process will be described later. After executing S6711, the process proceeds to step S6712.

In step S6712, an open/close process command is set. The set open/close process command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). This opening/closing process command includes information on the number of rounds to be executed during the current opening/closing process period. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the number of rounds based on the received opening/closing processing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S6712, the process advances to step S6713.

In step S6713, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S6702, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S6702: YES), the process proceeds to step S6714 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is closed, the variable prize winning driving section 36c is brought into a driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more. This causes the opening/closing door 36b to be opened. In addition, when the opening/closing door 36b is open, variable winning is possible under the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the opening/closing door 36b or that the game balls of the opening limit number have entered. The drive portion 36c is stopped and the open/close door 36b is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S6714, the process advances to step S6715.

In step S6715, a V winning opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of opening the opening/closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 once in a predetermined round is executed. The details of the V winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S6715, the process advances to step S6716.

In step S6716, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S6716: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S6716: YES), the process advances to step S6717 to turn off the opening/closing processing period flag. After executing step S6717, the process advances to step S6718.

In step S6718, round display end processing is executed. In the round display termination process, the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is controlled so as to turn off. After executing step S6718, the process advances to step S6719.

In step S6719, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6.0 sec) or "0" (ie, 0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te indicating the remaining time of the ending period. The timer counter area Te is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area Te is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S6719, the process advances to step S6720.

In step S6720, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). This ending command includes information on the set ending time. The sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing processing period based on the received ending command, determines the content of the effect corresponding to the ending time, and executes the effect of the determined content. to control various devices. After executing step S6720, the process advances to step S6721.

In step S6721, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S6701 that the ending period flag is ON (S6701: YES), the process proceeds to step S6722.

In step S6722, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S6719) is "0". In step S6722, when it is determined that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is not "0" (S6722: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6722 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is "0" (S6722: YES), the process proceeds to step S6723.

In step S6723, the ending period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S6724 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S6725 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the ending period ends. The details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S6725, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Opening time setting processing>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6705).

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step S6801, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R first class jackpot flag, special 1 8R second class jackpot flag, special 2 8R first class jackpot flag, special 2 16R first 1 type jackpot flag) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

In step S6801, when it is determined that the trigger of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot (S6801: YES), the process proceeds to step S6802, and "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. to set. After that, the opening time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6801 that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a jackpot (S6801: YES), that is, if the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small hit, The process advances to step S6803.

In step S6803, "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. That is, when the transition to the opening and closing execution mode is performed with the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is small. In the case of winning, the opening effect is not actually performed. After executing step S6803, this opening time setting process is ended.

<Round number setting process>
Next, the round number setting process will be described. The round number setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6711).

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the round number setting process. In step S6901, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R first class jackpot flag, special 1 8R second class jackpot flag, special 2 8R first class jackpot flag, special 2 16R first 1 type jackpot flag) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

In step S6901, if it is determined that the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (S6901: YES), the process proceeds to step S6902, and the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is the 16R first type. It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special 2 16R first type jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S6902, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 16R first type jackpot (S6902: YES), the process proceeds to step S6903, and "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. set. After that, the round number setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S6902, if it is determined that the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is not the 16R first class jackpot (S6902: NO), that is, the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is the 8R first If it is a seed jackpot or an 8R second-class jackpot, the process advances to step S6904 to set "8" in the first round counter area RC1. After that, the round number setting process is terminated.

In step S6901, if it is determined that the timing of transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (S6901: YES), that is, the opening and closing execution mode of this time triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 , and when the lottery result of the big winning lottery executed with the entry of the ball as a trigger is a small winning, the process proceeds to step S6905.

In step S6905, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the first small win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first small hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. In step S6905, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is the first small win (S6905: YES), the process proceeds to step S6906, and "1" is set in the first round counter area RC1. do. After that, the round number setting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S6905, when it is determined that the timing of the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is not the first small hit (S6905: NO), the process proceeds to step S6907.

In step S6907, it is determined whether or not the second small win is the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second small hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. In step S6907, when it is determined that the second small win is the trigger for the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time (S6907: YES), the process proceeds to step S6908, and "6" is set in the first round counter area RC1. do. After that, the round number setting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S6907, if it is determined that the opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode this time is not the second small hit (S6907: NO), that is, the opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode this time is the third small hit If so, the process advances to step S6909 to set "8" in the first round counter area RC1. After that, the round number setting process is terminated.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6714).

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S7001, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. In step S7001, when it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a is not open (S7001: NO), the process proceeds to step S7002, and the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". Determine whether or not there is When it is determined in step S7002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S7002: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S7002: NO), the process proceeds to step S7003.

In step S7003, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining closing time of the opening/closing door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a. The value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S7003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S7003: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S7003, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S7003: YES), the process proceeds to step S7004, and the opening/closing door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a is opened. In order to do so, the variable winning driving section 36c is brought into a driving state. After that, the process proceeds to step S7005.

In step S7005, a ball entry counter setting process is executed. In the ball entry counter setting process, a value that permits entry of a game ball during one opening of the big winning opening 36a (during one round) is set in the ball entry counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. set. The details of the incoming ball counter setting process will be described later. After executing step S7005, the process advances to step S7006.

In step S7006, the opening time limit setting process for the big winning opening is executed. In the processing for setting the opening limit time for the big winning opening, the opening limit time, which is the limit of one opening time of the open/close door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a, is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the open limit time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining open time limit of the opening/closing door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a. As described above, the value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. The details of the processing for setting the maximum opening time for the big winning opening will be described later. After executing step S7006, the process proceeds to step S7007.

In step S7007, a command to open the big winning opening is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The command for opening the big prize gate is used to make the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the open/close door 36b provided in the big prize gate 36a has started to open. It is a command including information, and is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output processing ( FIG. 127 : step S5402) of normal processing. The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the opening/closing door 36b for one round has started based on the received command to open the large winning opening, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are displayed on the opening/closing door. 36b is updated to correspond to the start of opening. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the command to open the big winning opening to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the opening/closing door 36b for one round has started based on the received command to open the opening/closing door, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 as the opening of the opening/closing door 36b. is updated to correspond to the start of the

In step S7001, when it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b provided in the large winning opening 36a is open (step S7001: YES), the process proceeds to step S7008, and whether or not the opening limit time for the large winning opening has passed. determine whether Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining open time limit of the opening/closing door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S7008 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S7008: NO), the process proceeds to step S7009.

In step S7009, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a. In step S7009, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered (S7009: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7009 that a game ball has entered (S7009: YES), the process proceeds to step S7010, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the entered ball counter area PC. After that, the process proceeds to step S7011.

In step S7011, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S7011 that the value of the entering ball counter area PC is not "0" (S7011: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S7008 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S7008: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the incoming ball counter area PC is "0" in step S7011 (S7011: YES), the process proceeds to step S7012 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the opening/closing door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a, the variable winning driving section 36c is brought into a non-driving state. After that, the process proceeds to step S7013.

In step S7013, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S7014 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S7014 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S7014: YES), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7014 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S7014: NO), the process proceeds to step S7015.

In step S7015, a closing time setting process for the big winning opening is executed. The closing time setting process for the big winning opening is a process for setting the closing time of the big winning opening 36a. Specifically, a value corresponding to the closing time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining closing time of the opening/closing door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot, "1000" (2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small win, "30" (that is, 0.06 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After executing step S7015, the process proceeds to step S7016.

In step S7016, a large winning opening closing command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The command for closing the big prize winning opening is information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the open/close door 36b provided in the big winning prize opening 36a has been opened. , and is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output processing ( FIG. 127 : step S5402) of the normal processing. The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the opening/closing door 36b for one round has been completed based on the received command to close the large winning opening, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to the opening/closing door 36b. is updated to the content corresponding to the completion of the release of In addition, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned large prize winning opening closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the opening/closing door 36b for one round has ended based on the received command to close the opening/closing door, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 when the opening of the opening/closing door 36b is completed. Update to the content corresponding to the finished.

<Incoming ball counter setting process>
Next, the entering ball counter setting process will be described. The entering ball counter setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 143: S7005).

FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing incoming ball counter setting processing. In step S7101, "10" is set in the incoming ball counter area PC. After that, the entering ball counter setting process is terminated.

<Processing for setting the maximum opening time for the big winning opening>
Next, the processing for setting the opening limit time for the big winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening time limit setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the large winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 143: S7006).

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the opening time limit setting process for the big winning opening. In step S7201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R first class jackpot flag, special 1 8R second class jackpot flag, special 2 8R first class jackpot flag, special 2 16R first 1 type jackpot flag) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

In step S7201, if it is determined that the trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot (S7201: YES), the process proceeds to step S7202, and "15000" (that is, 30.00) is displayed in the first timer counter area T1. 0 sec). After that, the process for setting the opening limit time for the big winning opening is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7201 that the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is not a big win (S7201: NO), the process proceeds to step S7203, and the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is the first. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit. Specifically, when the first small hit flag is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the first small win.

In step S7203, if it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is the first small win (S7203: YES), the process proceeds to step S7204, and "800" (that is, , 1.6 sec). After that, the process for setting the opening limit time for the big winning opening is ended. On the other hand, in step S7203, if it is determined that the opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode this time is not the first small hit (S7203: NO), that is, the opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode this time is the second small hit Or if it is the third small hit, the process proceeds to step S7205, and "30" (that is, 0.06 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After that, the process for setting the opening limit time for the big winning opening is ended.

<V winning opening opening/closing process>
Next, the V winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The V winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6715).

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the V winning opening opening/closing process. In step S7301, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R first class jackpot flag, special 1 8R second class jackpot flag, special 2 8R first class jackpot flag, special 2 16R first 1 type jackpot flag) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

In step S7301, if it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (S7301: NO), that is, if the timing of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode this time is a small hit, V Since the opening/closing door 48a provided in the winning opening 48 is not opened, this V winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot (S7301: YES), the process proceeds to step S7302.

In step S7302, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "3". If it is determined in step S7302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "3" (S7302: YES), the process proceeds to step S7303.

In step S7303, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the opening/closing door driving section 48b. In step S7303, if it is determined that the opening/closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is not open (S7301: NO), the process proceeds to step S7304, and the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "4". Determine whether or not there is If it is determined in step S7304 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "4" (S7304: NO), this V winning opening opening/closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7304 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "4" (S7304: YES), the process proceeds to step S7305.

In step S7305, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening completed flag stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The V winning opening open flag is a flag for recognizing whether or not the opening/closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 has already been opened in the current opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening/closing door 48a is configured to be opened only once in one opening/closing execution mode. In step S7305, if it is determined that the V winning opening completed flag is not ON (S7305: NO), the process proceeds to step S7306, and opening/closing door driving is performed to open the opening/closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48. Let the part 48b be in a driving state. After that, the process proceeds to step S7307. On the other hand, in step S7305, when it is determined that the V winning opening completed flag is ON (S7305: YES), this V winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S7307, V winning opening opening limit time setting processing is executed. In the opening limit time setting process for the V winning opening 48, the opening limit time, which is the time limit for one opening of the open/close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48, is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the open limit time is set in the third timer counter area T3. In this case, the third timer counter area T3 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining open time limit of the opening/closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48. FIG. The value set in the third timer counter area T3 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. The details of the opening limit time setting process for the V winning opening will be described later. After executing step S7307, the process advances to step S7308.

In step S7308, a V winning opening command is set. After that, the present V winning opening opening/closing process is ended. In addition, the V winning opening open command is for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the open/close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 has started to open. It is a command including information, and is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output processing ( FIG. 127 : step S5402) of normal processing. The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the opening/closing door 48a has started based on the received V winning opening opening command, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed when the opening of the opening/closing door 48a has started. Update to the content corresponding to being started. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned V winning mouth open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 100 recognizes that opening of the opening/closing door 48a has started based on the received V winning opening opening command, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 when the opening of the opening/closing door 48a has started. Update to correspond to that.

In step S7303, if it is determined that the opening and closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is open (step S7303: YES), the process proceeds to step S7309, whether the game ball entered the V winning opening 48 Whether or not it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V winning opening 48 . In step S7309, when it is determined that the game ball has entered (S7309: YES), the process proceeds to step S7310, and whether the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. determine whether or not

In step S7310, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (S7310: NO), the process advances to step S7311 to turn on the V winning flag, and to step S7312 to set the V winning command. The V winning command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 48, and is used in normal processing. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has entered the V winning port 48 based on the received V winning command, and transmits the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to the V winning port 48. Update to the contents corresponding to the ball entering the ball. After executing step S7312, the process proceeds to step S7313. On the other hand, in step S7309, if it is determined that no game ball has entered (S7309: NO), and in step S7310, if it is determined that the V prize flag is ON (S7310: YES) , the process proceeds to step S7313 without executing steps S7311 and S7312.

In step S7313, it is determined whether or not the opening limit time for the V winning opening has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". When it is determined in step S7313 that the value of the third timer counter area T3 is not "0" (S7313: NO), this V winning opening opening/closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7313 that the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0" (S7313: YES), the process proceeds to step S7314.

In step S7314, a V winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the V winning opening 48, the open/close door driving section 48b is brought into a non-driving state. After that, the process proceeds to step S7315, and the V winning mouth open flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S7316.

In step S7316, a V winning opening closing command is set. After that, the present V winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The V winning opening closing command is information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the open/close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 has finished opening. , and is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output processing ( FIG. 127 : step S5402) of the normal processing. The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the opening/closing door 48a is completed based on the received V prize opening closing command, and displays the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 when the opening of the opening/closing door 48a is completed. Update to match what you have done. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the V winning hole closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the opening/closing door 48a has been completed based on the received V winning opening closing command, and changes the content of the effect in the pattern display device 41 to the fact that the opening of the opening/closing door 48a has been completed. Update to the corresponding content.

If it is determined in step S7302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "3" (S7302: YES), the process advances to step S7317 to determine whether or not the V winning opening completed flag is ON. do. In step S7317, when it is determined that the V winning opening completed flag is ON (S7317: YES), the process proceeds to step S7318, and the V winning opening completed flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, in step S7317, when it is determined that the V winning opening completed flag is not ON (S7317: NO), this V winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing step S7318.

<Processing for setting the opening limit time for the V winning port>
Next, the opening limit time setting process for the V winning opening will be described. The V winning opening opening time limit setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the V winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 146: S7307).

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the opening limit time setting process for the V winning opening. In step S7401, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the first type jackpot. Specifically, if any of the 8R first-class jackpot flag for special 1, the 8R first-class jackpot flag for special 2, and the 16R first-class jackpot flag for special 2 is ON, the opening and closing execution mode of this time It is determined that the opportunity to shift to is the first type jackpot.

In step S7401, if it is determined that the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is the first type jackpot (S7401: YES), the process proceeds to step S7402, and "5000" (that is, , 10.0 sec). After that, this processing for setting the opening time limit for the V winning opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step S7401, if it is determined that the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is not the first type jackpot (S7401: NO), that is, the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is the second jackpot. If so, the process advances to step S7403 to set "3" (that is, 0.006 sec) in the third timer counter area T3. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the trigger for the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the second type jackpot, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48. there is After executing step S7403, this V winning opening opening limit time setting process is ended.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6719).

FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the ending time setting process. In step S7501, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R first class jackpot flag, special 1 8R second class jackpot flag, special 2 8R first class jackpot flag, special 2 16R first 1 type jackpot flag) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

In step S7501, when it is determined that the trigger of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot (S7501: YES), the process proceeds to step S7502, and "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. to set. After that, the ending time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7501 that the trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is not a big hit (S7501: NO), that is, if the trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is a small hit, The process advances to step S7503.

In step S7503, "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. That is, when the transition to the opening and closing execution mode is performed with the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is small. In the case of winning, the ending effect is not actually performed. After executing step S7503, the ending time setting process is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6725).

FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S7601, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R first class jackpot flag, special 1 8R second class jackpot flag, special 2 8R first class jackpot flag, special 2 16R first 1 type jackpot flag) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

In step S7601, when it is determined that the timing of shifting to the open/close execution mode this time is a jackpot (S7601: YES), the process proceeds to step S7602 to determine whether or not the V prize flag is ON. If it is determined in step S7602 that the V winning flag is ON (S7602: YES), the process proceeds to step S7603.

In step S7603, the 8R first class jackpot flag for special 1, the 8R second class jackpot flag for special 1, the 8R first class jackpot flag for special 2, and the 16R first class jackpot flag for special 2 are ON. flag is turned off. After executing step S7603, the process advances to step S7604.

At step S7604, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step S7604, the process advances to step S7605.

In step S7605, the high-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The high-probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win/fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step S7605, the process advances to step S7606.

In step S7606, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered. After that, the process proceeds to step S7607.

In step S7607, the number-of-games count flag for ST is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S7608, and "0" is set to the number-of-games counter PNC1 for ST. After that, the process advances to step S7609 to turn off the V winning flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S7610.

In step S7610, it is determined whether or not the special jackpot flag is ON. In step S7610, when it is determined that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S7610: NO), the process advances to step S7611 to set the special 2 main display command as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Upon receiving the special 2 main display command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the main display area MA of the pattern display device 41 to display the variable display of the pattern based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, and the first start A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 so as to cause the first sub-display area SA1 of the pattern display device 41 to display the variable display of the pattern based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 33 . After executing step S7611, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special jackpot flag is ON in step S7610 (S7610: YES), the transition process at the end of this ending period is terminated without executing step S7611.

In step S7602, if it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (S7602: NO), proceed to step S7612, special 1 8R first class jackpot flag, special 1 8R second class jackpot flag, special 2 Of the 8R first-class jackpot flag for special 2 and the 16R first-class jackpot flag for special 2, the ON flag is turned OFF. After executing step S7612, the process advances to step S7613.

In step S7613, if the high-probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the high-probability mode flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. After executing step S7613, the process advances to step S7614.

In step S7614, the low-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The low-probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win/fail lottery mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step S7614, the process advances to step S7615.

In step S7615, if the high-frequency support mode flag is ON, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the low-frequency support mode is entered. After that, the process proceeds to step S7616.

In step S7616, the electric support game count flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S7617, and "0" is set to the power support game number counter PNC2. After that, the process proceeds to step S7610.

In step S7601, when it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (S7601: NO), that is, when the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small hit, step Proceeding to S7618, among the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, and the third small hit flag, the ON flag is turned OFF. After step S7618 is executed, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 127: S5407).

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S7701, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned ON when starting the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing process ends. If it is determined in step S7701 that the supported flag is not ON (S7701: NO), the process proceeds to step S7702.

In step S7702, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric role product open lottery for whether or not to open the electric role product 34a becomes open state winning. If it is determined in step S7702 that the support winning flag is not ON (S7702: NO), the process proceeds to step S7703.

In step S7703, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S7703 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7703: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S7703: YES), the process proceeds to step S7704.

In step S7704, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step S7704 that it is time to end the variable display (S7704: YES), the flow advances to step S7705 to set off display, and then ends the electronic role support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7704 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S7704: NO), the process proceeds to step S7706.

In step S7706, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S7706 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S7706: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7706 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S7706: YES), the process proceeds to step S7707.

In step S7707, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S7708 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S7707 (S7707: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S7708 (S7708: YES), the process advances to step S7709 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 463, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory open lottery is won with a probability of 232/233. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S7710.

In step S7710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S7709 is support winning. In step S7710, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S7710: YES), the process proceeds to step S7711, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S7712. On the other hand, in step S7710, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S7710: NO), the process proceeds to step S7712 without executing the processing of step S7711.

In step S7712, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S7712 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S7712: YES), the process proceeds to step S7713. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7712 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S7712: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated.

In step S7713, it is determined whether or not the value of the power support game number counter PNC2 is "100". In step S7713, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC2 for electric support is not "100" (S7713: NO), the processing for electric support is directly terminated. On the other hand, in step S7713, if it is determined that the value of the electrical support game number counter PNC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S7714, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF, and the special jackpot flag is ON. In some cases, the special jackpot flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S7715.

In step S7715, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S7715 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output processing of normal processing (FIG. 127: step S5402). Upon receiving the low-frequency support command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S7707 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S7707: YES), or if it is determined in step S7708 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S7708: NO), the process proceeds to step S7716, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. That is, in the present embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S7717.

In step S7717, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S7716 is support winning. In step S7717, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S7717: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7717 that the support winning is determined (S7717: YES), the process advances to step S7718 to turn on the support winning flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S7702 that the support winning flag is ON (S7702: YES), the process advances to step S7719 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S7719, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7719: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S7719: YES), the process proceeds to step S7720.

In step S7720, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the winning display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S7721 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S7701, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (S7701: YES), the process advances to step S7722 to execute electric opening/closing processing for opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening and closing process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing process will be described. The electrical opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electrical support process (FIG. 150: S7722).

FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing process. In step S7801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 44b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S7801: YES), the process proceeds to step S7802.

In step S7802, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S7802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7802: NO), this electrical opening/closing process is terminated. In other words, if the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S7802, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S7802: YES), the process proceeds to step S7803 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S7803, the process advances to step S7804.

In step S7804, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the flow advances to step S7805 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S7805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S7805: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S7805: YES), the process advances to step S7806 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S7801, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S7801: NO), the process proceeds to step S7807 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S7807 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7807: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7807 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S7807: YES), the process advances to step S7808 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S7809.

In step S7809, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S7809: NO), the process advances to step S7810 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S7810 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S7810: YES), the process advances to step S7811 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7809 that the open/close execution mode is set (S7809: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S7810 (S7810: NO), the process proceeds to step S7812, and the second "700" (that is, 1.4 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

<Game ball launch control processing>
Next, game ball launch control processing will be described. The game ball launch control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 127: S5408).

FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing game ball launch control processing. In step S7901, it is determined whether the touch sensor 25a is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the operating handle 25 . If it is determined in step S7901 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S7901: YES), the process proceeds to step S7902. On the other hand, in step S7901, when it is determined that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S7901: NO), this game ball launch control process is terminated.

In step S7902, it is determined whether or not the game ball shooting button 26 is ON. When it is determined in step S7902 that the game ball launch button 26 is not ON (S7902: NO), the process proceeds to step S7903.

In step S7903, it is determined whether or not the operating handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 25 is zero. In step S7903, when it is determined that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S7903: YES), this game ball launch control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S7903 that the operating handle 25 is not at the origin position (S7903: NO), the process proceeds to step S7904.

In step S7904, it is determined whether or not the wait button 25b is ON. In step S7904, when it is determined that the wait button is ON (S7904: YES), this game ball launch control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7904 that the wait button is not ON (S7904: NO), the process proceeds to step S7905.

In step S7905, a control signal is transmitted to the shooting control device 80 so as to shoot a game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the amount of displacement (amount of rotation operation) of the operating handle 25. FIG. The launch control device 80 launches the game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main side MPU 62 . After executing step S7905, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

In step S7902, when it is determined that the game ball launch button 26 is ON (S7902: YES), the process proceeds to step S7906. In step S7906, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to shoot the game ball with the shooting intensity for right hitting. In this embodiment, a control signal is transmitted to the shooting control device 80 so as to shoot the game ball with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. The launch control device 80 launches the game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main side MPU 62 . After that, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

K6. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 153 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 and an RTC 96 are mounted on a sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device in which a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit and the like are incorporated.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) outputs date information and time information. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The MPU 92 acquires the date information and the time information output from the RTC 96, and executes the RTC effect, which is the effect based on the acquired date information and time information. In this embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition, and if it determines that they match, the RTC effect is started. Start processing for execution. The RTC effect of the present embodiment is composed of a 300-second RTC effect video and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect video, and is executed at 00 minutes past the hour.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

K7. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (4 msec in this embodiment). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S8001, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S8001, the process proceeds to step S8002.

In step S8002, display mode switching processing is executed. In the display mode switching process, the change in the pattern based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is displayed in the main display area MA, and the change in the pattern based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. The display mode displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 (hereinafter also referred to as the special 1 main display mode) and the variation of the symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are displayed in the main display area MA. At the same time, a process for switching between the display mode (hereinafter also referred to as the special 2 main display mode) in which the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 is executed. do. The details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step S8002, the process proceeds to step S8003.

In step S8003, special 1 game round effect processing is executed. The special 1 game round effect processing is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game round based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 . The details of the special 1 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step S8003, the process proceeds to step S8004.

In step S8004, special 2 game round effect processing is executed. The special 2 game round effect processing is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game round based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34 . The details of the special 2 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step S8004, the process proceeds to step S8005.

In step S8005, standby processing for causing the display control apparatus 100 to start displaying a demonstration video (main demonstration video) and sub-demonstration videos is executed. Details of the standby process will be described later. After executing step S8005, the process proceeds to step S8006.

In step S8006, RTC effect processing is executed. In the RTC effect processing, processing relating to the RTC effect is executed. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described below. After executing step S8006, the process proceeds to step S8007.

In step S8007, result display processing is executed. In the result display process, a process for displaying a result screen is executed when 120 game rounds are completed without winning a big win in the big win lottery in the high probability mode. The details of the result display processing will be described later. After executing step S8007, the process proceeds to step S8008.

In step S8008, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the various processes of steps S8002 to S8007. After executing step S8008, the process proceeds to step S8009.

In step S8009, audio output control processing for controlling audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the various processes of steps S8002 to S8007. After executing step S8009, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Display Mode Switching Processing>
Next, display mode switching processing will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 154: S8002).

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. In step S8101, it is determined whether or not a special 2 main display command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8101 that the special 2 main display command has been received (S8101: YES), the process advances to step S8102 to display the special 2 main display stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94. Turn on the flag. The special 2 main display flag displays, in the main display area MA, the variation in the pattern based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the variation in the pattern based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 (special 2 main display mode). After executing step S8102, the process advances to step S8103.

In step S<b>8103 , a special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The special 2 main display command is a command for instructing the display control device 100 to switch from the special 1 main display mode to the special 2 main display mode. The display control device 100 that has received the Special 2 main display command executes processing for switching from the Special 1 main display mode to the Special 2 main display mode. After executing step S8103, the process proceeds to step S8104. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8101 that the special 2 main display command has not been received (S8101: NO), the process proceeds to step S8104 without executing steps S8102 and S8103.

In step S8104, it is determined whether or not the final specific game round end command has been received from the main side MPU62. In step S8104, when it is determined that the final specific game round end command is received (S8104: YES), the process proceeds to step S8105, and the special 2 main display flag is turned OFF. After executing step S8105, the process advances to step S8106.

In step S<b>8106 , a special 1 main display command A is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The special 1 main display command A is a command for instructing the display control device 100 to switch from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode via the display of the result image. The display control device 100 that has received the Special 1 main display command A executes processing for switching from the Special 2 main display mode to the Special 1 main display mode via display of the result image. After executing step S8106, the process advances to step S8107. On the other hand, in step S8104, when it is determined that the final specific game round end command has not been received (S8104: NO), the process proceeds to step S8107 without executing steps S8105 and S8106.

In step S8107, it is determined whether or not a low-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S8107 that the low-frequency support command has been received (S8107: YES), the process advances to step S8108 to turn off the special 2 main display flag. After executing step S8108, the process proceeds to step S8109.

In step S<b>8109 , a special 1 main display command B is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The special 1 main display command B instructs the display control device 100 to switch from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode after the pattern variation in the 100th game cycle after the start of the high frequency support mode is completed. This is a command to give instructions. The display control device 100 that has received the special 1 main display command B switches from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode after the pattern variation in the 100th game cycle after the start of the high-frequency support mode is completed. process for After executing step S8109, the present display mode switching process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8107 that the low-frequency support command has not been received (S8107: NO), this display mode switching process ends without executing steps S8108 and S8109.

<Special 1 game round effect processing>
Next, the special 1 game round effect processing will be described. The special 1 game round effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 154: S8003).

FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing the special 1 game round effect processing. The special 1 game round effect processing is for setting the contents of the effect in the game round which is executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 when the special 1 variation command is received. processing. Specific processing of the special 1 game round effect processing will be described below.

In step S8201, it is determined whether or not a special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S8201, if it is determined that the special 1 variation command has not been received (S8201: NO), without executing the processing of steps S8202 to S8210 described below, for special 1 game round production End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8201 that the special 1 variation command has been received (S8201: YES), the process proceeds to step S8202.

In step S8202, the special 1 variation command received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the information of the fluctuation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step S8203.

In step S8203, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8203 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8203: NO), the process advances to step S8204 to execute the effect pattern setting process for the main display area. In the effect pattern setting processing for the main display area, the content of the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect to be displayed in the main display area MA is set based on the information read in step S8202. After that, the process proceeds to step S8206. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8203 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8203: YES), the process advances to step S8205 to execute the setting processing of the effect pattern for the sub display area. In the effect pattern setting process for the sub-display area, the content of the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect to be displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 is set based on the information read in step S8202. After that, the process proceeds to step S8206.

In step S8206, the process of setting the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal pattern setting processing, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game cycle is a 16R first-class jackpot, an 8R first-class jackpot, or an 8R second-class jackpot, an activated line L (L1 or L2) is selected. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as the current liquid crystal symbol information. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R first-class jackpot or an 8R first-class jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols. , the same even symbol combination can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R first class jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 8R second type jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

When the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a loss, the presence or absence of the occurrence of ready-to-win is determined from the contents of the variation command for special 1.例文帳に追加When it is determined that it corresponds to the ready-to-win occurrence, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2) does not materialize, and the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2). is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2) is not established, and on the effective line L (L1 or L2) Information corresponding to the stop result in which the ready-to-win pattern combination is not established is set as the current liquid crystal pattern information. After executing step S8206, the process proceeds to step S8207.

In step S8207, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the special 1 variation command received this time, and information on the variation time and information on the liquid crystal pattern specified in step S8206. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S8207, the process proceeds to step S8208.

In step S8208, the information of the effect pattern set in the current game round, the pattern for the stop liquid crystal, and the variable display pattern is set in the special 1 game round effect command. After that, the process advances to step S8209 to transmit the special 1 game round effect command to the display control device 100. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received special 1 game cycle effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S8209, the process advances to step S8210.

In step S8210, a pending information update process is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated so that the first pending number stored in the first pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S8210, the special 1 game round effect processing is terminated.

<Special 2 game round effect processing>
Next, the special 2 game round effect processing will be described. The special 2 game round effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8004).

FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the special 2 game round effect processing. The special 2 game round effect processing is for setting the contents of the effect in the game round which is executed when the game ball enters the second start port 34 when the special 2 variation command is received. processing. Specific processing of the special 2 game round effect processing will be described below.

In step S8301, it is determined whether or not a special 2 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S8301, if it is determined that the special 2 variation command has not been received (S8301: NO), without executing the processing of steps S8302 to S8310 described below, for special 2 game round production End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8301 that the special 2 variation command has been received (S8301: YES), the process proceeds to step S8302.

In step S8302, the special 2 variation command received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence or absence of the small hit, the type of the small hit, and the information on the fluctuation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step S8303.

In step S8303, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8303 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8303: YES), the process advances to step S8304 to execute processing for setting an effect pattern for the main display area. In the effect pattern setting process for the main display area, the content of the announcement effect to be displayed in the main display area MA is set based on the information read in step S8302. After that, the process proceeds to step S8306. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8303 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8303: NO), the process advances to step S8305 to execute the setting processing of the effect pattern for the sub display area. In the effect pattern setting process for the sub-display area, the content of the announcement effect to be displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 is set based on the information read in step S8302. After that, the process proceeds to step S8306.

In step S8306, a liquid crystal pattern setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal pattern setting processing, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game cycle is a 16R first-class jackpot, an 8R first-class jackpot, or an 8R second-class jackpot, an activated line L (L1 or L2) is selected. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as the current liquid crystal symbol information. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R type 1 jackpot or an 8R variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, Identical even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R first class jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 8R second type jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

When the result of the big win lottery for the current game round is a loss, the presence or absence of a small win is determined from the contents of the variation command for special 2.例文帳に追加When it is determined that it corresponds to a small hit, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2) does not hold, and a predetermined number on the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is established is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to a small win, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2) does not materialize is used as the current liquid crystal symbol information. set. After executing step S8306, the process advances to step S8307.

In step S8307, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the special 2 variation command received this time, and information on the variation time and information on the liquid crystal pattern specified in step S8306. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S8307, the process proceeds to step S8308.

In step S8308, the information of the effect pattern, the pattern for the stop liquid crystal, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the special 2 game round effect command. After that, the process advances to step S8309 to transmit the special 2 game round effect command to the display control device 100. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes a process of causing the pattern display device 41 to display the effect contents corresponding to the received special 2 game cycle effect command. After executing step S8309, the process advances to step S8310.

In step S8310, a hold information update process is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated so that the second pending number stored in the second pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S8310, the special 2 game round effect processing is terminated.

<Standby processing>
Next, standby processing will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 154: S8005).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing standby processing. The standby process is a process for causing the display control device 100 to start displaying a demonstration video (main demonstration video) or a sub-demonstration video when a special 1 customer waiting command or special 2 customer waiting command is received. Specific processing of the standby processing will be described below.

In step S8401, special 1 transfer preparation processing is executed. The transition preparation process for Special 1 is a process of executing preparations for starting a demonstration movie (main demonstration movie) or a sub-demonstration movie when a special 1 customer waiting command is received. The details of the transition preparation process for Special 1 will be described later. After executing step S8401, the process proceeds to step S8402.

In step S8402, a transition preparation process for Special 2 is executed. The transition preparation process for Special 2 is a process of executing preparations for starting a demonstration movie (main demonstration movie) or a sub-demonstration movie when a special 2 customer waiting command is received. The details of the transition preparation process for Special 2 will be described later. After executing step S8402, the process proceeds to step S8403.

In step S8403, main demo shift processing is executed. The main demo transition processing is processing for displaying a demonstration moving image (main demonstration moving image) in the main display area MA. The details of the main demo transition processing will be described later. After executing step S8403, the process proceeds to step S8404.

In step S8404, sub-demonstration transition processing is executed. The sub-demonstration transition process is a process for displaying a sub-demonstration moving image in the first sub-display area SA1. The details of the sub demo transfer processing will be described later. After executing step S8404, the process advances to step S8405.

In step S8405, return processing is executed. The return process is a process for ending the demonstration video (main demonstration video) or the sub-demonstration video and returning to the normal state when the special 1 variation command or the special 2 variation command is received. Details of the return processing will be described later. After executing step S8405, this standby process ends.

<Transition preparation processing for Special 1>
Next, the transition preparation processing for Special 1 will be described. The transition preparation process for special 1 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the standby process (FIG. 158: S8401).

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing special 1 shift preparation processing. In the transition preparation process for special 1, when the special 1 customer waiting command is received, the special 1 customer waiting flag is turned ON. When the special 1 customer waiting flag is turned ON, if the special 1 main display mode is in progress, the special 1 waiting state is entered for 15 seconds. Then, when the special 1 standby state for 15 seconds ends, the volume reduction flag is turned ON, and the volume reduction processing for output from the speaker 46 is started. After that, when the sound volume becomes zero, display of a demonstration moving image (main demonstration moving image) is started in the main display area MA in the main demonstration transition processing to be described later. On the other hand, when the special 1 customer waiting flag is turned ON and the special 2 main display mode is in progress, the sub-demonstration start flag is turned ON. After that, in the sub-demonstration transition process to be described later, display of the sub-demonstration moving image is started in the first sub-display area SA1. Specific processing of the transfer preparation processing for Special 1 will be described below.

In step S8501, it is determined whether or not a special 1 customer waiting command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S8501, if it is determined that the special 1 customer waiting command has been received (S8501: YES), the flow advances to step S8502, and the special 1 Turn on the customer waiting flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S8503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8501 that the special 1 customer waiting command has not been received (S8501: NO), the process proceeds to step S8503 without executing step S8502.

In step S8503, it is determined whether or not the standby state flag for special 1 stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 is ON. If it is determined in step S8503 that the special 1 waiting state flag is not ON (S8503: NO), the process advances to step S8504 to determine whether or not the special 1 customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8504 that the special 1 customer waiting flag is not ON (S8504: NO), the special 1 transfer preparation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8504 that the special 1 customer waiting flag is ON (S8504: YES), the process proceeds to step S8505.

In step S8505, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8505 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8505: NO), the process advances to step S8506 to turn on the special 1 standby state flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step S8507 to execute special 1 standby state time setting processing. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 se) is set to the standby state timer counter Tw1 for special 1 stored in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light RAM 94. FIG. The special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the special 1 standby state flag is turned ON, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. be. After executing step S8507, the process advances to step S8508 to turn off the special 1 customer waiting flag. After that, the transfer preparation process for special 1 is ended.

If it is determined in step S8505 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8505: YES), the process advances to step S8509 to turn the sub-demonstration start flag ON. As a result, the display of the sub-demonstration moving image is started in the first sub-display area SA1 by executing the sub-demonstration transition processing described later. After executing step S8509, the process advances to step S8510 to turn off the special 1 customer waiting flag. After that, the transfer preparation process for special 1 is ended.

If it is determined in step S8503 that the special 1 standby state flag is ON (S8503: YES), the process advances to step S8511 to determine whether or not the special 1 standby state period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is 0, and if the value of the special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is 0, the special 1 standby state lasts for 15 seconds. Determine that the period has expired. If it is determined in step S8511 that the standby state period for special 1 has not ended (S8511: NO), this transition preparation processing for special 1 ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8511 that the standby state period for special 1 has ended (S8511: YES), the process proceeds to step S8512, and volume reduction flags stored in various flag storage areas 94a of sound and light side RAM 94 to ON. As a result, processing for transitioning to the main demo, which will be described later, is executed, and processing for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. After executing step S8512, the process advances to step S8513 to turn off the special 1 standby state flag. After that, the transfer preparation process for special 1 is ended.

<Transition preparation processing for Special 2>
Next, the transition preparation processing for Special 2 will be described. The transition preparation process for special 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the standby process (FIG. 158: S8402).

FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the transfer preparation process for Special 2. FIG. In the transition preparation process for Special 2, when the special 2 customer waiting command is received, the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned ON. When the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned ON, if the special 2 main display mode is in progress, the special 2 waiting state for 15 seconds is entered. Then, when the standby state for special 2 for 15 seconds is over, the volume reduction flag is turned ON, and the volume reduction processing of the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. After that, when the sound volume becomes zero, display of a demonstration moving image (main demonstration moving image) is started in the main display area MA in the main demonstration transition processing to be described later. On the other hand, when the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned ON and the special 1 main display mode is in progress, the sub-demonstration start flag is turned ON. After that, in the sub-demonstration transition process to be described later, display of the sub-demonstration moving image is started in the first sub-display area SA1. Specific processing of the Special 2 transition preparation processing will be described below.

In step S8601, it is determined whether or not a special 2 customer waiting command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S8601, if it is determined that the special 2 customer waiting command has been received (S8601: YES), the process proceeds to step S8602, and the special 2 Turn on the customer waiting flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S8603. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8601 that the special 2 customer waiting command has not been received (S8601: NO), the process proceeds to step S8603 without executing step S8602.

In step S8603, it is determined whether or not the standby state flag for special 2 stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side is ON. If it is determined in step S8603 that the special 2 waiting state flag is not ON (S8603: NO), the process advances to step S8604 to determine whether or not the special 2 customer waiting flag is ON. When it is determined in step S8604 that the special 2 customer waiting flag is not ON (S8604: NO), this special 2 transfer preparation processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8604 that the special 2 customer waiting flag is ON (S8604: YES), the process proceeds to step S8605.

In step S8605, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8605 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8605: YES), the process advances to step S8606 to turn on the special 2 standby state flag. After that, the process advances to step S8607 to execute special 2 standby state time setting processing. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 se) is set to the standby state timer counter Tw2 for special 2 stored in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light RAM 94. FIG. The special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the special 2 standby state flag is turned ON, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a 2 msec cycle. be. After executing step S8607, the process advances to step S8608 to turn off the special 2 customer waiting flag. After that, the transition preparation processing for this special 2 is finished.

If it is determined in step S8605 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8605: NO), the process advances to step S8609 to turn ON the sub-demonstration start flag. As a result, the display of the sub-demonstration moving image is started in the first sub-display area SA1 by executing the sub-demonstration transition processing described later. After executing step S8609, the process advances to step S8610 to turn off the special 2 customer waiting flag. After that, the transition preparation processing for this special 2 is terminated.

If it is determined in step S8603 that the standby state flag for Special 2 is ON (S8603: YES), the process advances to step S8611 to determine whether or not the standby state period for Special 2 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is 0, and if the value of the special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is 0, the special 2 standby state is continued for 15 seconds. Determine that the period has expired. If it is determined in step S8611 that the standby state period for Special 2 has not ended (S8611: NO), this Special 2 shift preparation process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8611 that the standby state period for special 2 has ended (S8611: YES), the process proceeds to step S8612, and volume reduction flags stored in various flag storage areas 94a of sound and light side RAM 94 to ON. As a result, processing for transitioning to the main demo, which will be described later, is executed, and processing for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. After executing step S8612, the process advances to step S8613 to turn off the special 2 standby state flag. After that, the transition preparation processing for this special 2 is finished.

<Demonstration transition processing for main>
Next, the main demo transition processing will be described. The main demo transition process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the standby process (FIG. 158: S8403). In addition, hereinafter, the main demonstration video displayed in the main display area MA is also simply referred to as a demonstration video.

FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing main demo transfer processing. In step S8701, it is determined whether or not the RTC rendering flag is ON. In step S8701, if it is determined that the RTC rendering flag is ON (S8701: YES), this main demonstration transition processing ends. In other words, during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, it is configured so as not to transition to the mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed in the main display area MA. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8701 that the RTC rendering flag is not ON (S8701: NO), the process advances to step S8702 to determine whether or not the main return flag is ON. The main return flag is a flag that is turned ON when a special 1 variation command or a special 2 variation command is received in the return processing described later. If it is determined in step S8702 that the main return flag is not ON (S8702: NO), the process proceeds to step S8703.

In step S8703, it is determined whether or not the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8703 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is not ON (S8703: NO), the process proceeds to step S8704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8703 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S8703: YES), this main demonstration transition processing ends.

In step S8704, it is determined whether or not the demonstration video start waiting flag is ON. The demonstration moving image start waiting flag is a flag for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is a period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image, and is turned ON at the timing when the sound output level (volume) becomes zero. This is a flag that is turned off when five seconds have passed since the audio output level (sound volume) became zero. If it is determined in step S8704 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S8704: NO), the process proceeds to step S8705.

In step S8705, it is determined whether or not the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8705 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S8705: YES), the process proceeds to step S8706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8705 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S8705: NO), this main demonstration shift processing ends.

In step S8706, a process of reducing the output level (volume) of audio is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set to 3000 steps, and the process of lowering the audio output level by one step is executed. In the present embodiment, the main demo transition processing is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, so the output level (volume) of the audio drops from the maximum value to zero in about 6 seconds. After executing step S8706, the process advances to step S8707.

In step S8707, it is determined whether or not the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S8707 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S8707: YES), the flow advances to step S8708 to turn off the volume reduction flag, and to step S8709 to wait for the demonstration video to start. Turn on the flag. After that, the process advances to step S8710. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8707 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S8707: NO), this main demonstration transition processing ends.

In step S8710, a demonstration moving image start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, "2500" (that is, 5.0 sec) is set to the timer counter Tx waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image stored in the various counter area 94b. The demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the sound output level (sound volume) becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. be. After step S8710 is executed, this main demonstration transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S8704 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON (S8704: YES), the process proceeds to step S8711.

In step S8711, it is determined whether or not the 5-second demonstration moving image start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter Tx waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image is 0. If the value of the timer counter Tx waiting to start the demonstration moving image is 0, the period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image of 5 seconds ends. It is determined that If it is determined in step S8711 that the demo moving image start waiting period has ended, the process advances to step S8712. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8711 that the demo moving image start waiting period has not ended, this main demonstration transition processing ends.

In step S8712, background music output stop processing is executed. After that, the flow advances to step S8713 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S8713, the process proceeds to step S8714.

In step S8714, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is turned off, and the flow advances to step S8715 to turn on the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the flow advances to step S8716 to turn on the cue determination flag, and terminates the main demo transition processing.

If it is determined in step S8702 that the main return flag is ON (S8702: YES), the process advances to step S8717 to determine whether or not the cue determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8717 that the cue determination flag is not ON (S8717: NO), the process proceeds to step S8718 to return the sound output level (volume) to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S8718, the process advances to step S8719.

In step S8719, it is determined whether or not the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8719 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S8719: YES), the process advances to step S8720 to turn the volume reduction flag OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S8721. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8719 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S8719: NO), the process proceeds to step S8721 without executing step S8720.

In step S8721, it is determined whether or not the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8721 that the wait for the start of the demonstration moving image is ON (S8721: YES), the process advances to step S8722 to turn off the wait for the start of the demonstration moving image flag. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S8723 to turn off the main return flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8721 that the demonstration moving image start wait flag is not ON (S8721: NO), the process advances to step S8723 without executing step S8722, and the main return flag is turned OFF. After step S8723 is executed, this main demonstration transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S8717 that the cue determination flag is ON (S8717: YES), the flow advances to step S8724 to transmit a demonstration moving image end command to display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image end command executes processing for ending the display of the demonstration moving image. After executing step S8724, the process advances to step S8725 to turn off the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S8726.

In step S8726, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process proceeds to step S8727.

In step S8727, the audio output level (volume) is returned to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S8727, the process proceeds to step S8728.

In step S8728, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cue determination flag is ON, output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the flow advances to step S8729 to turn off the cue determination flag. After that, the flow advances to step S8730 to turn off the main return flag and terminate this main demonstration shift processing.

<Demonstration transition process for sub>
Next, sub-demonstration transition processing will be described. The sub demo shift process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the standby process (FIG. 158: S8404).

FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing sub-demonstration transition processing. In step S8801, it is determined whether or not the sub return flag is ON. The sub return flag is a flag that is turned ON when a special 1 variation command or a special 2 variation command is received in the return processing described later. If it is determined in step S8801 that the sub return flag is not ON (S8801: NO), the process proceeds to step S8802.

In step S8802, it is determined whether or not the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8802 that the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is not ON (S8802: NO), the process proceeds to step S8803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8802 that the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S8802: YES), this sub-demonstration transition processing ends.

In step S8803, it is determined whether or not the sub-demonstration start flag is ON. The sub-demonstration start flag is a flag that is turned ON in the transition preparation process for Special 1 (FIG. 159) or the transition preparation process for Special 2 (FIG. 160). If it is determined in step S8803 that the sub-demonstration start flag is ON (S8803: YES), the process proceeds to step S8804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8803 that the sub-demonstration start flag is not ON (S8803: NO), this sub-demonstration shift processing ends.

In step S8804, a sub-demonstration moving image start command is transmitted to display-side MPU 102. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the sub-demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the sub-demonstration moving image in the first sub-display area SA1 of the pattern display device 41. FIG. After executing step S8804, the process advances to step S8805.

In step S8805, the sub-demonstration start flag is turned off, and the flow advances to step S8806 to turn on the sub-demonstration moving image display flag. After that, the sub-demonstration transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S8801 that the sub return flag is ON (S8801: YES), the process advances to step S8807 to transmit a sub demo moving image end command to display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the sub-demonstration moving image end command executes processing for ending the display of the sub-demonstration moving image. After executing step S8807, the process advances to step S8808 to turn off the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the flow advances to step S8809 to turn on the sub-return flag and terminate this sub-demonstration transition process.

<Return processing>
Next, return processing will be described. The return process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a standby process subroutine (FIG. 158: S8405).

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing return processing. In step S8901, it is determined whether or not a special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8901 that the special 1 variation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S8901: NO), the process proceeds to step S8911, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8901 that the special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S8901: YES), the process proceeds to step S8902.

In step S8902, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8902 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8902: NO), the process advances to step S8903, and either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the special 1 waiting state flag is ON. Determine whether or not In step S8903, if it is determined that either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the special 1 waiting state flag is ON (S8903: YES), the process proceeds to step S8904, and the special 1 customer waiting flag or the special 1 Among the standby state flags for the device, those flags that are ON are turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S8905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8903 that neither the special 1 customer waiting flag nor the special 1 waiting state flag is ON (S8903: NO), the process proceeds to step S8905 without executing step S8904. .

In step S8905, it is determined whether or not any of the volume reduction flag, demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8905 that any one of the volume reduction flag, demonstration video start waiting flag, and demonstration video display flag is ON (S8905: YES), the process proceeds to step S8906, and the main return flag is turned OFF. . After that, the process proceeds to step S8911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8905 that none of the volume reduction flag, demonstration video start waiting flag, and demonstration video display flag is ON (S8905: NO), step S8906 is not executed, and step S8911 is performed. proceed to

If it is determined in step S8902 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8902: YES), the flow advances to step S8907 to determine whether either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the sub-demonstration start flag is ON. judge. If it is determined in step S8907 that either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the sub-demonstration start flag is ON (S8907: YES), the flow advances to step S8908 to select the special 1 customer waiting flag or the sub-demonstration start flag. , the ON flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S8909. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8907 that neither the special 1 customer waiting flag nor the sub-demonstration start flag is ON (S8907: NO), the process proceeds to step S8909 without executing step S8908.

In step S8909, it is determined whether or not the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8909 that the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S8909: YES), the flow advances to step S8910 to turn the sub-return flag ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S8911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8909 that the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is not ON (S8909: NO), the process advances to step S8911 without executing step S8910.

In step S8911, it is determined whether or not a special 2 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step S8911 that the special 2 variation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S8911: NO), this return processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8911 that the special 2 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S8911: YES), the process proceeds to step S8912.

In step S8912, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8912 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8912: YES), the process proceeds to step S8913, and either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 waiting state flag is ON. Determine whether or not In step S8913, if it is determined that either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 waiting state flag is ON (S8913: YES), the process proceeds to step S8914, and the special 2 customer waiting flag or special 2 Among the standby state flags for the device, those flags that are ON are turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S8915. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8913 that neither the special 2 customer waiting flag nor the special 2 waiting state flag is ON (S8913: NO), the process proceeds to step S8915 without executing step S8914. .

In step S8915, it is determined whether or not any of the volume reduction flag, demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8915 that any one of the volume reduction flag, demonstration video start waiting flag, and demonstration video display flag is ON (S8915: YES), the process proceeds to step S8916, and the main return flag is turned OFF. . After that, the return processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8915 that none of the volume reduction flag, demonstration video start waiting flag, and demonstration video display flag are ON (S8915: NO), this return is performed without executing step S8916. End the process.

If it is determined in step S8912 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8912: NO), the flow advances to step S8917 to determine whether either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the sub-demonstration start flag is ON. judge. If it is determined in step S8917 that either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the sub-demonstration start flag is ON (S8917: YES), the process proceeds to step S8918, and the special 2 customer waiting flag or the sub-demonstration start flag , the ON flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S8919. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8917 that neither the special 2 customer waiting flag nor the sub-demonstration start flag is ON (S8917: NO), the process proceeds to step S8919 without executing step S8918.

In step S8919, it is determined whether or not the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8919 that the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S8919: YES), the process advances to step S8910 to turn the sub-return flag ON. After that, the return processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8919 that the sub-demonstration moving image displaying flag is not ON (S8919: NO), this return processing ends without executing step S8910.

<RTC effect processing>
Next, the RTC effect processing will be described. The RTC effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 154: S8006).

FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing RTC effect processing. In step S9001, it is determined whether or not the RTC rendering flag is ON. The RTC rendering flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC rendering is being executed. If it is determined in step S9001 that the RTC rendering flag is not ON (S9001: NO), the process advances to step S9002 to read the time information output from the RTC 96. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S9003.

In step S9003, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches the time set in advance as the time to start executing the RTC effect. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches 00 minutes every hour. If it is determined in step S9003 that the read time information does not match the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S9003: NO), this RTC effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9003 that the read time information coincides with the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect (S9003: YES), the process proceeds to step S9004.

In step S9004, RTC presentation time setting processing is executed. Specifically, "150000" (that is, 5.0 min) is set in the RTC presentation time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter area 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S9004, the process proceeds to step S9005.

In step S9005, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts processing for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S9005, the process advances to step S9006.

In step S9006, RTC effect music output start processing is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC production music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped, and the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S9007 to turn on the RTC rendering flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S9008.

In step S9008, it is determined whether or not any of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. A situation in which any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON means a situation in which the audio output level (volume) is reduced. If it is determined in step S9008 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S9008: YES), the process proceeds to step S9009.

In step S9009, the reduced output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the value preset by the player. After that, the flow advances to step S9010 to turn on the post-RTC effect demonstration video start flag. The post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is a flag for starting the demonstration moving image after the RTC effect ends. After executing step S9010, the process advances to step S9011 to turn off the ON flags among the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S9012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9008 that the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag are all OFF (S9008: NO), the processing from step S9009 to step S9011 is executed. Without, the process proceeds to step S9012.

In step S9012, it is determined whether or not the main return flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9012 that the main return flag is ON (S9012: YES), the flow advances to step S9013 to turn OFF the demo video start flag after RTC effect, and to step S9014 to turn the main return flag to OFF. Turn off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9012 that the main return flag is not ON (S9012: NO), this RTC effect processing ends without executing the processing in steps S9013 and S9014.

In step S9001, when it is determined that the RTC rendering flag is ON (S9001: YES), that is, when the RTC rendering is being executed, the process proceeds to step S9015.

In step S9015, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC rendering time timer counter Tr set in step S9003 is zero. If it is determined in step S9015 that it is time to end the RTC effect (S9015: YES), the process advances to step S9016 to proceed to processing when the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9015 that it is not the timing for ending the RTC effect (S9015: NO), the process proceeds from step S9008 to step S9014. The reason for this is that the volume reduction flag and the main return flag may be turned ON even during the period when the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S9008 to step S9014.

In step S9016, the RTC rendering flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S9017 to execute RTC effect music output stop processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S9018.

In step S9018, it is determined whether or not the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9018 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is not ON (S9018: NO), the process advances to step S9019 to transmit a background moving image start command to the display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S9020 to execute background music output start processing. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

In step S9018, if it is determined that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is ON (S9018: YES), the process advances to step S9021 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to the display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the flow advances to step S9022 to turn off the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S9023.

In step S9023, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because, in the present embodiment, music to be output together with the demonstration video is not set. After executing step S9023, the process advances to step S9024 to turn on the cue determination flag. Through this processing, the cue determination flag can be turned ON during display of the demonstration moving image. After executing step S9024, the process advances to step S9025 to turn off the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag. After that, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

<Result display processing>
Next, processing for result display will be described. The result display processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 154: S8007).

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing result display processing. In step S9101, total processing for result display is executed. The tallying process for result display calculates the information necessary for displaying the result image based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 60 and the command indicating the number of times the jackpot has been won in the high probability mode. do. After executing step S9101, the process proceeds to step S9102.

In step S9102, it is determined whether or not the final specific game round end command has been received from the main side MPU62. In step S9102, when it is determined that the final specific game round end command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (S9102: YES), the process proceeds to step S9103, and a result display start command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the result display start command, the display control device 100 executes processing for displaying the result image on the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process for result display ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9102 that the final specific game round end command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S9102: NO), this result display process is terminated without executing step S9103.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S9201, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step S9202.

In step S9202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

167 is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S9301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S9401, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 167) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S9401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the liquid crystal pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and to generate the effect image corresponding to the state. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41 .

In step S9402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S9401), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S9403.

In step S9403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S9402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S9404.

In step S9404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S9403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step S9405, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

K8. effect:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 1 customer waiting command is the presence or absence of the reserved game round of the first start opening game round (whether or not the first start holding number RaN is 0). , and the special 2 customer waiting command is transmitted based on whether or not there is a held game round in the second start opening game round (whether or not the second start holding number RbN is 0). Then, the pattern display device 41 switches between the mode of displaying the pattern for the first liquid crystal and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image based on the special 1 customer waiting command, and based on the transmitted special 2 customer waiting command. The mode of displaying the pattern for the second liquid crystal and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image are switched.

Therefore, when the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern are displayed in different display areas of the pattern display device 41, the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed and the demonstration moving image is displayed. Switching is performed independently of the presence or absence of the reserved game rounds of the second starting opening game rounds (whether the second start holding number RbN is 0 or not), and the presence or absence of the reserved game rounds of the first starting opening game rounds ( (whether the first start hold number RaN is 0 or not), and switching between the mode of displaying the pattern for the second liquid crystal and the mode of displaying the demonstration video can be performed based on the number of games for the first start opening. Whether or not there is a pending game round (whether the first start pending number RaN is 0 or not) is independent from ).

Therefore, the pattern display device 41 switches between the mode of displaying the first liquid crystal pattern and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, and the switching between the mode of displaying the second liquid crystal pattern and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. It can be performed in an independent mode, and switching between the mode of displaying the pattern for the second liquid crystal and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image can be switched between the mode of displaying the pattern for the first liquid crystal and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. can be performed in an independent manner.

As a result, the transition of the display state of the main display area MA is correlated with the game cycle corresponding to the liquid crystal pattern displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 (second sub-display area SA2), Regarding the transition of the display state of the display area SA1 (second sub-display area SA2), compared with the configuration that is correlated with the game cycle corresponding to the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA, the display in each display area It is possible to clearly show to the player information on the presence or absence of the game round (the first start opening game round or the second start opening game round) (whether or not there is a reserved game round) corresponding to the liquid crystal symbol that is being played. can. That is, when the game round is being executed, the player determines whether the game round for the first start opening or the game round for the second start opening is being executed, and which game round is being executed. You can easily find out if there are any.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can independently shift the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 to different display states. Therefore, independent display control can be easily performed on the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game state transitions, that is, when transitioning from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, or when transitioning from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode Since the display areas for displaying the patterns for the first liquid crystal and the patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in display areas different from those before the game state shifts, the player can easily recognize that the game state has shifted. can be made

Further, when the game state is shifted, two liquid crystal patterns, ie, a first liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the first starting game round and a second liquid crystal pattern corresponding to the second starting opening game round are displayed. Since the display area is switched between the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 (second sub-display area SA2), for example, the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern are changed to their role in the game. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as making the player guess that there has been a game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the present embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variation machine, the player has a sense of anticipation about the results of the two jackpot lotteries of the first start-up game round and the second start-up game round at the same time. can be given.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the fluctuation time in at least two game rounds executed immediately after starting the final specific game round is set to a predetermined 12 seconds, the final specific game round is started. It is possible to set in advance the control that takes into account the fluctuation time of at least two game rounds to be executed immediately afterward. Specifically, in at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round, an effect of displaying a result image, which is an effect whose execution time is set in advance to 10 seconds, on the symbol display device 41. can be executed.

Further, in the case of a simultaneous variation machine such as the pachinko machine 10, during the period in which either the first starting hole game round or the second starting hole game round is executed, the first starting hole game round or the second starting hole game round Since either one of the mouth game rounds may be executed, even if the fluctuation time in at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round is set to a predetermined 12 seconds, Of the two game rounds, the time from the start of the first game round to the end of the later started game round may be shorter than the total time of the two game rounds, the fluctuation time of which is a predetermined time. be. However, as the time from the start of the first game round to the end of the second game round among the two game rounds, at least one game round with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is secured. Is possible. That is, as the time from the start to the end of the two game rounds, it is possible to secure the time for one round of the game with a variation time of at least 12 seconds, and preset the control considering the secured time. be able to. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying a result image using the secured time.

Furthermore, in the case of a simultaneous variation machine, either the first starting game time or the second starting game time is executed during the period in which either the first starting game time or the second starting game time is executed. or the other. Therefore, during the period during which the predetermined effect is being executed, for example, the first start-up game round ends and a new first start-up game round is started, or the second start-up game round ends. A new game cycle for the second starting port may be started. As described above, the timing of the start of a game round and the timing of the end of a game round are also referred to as "breaks of game rounds".

Here, if a "break in the game cycle" occurs during execution of a predetermined effect, there is a risk that the effect being executed may give a complicated impression to the player. In addition, there is a possibility that the player cannot concentrate on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in each game round.

Therefore, when executing the effect of displaying the result image, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment uses the fluctuation time of a plurality of game rounds executed continuously or in parallel to execute the effect of displaying the result image. Since the time (12 seconds) is set to be longer than the required time (10 seconds), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in game rounds during the period in which the effect of displaying the result image is being executed.

In addition, by setting the variation time to 12 seconds and setting the number of game rounds to 2, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in the game rounds during the period in which the effect of displaying the result image is being executed, and the result image can be displayed. It is possible to minimize the number of times the game is set to a variable time (12 seconds) longer than the time (10 seconds) required to execute the presentation to be displayed.

Since an effect of displaying a result image is executed as an effect of notifying information about the privilege given to the player, the player can easily grasp the privilege given.

In addition, the information on the given privilege is of great interest to the player. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can suppress the occurrence of breaks in game rounds during the execution of the presentation of information of high interest to the player.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the result image after the last game round in the high-probability mode (the number of game rounds executed after probability variation is the 120th game round). That is, the result image is displayed after the display of the guide display GD1 is finished. Here, if the result image is configured to be displayed before the end of the last game round in the high-probability mode, the result image is an image that makes the player recognize that the high-probability mode is over. Players are aware that the direction in which game balls are distributed should be changed from the right side of the game board 30 to the left side. However, in this configuration, when the result image is displayed, the guidance display GD1 is displayed to indicate that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the right side of the game board 30 . Therefore, if the result image and the guide display GD1 are displayed at the same time, there is a possibility that the player will feel skeptical. In this respect, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not display the result image during the high probability mode, thereby avoiding the player's skeptical feelings.

K9. Other Aspects of the Eleventh Embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot effect during display of the result image may be provided as a special effect animation (hereinafter also referred to as a result-dedicated jackpot effect). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), in the state where the result image is displayed, the first starting game cycle corresponding to the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the second sub-display area SA2, or , a result image displayed in the main display area MA when a big win is won in any one of the second starting opening game rounds corresponding to the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. is hidden for a time shorter than the preset display time (10 seconds) of the result image, and the result-dedicated jackpot performance is executed. After recognizing that the high-probability mode has been terminated by the display of the result image, the player recognizes that he/she has won the jackpot lottery by the result-dedicated jackpot performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the fluctuation time in the two game rounds executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round was set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time, but the two game rounds In the case of a big win in any one of the jackpot lotteries, the variable time may be set to a specific variable time instead of 12 seconds. For example, it may be configured to set the variable time necessary for displaying the result image and executing the result-dedicated jackpot effect.

<Aspect 2>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the variation time in the last two game rounds to be executed after the start of the final specific game round was set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time, but shown in FIG. As in the example above, if the display of the result image for 10 seconds ends in the first (first) game round of the two game rounds executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round, the second time It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the fluctuation time of the game round is not set to 12 seconds. For example, it can be realized by preparing a flag indicating that the display of the result image for 10 seconds is completed, and using the flag as an index to determine whether or not to apply the setting of the fluctuation time of 12 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to omit the unnecessary time as the execution time of at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round.

<Aspect 3>
Another aspect may be adopted as the process of setting the fluctuation time in the two game rounds executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time. Specifically, the final specific game round is started using a variation pattern table, which is table data in which the game rounds up to the 122nd game round since the start of the high probability mode and the variation time in each game round are associated. You may set the fluctuation time in two game rounds to be executed immediately thereafter. In the variation pattern table, 12 seconds are recorded as the variation time corresponding to the 121st and 122nd game rounds (two game rounds executed immediately after starting the final specific game round), and the 121st round is recorded. A command is recorded to the effect that the variable times corresponding to game rounds other than the 122nd are set by the variable type counter CS and the variable time table. By reading such a variation pattern table at the start of the high-probability mode, and reading the variation time values or commands recorded in the variation pattern table while shifting them one by one each time the game round progresses. Variable time setting can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to omit the process of counting the number of times the game has been executed up to the 122nd time since the high-probability mode was started in order to set the variation time. Therefore, by using the variation pattern table, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the variation time of a specific game cycle to a specific value.

<Aspect 4>
In the eleventh embodiment, the fluctuation time in the last two game rounds to be executed after the start of the final specific game round was set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time, but the game round set to 12 seconds The number is not limited to two, any other number can be applied. When the gaming machine is a simultaneous variation machine as in the eleventh embodiment, during the period in which either the first starting port game round or the second starting port game round is executed, the first starting port game 12 seconds, which is the game round to be executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round, and which is a predetermined time, since either the second starting game round or the game round for the second starting port may be executed. It is preferable that the number of game times to be set to is two or more. By doing so, an effect whose execution time is set in advance, such as the effect of displaying a result image, can be executed within the period in which the game round for which the variable time is set in advance is executed. Control for setting effects can be simplified.

<Aspect 5>
In the eleventh embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high probability mode is set to 120 when shifting to the high probability mode in one type 1 jackpot, but it is not limited to 120 times. , or any other number of times.

<Aspect 6>
In the open/close execution mode executed when a jackpot (first type jackpot and second type jackpot) is won, the opening/closing control of the big winning hole 36a and the V winning hole 48 is controlled by the preset big winning hole 36a and the V winning hole 48. It may be executed based on the program of the opening pattern of the V winning opening 48 . For example, it is possible to control the opening and closing of the big winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 in the 8R first-class jackpot and the 8R second-class jackpot based on a program set as an opening pattern as follows. In the example of the opening pattern below, one process in parentheses is executed in one round game.

・[8R Type 1 Jackpot]: (Big prize mouth: Open for 30 seconds) → (Big prize mouth: Open for 30 seconds) → (Big prize mouth: Open for 30 seconds) → (Big prize mouth: Open for 30 seconds) → ( V winning mouth: open for 30 seconds) → (big winning mouth: open for 30 seconds) → (big winning mouth: open for 30 seconds) → (big winning mouth: open for 30 seconds)
・ [8R Type 2 Jackpot]: (Large winning mouth: Open for 30 seconds) → (Large winning mouth: Open for 30 seconds) → (Large winning mouth: Open for 30 seconds) → (Large winning mouth: Open for 30 seconds) → ( V winning mouth: open for 0.006 seconds) → (big winning mouth: open for 30 seconds) → (big winning mouth: open for 30 seconds) → (big winning mouth: open for 30 seconds)

In this way, by reading and executing the opening pattern program in which the winning opening to be opened in each round game and the opening time of the winning opening are set for each round game in the open/close execution mode, Opening/closing control of the winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 can be realized.

<Aspect 7>
The display of the result image gives the player the recognition that the high-probability mode has ended or has ended, so various effects can be executed using the result image. For example, when a first-class jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, a dummy result image is first displayed as one of the effects at the time of the jackpot, and then an effect is executed to notify that the jackpot lottery has been won. do. Immediately after the display of the result image makes the player recognize that the high-probability mode has ended, the player is made to recognize that he or she has won a jackpot, so that the player can be given a sense of surprise, It is possible to improve interest.

<Aspect 8>
While the result image is being displayed, sounds other than the notification sound used for notifying that the player has won the jackpot lottery may be reduced or muted. When the player recognizes the notification sound or the sound for presentation output during the display of the result image, the player has a feeling of anticipation that he has suddenly won the jackpot lottery. However, if the notification sound or the sound for performance is not the notification sound for notifying that the player has won the jackpot lottery, he/she will be greatly depressed after having expectations, and will lose his or her motivation for the game. For example, when an RTC (RTC: Real-Time Clock) effect video is started while a result image is being displayed and a loud sound is suddenly output, the player recognizes the sound and instantly thinks that he/she has won the jackpot lottery. I feel hopeful. After that, when the player recognizes that the sound is the sound of the RTC effect moving image, the player is greatly depressed.

Therefore, during the display of the result image, the sound other than the notification sound used for notifying the winning of the jackpot lottery is reduced or silenced to give the player an unnecessary sense of expectation. can be suppressed.

<Aspect 9>
As described above, when it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the right side of the game board 30, it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the right side of the game board 30. is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and if it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the left side of the game board 30, the game balls are displayed on the left side of the game board 30. A guidance display GD2 is displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is a guidance display indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the . In other words, it can be said that the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 guide the operation method of the operating handle 25 that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, the content of the guidance in the guidance display GD1 indicates that it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the right side of the game board 30, and the content of the guidance in the guidance display GD2 is: The content indicates that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the left side of the game board 30 .

Various presentations can be performed using the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 having different guide contents. For example, even after the high-frequency support mode ends, the game balls that have been distributed to the right side of the game board 30 just before the high-frequency support mode ends enter the second start port 34, When a big win or a small win is won by a big win lottery executed by the entering ball, guidance display is provided because it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the right side of the game board 30.例文帳に追加Continue to display GD2. That is, the display control of the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 is controlled based on the lottery result of the big win lottery in the game round.

The player has a sense of anticipation by recognizing that the guide display GD2 is continuously displayed despite recognizing that the high-frequency support mode has ended. When the result of the big win lottery is a big win, the result is as the player expects, so the player's feelings can be further enhanced. On the other hand, if the result of the big win lottery is a small win (first small win, second small win, third small win), the result is contrary to the player's expectation, so the player's feeling of exhilaration is increased. descend. In this way, even after the high-frequency support mode ends, if it is advantageous for the player to circulate the game balls on the right side of the game board 30, by continuing the display of the guide display GD2, A sense of urgency can be imparted to the player by making the player guess whether the result of the big win lottery is a big win or a small win. As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 can be used as a suggestive effect suggesting the result of the jackpot lottery, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, as the display mode of the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2, a display mode suggesting the result of the big winning lottery may be employed. For example, a blue guide display GD2 and a red guide display GD2 are used as the display mode of the guide display GD2. Then, the game ball circulating on the right side of the game board 30 just before the high-frequency support mode ends enters the second start port 34, and the result of the big win lottery executed by the entered ball is a small win. In this case, the frequency (probability) of displaying the blue guidance display GD2 is increased as the display mode of the guidance display GD2 that is continuously displayed after the high-frequency support mode ends. On the other hand, when the game ball circulating on the right side of the game board 30 just before the high-frequency support mode ends enters the second start port 34, and the result of the big win lottery executed by the entered ball is a big win. , the frequency (probability) of displaying the red guidance display GD2 is increased as the display mode of the guidance display GD2 that is continuously displayed after the high-frequency support mode ends. Thus, by adopting a display mode suggesting the result of the big win lottery as the display mode of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 are used as a suggestive effect suggesting the result of the big win lottery. can be used.

The player not only perceives the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 as a display that guides the operation method of the operation handle 25 and the game method, but also pays attention to the period during which the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 are continued to be displayed and the display mode. become. As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 can be used to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, thereby creating new gameplay. As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 are suggested by controlling the contents of the guidance display such as whether to display the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2, and by controlling the display form of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2. It becomes possible to use it as an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. As control of the display modes of the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2, various shapes such as the color and shape of the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 can be controlled.

<Aspect 10>
In the above-described embodiment, the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 are independently switched between the display of the liquid crystal pattern and the display of the demonstration moving image. You may For example, in the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1, the transition from the liquid crystal pattern to the demo moving image is executed independently, and both the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 can display the demo moving image. is displayed, when one display area returns from displaying the demonstration moving image to displaying the liquid crystal pattern, the other display area also returns from displaying the demonstration moving image to displaying the liquid crystal pattern. may be adopted.

<Aspect 11>
Behavior in an opening/closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are small wins (first small win, second small win, third small win). It may be difficult for the player to distinguish between the behavior in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed when the opening occurs.

Specifically, a mode is made in which a player can hardly distinguish between a big win performance executed when a big win is won in a big win lottery and a small win performance executed when a small win is won. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the variable prize winning device 36 is changed into an opening/closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win and an opening/closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a small win. To make a difference difficult for a player to distinguish. For example, the mode of opening the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode executed when the first type jackpot is won in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is set to the mode of executing the opening twice for 1.6 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the first small winning in which the variable winning device 36 is opened once for 1.6 seconds. Furthermore, by shortening the period of the opening effect (opening period) and the period of the ending effect (ending period) in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot (for example, to 0 seconds), Furthermore, the behavior in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed when the lottery result of the big win lottery becomes a big win and the behavior in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed when the lottery result of the big win lottery becomes a small win. behavior can be made difficult for the player to distinguish.

By doing so, for example, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the player circulates the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 and enters the game ball into the second start port 34 to make the second Since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a small win at a high rate in a state where the game times for the starting opening are continuously executed, even if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the first kind jackpot, the jackpot is won. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that. If the first type jackpot is won, the number of game rounds that can be executed in the high probability mode and high frequency support mode will be 120 again. The number of times increases substantially. However, the fact that the number of executable times in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode has increased is notified to the player just before the 120th game round from the time when the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode is first started. do. In this case, the player can be made to perceive that the number of times the game can be played in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode has been added, and the player can be given unexpectedness.

<Aspect 12>
In the eleventh embodiment, the display of the result image is terminated 10 seconds after the start of display. The display of the result image may be terminated when a command (hereinafter also referred to as a result display termination command) is received.

For example, the display of the result image is started after the end of the final specific game round which is the last game round to be executed before the end of the high probability mode (the number of game rounds executed after the probability variation is the 120th game round), and the game round after the probability variation At the end of the 121st game run, the main controller 60 transmits a result display end command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the result image is displayed based on the result display end command received by the sound light emission control device 90. may be configured to end.

However, in the case of such a configuration, if the player ends the game at the same time as the end of the final specific game round which is the last game round to be executed before the end of the high probability mode, the number of game rounds executed after probability variation However, since the 121st game round is not started and ended, the result image is kept displayed continuously. That is, when a new player starts a game on the gaming machine, the game round of the 121st game round execution count after the probability variation starts and the game round ends, the main control device 60 turns off the sound emission control device 90 for the first time. , and based on the result display end command received by the sound emission control device 90, the display of the result image is ended. Therefore, when a new player starts a game on the gaming machine, the result image showing the game result of the previous player is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the pattern display device 41 starts the game. 41 is not preferable.

Therefore, even if the result display end command is not received, the audio light emission control device 90 is configured to end the display of the result image when, for example, the state shifts to the state where the demonstration moving image is started. Specifically, when it is determined that the demonstration moving image starting flag in the eleventh embodiment is turned ON, the display of the result image is terminated even if the result display termination command is not received. Specific processing will be described below.

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing result display processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in aspect 12 of the eleventh embodiment. The result display processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 154: S8007).

In step S9501, total processing for result display is executed. The tallying process for result display calculates the information necessary for displaying the result image based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 60 and the command indicating the number of times the jackpot has been won in the high probability mode. do. After executing step S9501, the process proceeds to step S9502.

In step S9502, it is determined whether or not the final specific game round end command has been received from the main side MPU62. In step S9502, when it is determined that the last specific game round end command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (S9502: YES), the process proceeds to step S9503, and a result display start command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the result display start command, the display control device 100 executes processing for displaying the result image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S9503, the process advances to step S9504. In step S9504, the result display flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S9505.

On the other hand, in step S9502, when it is determined that the final specific game round end command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S9502: NO), the process proceeds to step S9505 without executing steps S9503 and S9504.

In step S9505, it is determined whether or not the result display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9505 that the result display flag is ON (S9505: YES), the process proceeds to step S9506. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9505 that the result display flag is not ON (S9505: NO), this result display processing is terminated.

In step S9506, it is determined whether a result display end command has been received from main controller 60 or not. In this aspect, as described above, the result display end command is a command that the main controller 60 transmits to the sound emission control device 90 at the end of the game round of which the number of game rounds executed after probability variation is 121.

If it is determined in step S9506 that the result display end command has been received (S9506: YES), the process advances to step S9507 to transmit the result display end command to the display control device 100. FIG. That is, the result display end command is transmitted to the display control device 100 at the end of the game round in which the post-probability variation game round execution count is the 121st. The display control device 100 that has received the result display end command ends the display of the result image. After that, the process proceeds to step S9508.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9506 that the result display end command has not been received (S9506: NO), the process advances to step S9509 to determine whether or not the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. The demonstration moving image displaying flag is a flag that turns ON when the demonstration moving image starts and turns OFF when the demonstration moving image ends. When the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON, there is a high possibility that the player of the pachinko machine 10 has stopped playing and left the seat.

If it is determined in step S9509 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S9509: YES), the process advances to step S9507 to transmit a result display end command to the display control apparatus 100. FIG. That is, even if the result display end command is not received, the result display end command is transmitted to the display control device 100 to end the display of the result image. More specifically, the display of the result image is started after the end of the final specific game round (the number of game rounds executed after the probability variation is the 120th game round), which is the last game round to be executed before the end of the high probability mode, After that, even if the result display end command is not received, the display of the result image is ended when the game round of the 121st game round execution count after probability variation is not started and ended. After that, the process proceeds to step S9508.

In step S9508, the result display flag is turned OFF, and then the result display process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S9509 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is not ON (S9509: NO), this result display processing ends without executing steps S9507 and S9508.

By executing such processing, even if the sound emission control device 90 has not received the result display end command from the main control device 60, for example, when the player leaves the seat at the same time as the end of the high probability mode. You can also end the display of the result image. Therefore, even if the execution of the game is interrupted, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the display of the result image is maintained. In this mode, even when the game state in which the game round is executed is shifted to the game state in which the game round is not executed, the result is generated with the transition to the game state in which the game round is not executed as a trigger. A process of ending the display of the image can be executed.

As a result, even when a new player starts a game on the gaming machine and the number of game rounds executed after probability variation is 121, the display of the result image on the symbol display device 41 ends. The game can be executed in the same game state as when the normal game is started.

L. Twelfth embodiment:
L1. Overview of the twelfth embodiment:
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. Differences between this embodiment and the eleventh embodiment will be described below. This embodiment differs from the eleventh embodiment in that a right-handed unit 200, which will be described later, is provided in the right area of the game area PA of the game board 30. FIG.

In the following description, the configuration of the right-handed unit 200 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the behavior of the game ball reaching the right-handed unit 200, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 will be mainly described. . Description of the same configuration and processing as in the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the right-handed unit 200 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. In this embodiment, the right-handed unit 200 passes through the through gate 35 provided at the upper end of the right-handed unit 200 so that all the game balls fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 with a predetermined or higher firing intensity configured to pass through. The right-handed unit 200 includes a through gate 35 through which game balls can pass, a distribution mechanism 204 provided downstream of the through gate 35, a path R1 provided on the downstream left side of the distribution mechanism 204, and a swing mechanism. A route R2 provided in the center downstream of the distribution mechanism 204 and a route R3 provided on the right side downstream of the distribution mechanism 204 are provided. A variable ball entry device 36 is provided on the route R1, an opening/closing ball entry device 34x including the second starting port 34 is provided on the route R2, and a general prize winning device is provided on the route R3. A mouth 32 is provided.

The distribution mechanism 204 has a function of sequentially distributing game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 to three routes R1 to R3. Arrived game balls are distributed in the order of R1→route R2→route R3→route R1 . . .

The variable ball entry device 36 is provided with an opening/closing door 36b as a special electric accessory that opens and closes back and forth with the lower rotating shaft as a base point, and opens and closes a large winning opening 36a and a V winning opening 48 into which game balls can enter. It is provided inside the door 36b.

The opening and closing ball entry device 34x includes an opening and closing door 34a as a normal electric accessory that opens and closes back and forth with the lower rotating shaft as a base point, and a second starting port 34 into which a game ball can enter is provided inside the opening and closing door 34a. prepared for.

The route R1 is configured so that a game ball distributed to the route R1 after passing through the through gate 35 reaches the variable ball entry device 36 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35. When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is open at the timing when the game ball arrives, the game ball is sure to enter the big winning opening 36a provided inside the opening/closing door 36b. is configured to

The route R2 is configured such that a game ball distributed to the route R2 after passing through the through gate 35 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 34x 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35. When the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball entry device 34x is in an open state at the timing when the game ball arrives, the game ball always enters the second starting port 34 provided inside the opening/closing door 34a. is configured as

The route R3 is configured so that the game ball distributed to the route R3 after passing through the through gate 35 reaches the general winning opening 32 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35, The game ball is configured to enter the general winning hole 32 without fail.

Next, the electric accessary product open lottery in the present embodiment and the variation of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 (hereinafter also referred to as the normal pattern) will be described. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the electric accessory open lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 .

In this embodiment, the sum of the fluctuation time and stop time of normal symbols during the high-frequency support mode is set to 0.5 seconds. In addition, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery during the high-frequency support mode is set to 232/233. That is, in the present embodiment, if the electric accessory opening lottery is executed during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role opening will be substantially won.

In addition, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball entry device 34x is set to 1, and the opening time is set to 1.8 seconds when winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery.

In addition, in the case of winning the electric role opening, the time (so-called opening time) from when the stop time of the normal symbol has passed until the opening and closing door 34a of the opening and closing ball entry device 34x starts opening is set to 0 seconds. ing. That is, when winning the electric role opening, the opening and closing door 34a of the opening and closing ball entry device 34x starts opening immediately after the stop time of the normal symbol has passed. Also, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the second starting port 34 during one opening of the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball entry device 34x (opening limit number) is set to one. That is, the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball entry device 34x is closed immediately after one game ball enters the second starting port 34. FIG. In addition, the time (so-called ending time) from when the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball entry device 34x is closed until the next variation of the normal symbol can be started is set to 0 second. That is, when the electric accessory open lottery is suspended, immediately after the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball entry device 34x is closed, the next fluctuation of the normal symbol starts.

Next, the big hit lottery in this embodiment and the variation of the design in the special figure unit 37 (hereinafter also referred to as the special figure) will be described. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 . In the present embodiment, when a big win is won in a big win lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, all the winnings are 2R type 1 big wins. The 2R type 1 jackpot means that the open/close door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened twice (two rounds) in the opening/closing execution mode, and the game ball can enter the V prize opening 48. is. When a game ball enters the V prize opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode.

In this embodiment, the total of the special symbol variation time and stop time during the high probability mode is set to 0.6 seconds. In addition, the probability of winning a small prize is set to 74/75 when a big winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed during the high probability mode. In addition, when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed during the high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot (2R type 1 jackpot) is set to 1/75. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed during the high probability mode, substantially either a small hit or a jackpot (2R first type jackpot) I will be elected.

In addition, when a small win is won in the big win lottery, the open/close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is opened once and the opening time is set to 1.0 second. In addition, when a jackpot (2R type 1 jackpot) is won in the jackpot lottery, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is opened twice, the first opening time is 0.2 seconds, and the second opening time. is set to 0.6 seconds, and the interval between the first opening and the second opening is set to 0.2 seconds. Only when the opening and closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is opened with the first type jackpot as a trigger, the sorting piece provided inside the variable ball entry device 36 operates, and the ball enters the variable ball entry device 36. The played game ball enters the V winning hole 48. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the open/close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is opened with the small hit as a trigger, the sorting piece provided inside the variable ball entry device 36 does not operate, and the ball enters the variable ball entry device 36. The played game ball enters the big winning hole 36a.

In addition, when a small hit or a big hit is won, the time (so-called opening time) from the time when the special symbol stops until the open/close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 starts to open is set to 0 seconds. It is That is, when a small win or a big win is won, the open/close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 starts opening immediately after the special symbol stop time has elapsed. In addition, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48 during one opening of the open/close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 (open limit number) is set to one. there is That is, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is closed immediately after one game ball enters the big winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48. FIG. Also, the time (so-called ending time) from when the open/close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is closed until the next variation of the special symbol can be started is set to 0 second. That is, when the big winning lottery is suspended, the next variation of the special symbol starts immediately after the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is closed.

FIG. 171 is a time chart showing the behavior of a game ball reaching the right-handed unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 171, the point where the downward arrow indicating the game ball and the horizontal axis indicating the through gate or the like intersect means that the game ball indicated by the arrow has reached the through gate or the like indicated by the horizontal axis. Also, the interval between vertical dashed lines shown in FIG. 171 is 0.1 seconds.

In the example shown in FIG. 171, the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In addition, the game ball is continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the game ball shooting mechanism 81 with a constant shooting intensity that can reach the right-handed unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30. ing. Therefore, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 of the right-handed unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

When the first game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35, the game ball PB1 is distributed to the route R1 by the distribution mechanism 204, and 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35, the variable ball entry device 36 to reach In the example shown in FIG. 171, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is in a closed state, so the game ball PB1 passes through the big winning hole 36a as it is without entering.

The second game ball PB2 launched following the game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB1, and is distributed to the route R2 by the distribution mechanism 204, passing through the through gate 35. 0.3 seconds after passing, it reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 34x. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 171, the opening lottery triggered by the passage of the first game ball PB1 through the through gate 35 wins the opening lottery. 0.5 seconds after the first game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35, the opening/closing door 34a starts to open when the fluctuation time and stop time of the normal symbols are finished. Therefore, at the timing when the second game ball PB2 reaches the opening/closing ball-entering device 34x, the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball-entering device 34x is in an open state, and the game ball PB2 reaches the second starting port 34 enter the ball. In the present embodiment, the opening limit number of the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball entry device 34x is set to 1 in one opening. The opening/closing door 34a of the device 34x is closed. Triggered by entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. It should be noted that the electric role opening lottery triggered by the passage of the second game ball PB2 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

The third game ball PB3 launched following the game ball PB2 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB2, and is distributed to the route R3 by the distribution mechanism 204, passing through the through gate 35. 0.3 seconds after passing through, the ball enters the general winning hole 32.例文帳に追加Triggered by the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. It should be noted that the electric role opening lottery triggered by the passage of the third game ball PB3 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

The fourth game ball PB4 shot following the game ball PB3 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB3, is distributed to the route R1 by the distribution mechanism 204, and passes through the through gate 35. 0.3 seconds after passing, it reaches the variable ball entry device 36 . Here, in the example shown in FIG. 171, a small winning lottery is won in the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the second game ball PB2 into the second starting hole 34, so the variable ball entry device 36 0.6 seconds after the second game ball PB2 enters the second starting port 34, the opening/closing door 36b starts opening after the special symbol fluctuation time and stop time are finished. Therefore, at the timing when the fourth game ball PB4 reaches the variable ball entry device 36, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is in an open state, and the game ball PB4 enters the big winning opening 36a. enter the ball. In the present embodiment, the opening limit number of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is set to 1 in one opening. The opening/closing door 36b of 36 is closed. Triggered by the entry of game balls into the big winning hole 36a, six game balls are paid out as prize balls. It should be noted that the electric role opening lottery triggered by the passage of the fourth game ball PB4 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

The fifth game ball PB5 shot following the game ball PB4 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB4, is distributed to the route R2 by the distribution mechanism 204, and passes through the through gate 35. 0.3 seconds after passing, it reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 34x. Here, in the suspended electric role opening lottery (the electric role opening lottery triggered by the passage of the second game ball PB2 through the through gate 35), the second game ball PB2 is the second start opening. 34 and the open/close door 34a of the open/close ball entry device 34x is closed, and in the example shown in FIG. The opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball-entering device 34x starts to open 0.5 seconds after the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball-entering device 34x is closed. Since the opening time of the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball-entering device 34x is set to 1.8 seconds, at the timing when the fifth game ball PB5 reaches the opening/closing ball-entering device 34x, the door 34a is opened and closed. The opening/closing door 34a of the ball entry device 34x is in an open state, and the game ball PB5 enters the second start port 34. As shown in FIG. When the game ball PB5 enters the second starting port 34, the opening/closing door 34a of the opening/closing ball entry device 34x is closed. Triggered by entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. It should be noted that the electric role opening lottery triggered by the passage of the fifth game ball PB5 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

The sixth game ball PB6 shot following the game ball PB5 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB5, is distributed to the route R3 by the distribution mechanism 204, and passes through the through gate 35. 0.3 seconds after passing through, the ball enters the general winning hole 32.例文帳に追加Triggered by the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. It should be noted that the electric role opening lottery triggered by the passage of the sixth game ball PB6 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

The behavior of the seventh game ball PB7 shot following the game ball PB6 is similar to that of the game ball PB4 described above, and enters the big winning hole 36a. The eighth and subsequent game balls repeat the entry pattern from the game ball PB5 to the game ball PB7 described above.

In the example shown in FIG. 171, when the jackpot (2R type 1 jackpot) is won, the game ball enters during the second opening of the open/close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36. , the sorting piece provided inside operates to enter the ball into the V winning opening 48 .

According to the right-handed unit 200 configured as described above, during the period of the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, all game balls shot toward the right-handed unit 200 However, the ball enters the second starting hole 34, the general winning hole 32, and the big winning hole 36a in order. Then, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34, and three game balls are paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32. The game balls are paid out as prize balls, and six game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the big winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48.例文帳に追加That is, during the period of the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, when the game ball is continuously fired at a constant firing intensity toward the right-handed unit 200, the second start A total of 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls each time a jackpot lottery (game round) based on the entry of game balls into the opening 34 is executed.

Also, as described in the eleventh embodiment, in this embodiment as well, the number of jackpot lottery (game times) executed during the high probability mode is a specified number of times (in this embodiment, the jackpot is not won). 120 times), the high probability mode ends. When the high-probability mode ends, the high-frequency support mode also ends. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls to the player before the high probability mode ends is based on the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game rounds) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends. Calculate the remaining number. During the high-probability mode, instead of displaying the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game rounds) that can be executed until the high-probability mode ends, a prize ball is given to the player before the high-probability mode ends. to display the number of remaining game balls to be paid out as . Hereinafter, the number of remaining game balls to be paid out as prize balls to the player by the time the high probability mode ends is also referred to as "the number of remaining acquired balls".

FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram showing an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 during the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 172(a), in the present embodiment, immediately after the high-probability mode is started, a remaining number-of-acquired-balls suggestion image CP for suggesting the number of remaining acquired balls to the player is displayed in the upper left part of the display surface 41a. display. In the present embodiment, as described above, while the game ball enters the second starting port 34 of the right-handed unit 200 and one jackpot lottery (game round) is executed, 10 game balls is paid out as prize balls. Therefore, immediately after the high probability mode is started, the remaining number of executable jackpot lotteries (game times) is 120 times before the high probability mode ends. If no big win is won even once, the remaining number of game balls (remaining acquired balls) scheduled to be paid out to the player as prize balls until the end of the high-probability mode is 1,200. . Therefore, "1200" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP immediately after the high probability mode is started. Then, as the remaining number of executable jackpot lotteries (game rounds) before the end of the high probability mode decreases, the number displayed in the remaining obtained ball number indication image CP is decreased. In the present embodiment, the number displayed in the remaining obtained ball number suggestion image CP is decreased by "10" each time the big winning lottery (game round) is executed.

FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the number of remaining acquired balls when a big win is won in the big win lottery in the high probability mode. FIG. 173 shows the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game rounds) that can be executed before the end of the high-probability mode, the actual number of remaining acquired balls, and the number displayed in the image CP suggesting the number of remaining acquired balls. , and the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added, which will be described later.

In the example shown in FIG. 173, after the high probability mode is started, the jackpot (2R first class jackpot) is won at the timing when "950" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, and the high probability mode is won. The remaining number of executable jackpot lotteries (game rounds) is 120 again. Therefore, the actual number of remaining acquired balls becomes 1200 again, but in the present embodiment, "950" is continuously displayed as it is in the remaining number of acquired balls suggestive image CP. Therefore, the actual remaining number of obtained balls (1200) is 250 more than the number (950) displayed in the remaining obtained ball number suggestive image CP. In other words, it is possible to add 250 of these to the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. Hereinafter, the number obtained by subtracting the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP from the actual remaining acquired ball number is also referred to as "addable remaining acquired ball number". In the present embodiment, even if the player wins the big win while the remaining number of acquired balls indication image CP is being displayed, the effect of suggesting that the player wins the big win is not executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the remaining number of executable jackpot lotteries (game rounds) is 120 again before the high-probability mode ends.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the jackpot (2R type 1 jackpot) is won at the timing when "170" is displayed in the remaining acquisition pitch indication image CP, and it can be executed before the high probability mode ends. The remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game rounds) is 120 again. Therefore, the actual number of remaining acquired balls becomes 1200 again, but in the present embodiment, "170" is continuously displayed as it is in the remaining number of acquired balls suggestive image CP. Therefore, the actual remaining number of obtained balls (1200) is 1030 more than the number (170) displayed in the remaining obtained ball number suggestion image CP. Therefore, the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 1030.

In this embodiment, at the timing when "90" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, if the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 500 or more, the remaining acquired ball number is increased by 500. An image CPB suggesting an increase in the number of remaining acquired balls is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172(b)), and the number (90) displayed in the image CP indicating the number of remaining acquired balls is increased to 500. Add pcs. Therefore, "590" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172(c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 173, at the timing when "90" is first displayed in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP, the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 1030, so the remaining acquired ball number is A remaining acquired ball number increase suggesting image CPB indicating an increase of 500 is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172(b)), and the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP (90 ) and add 500. Therefore, "590" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172(c)). Then, the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 530.

After that, at the timing when "90" is displayed again in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP, the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 530, suggesting that the remaining acquired ball number has increased by 500. The remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172(b)), and 500 is added to the number (90) displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. . Therefore, "590" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172(c)). Then, the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when "0" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP, if the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is X, which is 1 or more, the remaining acquired ball number A remaining acquired ball number increase suggesting image CPB suggesting that the number has increased by X is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and "X" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP. In the example shown in FIG. 173, at the timing when "0" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP, the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 30, so the remaining acquired ball number increases by 30. An increase in the number of remaining acquired balls suggesting image CPB indicating that the number of remaining acquired balls is increased is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and "30" is displayed in the remaining number of acquired balls suggesting image CP. At this point, the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP matches the actual remaining acquired ball number.

L2. Processing performed in the audio lighting control device:
<Processing for Displaying Number of Remaining Acquired Balls>
Next, an example of processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 to display the number of remaining acquired balls will be described.

FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing processing for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 . This processing for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls is executed in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls is repeatedly executed every 4 msec.

In step S9601, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating the number of remaining acquired balls in the flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 is ON. The flag indicating the number of remaining acquired balls is a flag for determining whether or not the image CP suggesting the number of remaining acquired balls is being displayed on the pattern display device 41 . If it is determined in step S9601 that the flag indicating the number of remaining acquired balls is not ON (S9601: NO), the process advances to step S9602 to determine whether or not a high probability mode command has been received.

If it is determined in step S9602 that the high-probability mode command has not been received (S9602: NO), this process for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9602 that the high-probability mode command has been received (S9602: YES), the process advances to step S9603 to set 1200 in a counter indicating the actual number of remaining winning balls. After that, the process advances to step S9604 to transmit a command to display the remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP showing "1200" as the remaining acquired ball number to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for displaying the number-of-remaining-balls suggestive image CP on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S9604, the process advances to step S9605 to turn on the flag indicating the number of remaining acquired balls. After that, the processing for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls ends.

In step S9601, if it is determined that the flag indicating the number of remaining acquired balls is ON (S9601: YES), the process proceeds to step S9606, and a variation command (Special 1 variation command or Special 2 variation command) is received. Determine whether or not If it is determined in step S9606 that a variation command has been received (S9606: YES), the process proceeds to step S9607, and a command for subtracting 10 from the remaining acquired ball number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP is displayed. A command is sent to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for subtracting 10 from the number of remaining acquired balls being displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. After executing step S9607, the process proceeds to step S9608, and 10 is subtracted from the counter indicating the actual remaining acquired ball number. After that, the process proceeds to step S9609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9606 that no variation command has been received (S9606: NO), the process advances to step S9609 without executing the processes of steps S9607 and S9608.

In step S9609, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received. If it is determined in step S9609 that the V winning command has been received (S9609: YES), the process advances to step S9610, and from "1200", the number of remaining acquired balls displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is displayed. is set in a counter that indicates the remaining number of winning balls that can be added. After that, the process advances to step S9611, and 1200 is set in a counter indicating the actual number of remaining winning balls. After that, the process proceeds to step S9612. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9609 that the V winning command has not been received (S9609: NO), the process proceeds to step S9612 without executing the processes of steps S9610 and S9611.

In step S9612, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining acquired balls being displayed in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP is 90 or not. If it is determined in step S9612 that the number of remaining acquired balls displayed in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP is 90 (S9612: YES), the process proceeds to step S9613, and the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 500 or more. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S9613 that the remaining number of acquired balls that can be added is 500 or more (S9613: YES), the process proceeds to step S9614, and the display-side MPU 102 issues a command to display an image CPB suggesting an increase in the number of acquired balls. Send to The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB. After executing step S9614, the process advances to step S9615 to transmit a command to the display side MPU 102 to add 500 to the number of remaining acquired balls being displayed in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP. The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for adding 500 to the number of remaining acquired balls being displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. After executing step S9615, the process advances to step S9616 to subtract 500 from the counter indicating the remaining number of winning balls that can be added. After that, the process proceeds to step S9617. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9612 that the number of remaining acquired balls displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP is not 90 (S9612: NO), and in step S9613, the remaining number of acquired acquired balls that can be added is 500. If it is determined that it is not the above (S9613: NO), the process proceeds to step S9617 without executing the processing from step S9614 to step S9616.

In step S9617, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining acquired balls being displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is zero. If it is determined in step S9617 that the number of remaining acquired balls displayed in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP is 0 (S9617: YES), the process proceeds to step S9618 to determine whether there is a remaining acquired number of balls that can be added. determine whether or not If it is determined in step S9618 that there is a remaining number of acquired balls that can be added (S9618: YES), the process advances to step S9619 to transmit a command for displaying an image CPB indicating an increase in the number of acquired balls to the display side MPU 102. . The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB. After executing step S9619, the process advances to step S9620 to issue a command to the display side to add the value of the counter indicating the remaining number of acquired balls that can be added to the remaining number of acquired balls being displayed in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP. Send to MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for adding the value of the counter to the number of remaining acquired balls being displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. After executing step S9620, the process advances to step S9621 to set 0 to a counter indicating the remaining number of winning balls that can be added. After that, the processing for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9617 that the number of remaining acquired balls displayed in the remaining acquired ball number indication image CP is not 0 (S9617: NO), the processing from step S9618 to step S9621 is not executed. This process for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls is terminated. If it is determined in step S9618 that there is no remaining number of acquired balls that can be added (S9618: NO), that is, if the value of the counter indicating the remaining number of acquired balls that can be added is 0, the process proceeds to step S9622. Then, a command is sent to the display side MPU 102 to end the display of the remaining number of acquired pitches suggestive image CP. The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for ending the display of the remaining acquired pitch suggestive image CP. After executing step S9622, the process advances to step S9623 to turn off the flag indicating the number of remaining acquired balls. After that, the processing for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls ends.

L3. Effects of the twelfth embodiment:
As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the remaining obtained ball number suggestive image CP indicating information corresponding to the remaining obtained ball number is displayed, game balls that can be obtained by the end of the high probability mode are displayed. It is possible to make the player grasp the number of . In addition, for example, compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executable jackpot lotteries is displayed until the high probability mode ends, the player is asked to what extent he or she can expect the high probability mode. Since it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the first type jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and the game ball enters the V winning slot 48 and the number of remaining obtained balls increases, the remaining obtained ball number indication image CP is displayed. The number of remaining acquired balls indicated by is updated with the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added as the upper limit, so that the player can be made aware that the number of game balls that can be acquired before the end of the high probability mode has increased. , the player's expectations for the high-probability mode can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the number of remaining obtained balls increases, the image CPB indicating the increase in the number of remaining obtained balls is displayed. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of games played, and improve the player's expectation for the high-probability mode.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, at a timing different from the timing at which it is determined that the number of remaining acquired balls has increased (in this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball enters the V winning hole 48), the number of remaining acquired balls Since the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the suggestive image CP is increased, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game. It is possible to provide a player with a sense of expectation.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB is increased with an increase of 500 as one unit, so that the expectation for one increase can be improved. . Note that one unit of increase is not limited to 500, and may be set to any number such as 300 or 1000.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is less than 500, which is one unit of increase, the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is 0. At this timing, the number of less than 500 is added to the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP, so the remaining acquired ball number indicated by the remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP becomes 0. Even if the number of remaining acquired balls is increased to less than 500, it is possible to give a player whose expectations have decreased a great sense of expectation.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the number of remaining acquired balls increases, the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining number of acquired balls indication image CP is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time without being increased. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the actual number of remaining acquired balls may be larger than the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the image CPB indicating the increase in the number of remaining acquired balls, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the high probability mode, when the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a constant firing intensity that can reach the right-handed unit 200, the shot The number (three) of game balls entering the big winning opening 36a (V winning opening 48), the second starting opening 34, and the general winning opening 32 in the number (three) of the played game balls is constant. , it is possible to match the number of game balls actually paid out until the end of the high probability mode with the number of remaining winning balls.

L4. Other Aspects of the Twelfth Embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 in the case of winning the small prize is the same as the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 in the case of winning the 2R type 1 jackpot. Although the configuration is different, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 when winning the small prize is the same as the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 when the 2R first class jackpot is won. It is good also as a structure which is. According to such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice that he/she has won the 2R type 1 jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of happiness when the image CPB indicating an increase in the number of remaining acquired balls is displayed.

<Aspect 2>
When the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 500 or more, the timing of displaying the remaining acquired ball number increase indication image CPB indicating that the remaining acquired ball number has increased by 500 is determined by lottery. good too. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing when the remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB is displayed. It is possible to further improve a person's sense of well-being.

<Aspect 3>
When the image CP suggesting the number of remaining obtained balls is displayed, for example, the player operates the operation handle 25 to change the shooting interval and shooting intensity of the game ball, and the game ball is scheduled to enter. When the ball does not enter the special winning hole 36a, the general winning hole 32, or the like, an effect may be executed to suggest that the game ball did not enter as planned. For example, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 may display an image such as "Miss!!".

<Aspect 4>
A configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot type other than the 2R first-class jackpot is set as the jackpot type to be distributed when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加For example, a 16R first-class jackpot may be set. If this configuration is adopted, the number of game balls to be paid out during the opening/closing execution mode executed with the 16R type 1 jackpot as a trigger is further added to the above-mentioned remaining number of acquired balls that can be added. good.

<Aspect 5>
In addition to the remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP, the number of game balls actually paid out may be displayed. Further, in addition to or in place of the number-of-acquired-balls suggestive image CP, the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game rounds) that can be executed until the high-probability mode ends may be displayed. good. In such a configuration, even if the remaining number of executable jackpot lotteries (game rounds) increases before the high-probability mode ends, the number of jackpot lotteries (game rounds) being displayed is maintained for a predetermined period of time. If the remaining number of times is continuously displayed without increasing, the remaining number of actual jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends is displayed to the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the remaining number of times played may be more than the remaining number of times played, thereby improving the interest of the game.

M. Variant:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible.

M1. Variant 1:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the suggestive effect is executed before executing the special game state reproduction effect and the game round reproduction effect, but the suggestive effect is not limited to such a configuration. may be omitted. Even if the suggestive effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game round in the second game round despite winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to expect that the big winning lottery related to the second game round has been won. In addition, even if the suggestive effect is omitted, by executing the game round reproduction effect due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round, the player is surprised and the game is enhanced. It can add surprise.

M2. Variant 2:
In case a2 of the first embodiment and case c2 of the third embodiment described above, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game round, the suggestive effect may be executed before the game round reproduction effect. That is, the suggestive effect can be executed at any timing as long as the timing is before reproducing the effect that has already been executed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, since the suggestive effect is executed before executing the special game state reproduction effect and the game round reproduction effect, for example, the effect executed in the second game round has already been performed. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of the effect that has been executed.

M3. Variant 3:
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the objects to be reproduced in the special game state reproduction effect and the game round reproduction effect are not limited to the effects executed in the big win game round. A performance executed in a game round that is not a big hit, for example, a reach performance in a game round with a loss (with reach) may be the target of reproduction in a special game state reproduction performance and a game round reproduction production, or a game with a loss (no reach). The advance notice effect in each episode may be the object of reproduction.

M4. Modification 4:
The first game round and the second game round defined in the above-described first to fourth embodiments are not limited to two game rounds that are executed consecutively. For example, there may be another game round between the first game round and the second game round.

M5. Variant 5:
In the above-described first to third embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the effect to be executed in the ending period of the special game state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game round to be executed after the special game state. bottom. For example, in the first embodiment, the effect executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round is the suggestive effect and the special game state reproduction effect as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9). Alternatively, the suggestive effect as shown in case a2 is determined based on the special information relating to the second game round to be executed after the special game state, but it is not limited to such a configuration. The effect to be determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game round to be executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggestive effect or the special game state reproduction effect, and any other effect may be adopted. good too. For example, other effects such as normal ready-to-win effects (ready-to-win effects that are not subject to special game state reproduction effects) and effects that are executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to execute, in the special game state, an effect in consideration of the special information relating to the predetermined game round to be executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect that is related to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game round, thereby improving the interest in the game.

M6. Modification 6:
The processes executed in the first to fourth embodiments may be used together. That is, case a1 (FIG. 9(a)) and case a2 (FIG. 9(b)) which are the processes executed in the first embodiment, and processes (FIGS. 46(a) and (b)) executed in the second embodiment ), case c1 (FIG. 48(a)) and case c2 (FIG. 48(b)) which are the processes executed in the third embodiment, and case d1 (FIG. 49(a)) which is the process executed in the fourth embodiment. )) and case d2 (FIG. 49(b)), a plurality of processes may be appropriately selected and used together. This makes it possible to obtain a synergistic effect by the combined treatment. For example, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention and expectation for an effect that reproduces an effect that has already been executed, such as a special game state reproduction effect or a game cycle reproduction effect.

M7. Variant 7:
In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition and wins the jackpot lottery has been described as an example. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case where a condition for executing a ready-to-win effect based on the acquired counter value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is satisfied may be employed. Thus, even if other conditions are set as predetermined conditions, the same effects as those described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

M8. Modification 8:
In the above-described fifth and sixth embodiments, three types of images of objects A to C are used as the object images used for the advance notice effects, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, two types of object images or four types of object images may be used as the object images used for the announcement effect. In this way, even if an arbitrary number of object images are employed, the same effects as in the above embodiment can be obtained. Also, various contents can be adopted for the contents of each object.

M9. Modification 9:
In the above-described fifth and sixth embodiments, the degree of expectation for a big win is shown to the player as a game situation, depending on how the images of the respective objects displayed as the notice effect are combined. A configuration may be adopted in which various game situations are presented to the player as the game situation, such as the degree of probability and the degree of expectation that the current game state is a variable probability state.

M10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in an example in FIG. 54, the display pattern table for each of object A, object B, and object C has three types: jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). Each display pattern random number is distributed according to the case. The effect by the object B may be functioned as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability variable jackpot. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which a latent variable probability state exists, the effect by the object C may function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable probability state of the current game round. In this way, if the objects A, B, and C have the function of suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game by the display pattern, each object can be of a different type (for example, expected jackpot or The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game, such as the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot, may be indicated.

M11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement/timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates. may be That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes over time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having relevance, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is The placement and display start timings of the display objects are set in the placement/timing setting table so that they do not overlap each other.

M12. Variant 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is subjected to the process of not displaying the image frame. -A2-A3) may be configured such that the image frames of some or all of the images A1, A2, and A3 displayed as A2-A3) are not displayed. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which similar processing is executed for other object images.

M13. Variant 13:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to set the placement and display start timing for each combination of object images displayed as the advance notice effect by using the placement/timing setting table. However, other configurations may be used. For example, in the announcement effect in which object A and object B are displayed, (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3) are combined, and (A1-A2-A3) and (B1) are combined. There are multiple types of announcement effects such as the announcement effect. The layout and display start timing of each object image may be set for each of these multiple types of advance notice effects. By doing so, the effect executed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

M14. Variant 14:
In the above-described fifth and sixth embodiments, when two or more objects are displayed in one announcement effect, the relative positions of the objects are considered, and the relevance of each object is considered. In order to display on the display surface 41a in such a manner that the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a, the relative arrangement positions and display timings of the respective objects are set. Specifically, it was set to be displayed in a narrative manner as a form of relevance, but set to be displayed in a manner in which multiple objects have a single idea as a form of relevance. Various aspects can be adopted as aspects in which a plurality of objects are related, such as a configuration in which multiple objects are displayed according to a predetermined rule.

M15. Modification 15:
The display patterns set in the display pattern tables described in the fifth and sixth embodiments are not limited to the modes shown in the above embodiments, and other modes of display patterns may be adopted. can be done. For example, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as the display pattern set in the BC display pattern table. In this case, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing the appearance of a dog sticking out of the box, giving the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a display pattern showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to bad weather. It is possible to give the player the recognition that the situation is unfavorable, and it is possible to execute various effects by combining each object, so that the objects can be used effectively.

M16. Variant 16:
In the sixth embodiment described above, the image used for the preview effect is the object A, the object B, the object C, or a combination of these images, but other images may be used.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing an object D that can be used for an advance notice effect. The object D is composed of three images, an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and is an image that changes with time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. 175(a) shows the image D1, FIG. 175(b) shows the image D2, and FIG. 175(c) shows the image D3. As illustrated, object D expresses a love pattern between a male character and a female character. Specifically, the image D1 depicts a male character and a female character gazing at each other with a certain distance between them. Image D2 depicts a male character and a female character gazing at each other from a short distance. Image D3 shows a male character and a female character holding hands and getting along. Image D3 depicts a female character telling a male character that they are on good terms without telling the female character's father.

The object D, which is composed of images with such contents, depicts how a man and woman fall in love as the images progress in the order of image D1, image D2, and image D3. Image D3 generally gives a better impression than image D2. That is, the image D2 rather than the image D1 and the image D3 rather than the image D2 give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Further, the object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as a step-up performance image which is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine in Modification 16 is provided with a display pattern table for D as a display pattern table. (D1), display pattern (D1-D2), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3) are allocated. In the display pattern table for D, the display pattern display pattern (D1) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns in the case of failure (no reach), and the display pattern (D1) is displayed most frequently in the case of failure (with reach). Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns. Values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so as to increase.

The pachinko machine in this modified example further executes a notice effect in which an image E is combined with the object D as another image.

FIG. 176 shows an image in which image E is combined with object D (object D+image E). As shown, image E, which is the image to be combined with object D, represents the female character's father. Object D+Image E is composed of three images, [Image D1+Image E], [Image D2+Image E], and [Image D3+Image E]. D3+image E] are images that change with time. 176(a) shows [image D1+image E], FIG. 176(b) shows [image D2+image E], and FIG. 176(c) shows [image D3+image E]. As shown in the figure, object D+image E shows how the female character's father is watching the romance between the male character and the female character from behind a pillar. Specifically, in [Image D1 + Image E], a male character and a female character are gazing at each other with a certain distance, and the female character's father is watching from behind a pillar. It is [Image D2+Image E] depicts a male character and a female character staring at each other from a short distance, while the female character's father is watching from behind a pillar. In [Image D3 + Image E], a male character and a female character hold hands, and the female character tells the male character that they are on good terms without telling the female character's father. The appearance of the female character's father watching from the shadow of the pillar is expressed.

The object D+image E, which is composed of images with such contents, progresses in the order of [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E]. It is presumed that the parent-child relationship deteriorates. Therefore, as the images progress in the order of [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E], a bad impression is generally given. In other words, [image D2+image E] generally gives a better impression than [image D3+image E], and [image D1+image E] gives a better impression than [image D2+image E]. That is, [image D2+image E] rather than [image D3+image E] and [image D1+image E] rather than [image D2+image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

In addition, object D+image E is displayed as an effect image that is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery decreases as it progresses through [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E]. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine in Modification 16 is provided with a display pattern table for DE as a display pattern table. (D1/E), display pattern (D1-D2/E), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3/E) are allocated. In the DE display pattern table, among the above four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3/E) is most frequently displayed in the case of failure (no reach). In the case of the above four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2/E) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (D1/E) is the most displayed among the above four display patterns. A value of 0 to 99 is assigned to the display pattern random number counter C22 so as to increase the frequency of display patterns.

By doing so, an effect similar to that of the sixth embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modification, when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E, the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E. Image D3 is displayed in combination with image E in the case where image D1 is combined with image E and displayed on display surface 41a in spite of giving the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. It is possible to give the player more advantageous recognition of the game situation than when it is displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, by devising the combination of images and the contents of the images, it is possible to give the player various recognitions of the game situation.

Also, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E than when the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E. Although the image D1 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a, the jackpot lottery is higher than the case where the image D3 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a. There is a high probability that you will be elected to Therefore, when a predetermined image is combined with a performance image that steps up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation increases, the player can be given a completely different perception of the game situation. can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 and the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation differs depending on whether or not the image E is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a. Although the above effect has been described using the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, the above effect can also be obtained between the image D1 and the image D2, and between the image D2 and the image D3.

M17. Variant 17:
In the above-described embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the sound output mode is such that the background music continues to be output and the volume of the background music is reduced with the lapse of time until the background music volume is zero. Although it is configured to transition to a certain mode, instead of this, when the transition condition is satisfied, the output mode of the sound is reduced with the passage of time while the output of the background music is continued. A configuration may be adopted in which the volume of the background music is changed to zero without passing through.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is shifted to the mode of displaying the demonstration video five seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero. However, instead of this, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 may be changed to the mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output of the background music itself continues until five seconds have passed since the volume of the background music became zero, and the output of the background music is stopped after five seconds have passed. Alternatively, the output of the background music may be stopped when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

M18. Variant 18:
In the above embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 11), the temporal head of the background video is displayed. Although the display is started from the position "01" and the output of the background music is started from the temporal start position "01", the background moving image and the background music are started to be displayed and output from the temporal start position. Not limited to configuration. For example, the background moving image and the background music may be displayed and output starting from a predetermined temporal position where they are most exciting (so-called chorus start position). That is, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the background moving image, and output is started from a temporal position corresponding to a predetermined temporal position of the background music and the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image. It may be configured to start. Even with such a configuration, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized compared to the configuration in which the temporal position of starting the display of the background moving image varies according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

M19. Variant 19:
In the above embodiment, the background music volume is set to zero when the transition condition is satisfied, but the background music volume may not be completely set to zero. For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music may be set to a level that the player cannot recognize. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition has been established.

Further, the output mode of the sound before the transition condition is satisfied is set to output the background music at the volume of the first volume, and the output mode of the sound after the transition condition is satisfied is set to output the background music at the first level. Alternatively, the sound may be output at a volume of a second magnitude, which is smaller than the volume of the first magnitude. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition has been established.

M20. Modification 20:
In the above-described embodiment, when the transition condition is met, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is configured to transition from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. The display mode of the pattern display device 41 and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 that shifts after the transition condition is satisfied are not limited to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. For example, if the display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied is a mode of displaying a predetermined moving image, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that transitions after the transition condition is satisfied A mode in which an image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed or a mode in which the display of the image is stopped may be used. For example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that transitions after the transition condition is satisfied includes a mode in which a moving image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the predetermined moving image is stopped and displayed, and a mode in which at least part of the predetermined , a mode in which a still image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed, or a mode in which both the moving image and the still image are not displayed.

M21. Variant 21:
In the above embodiment, a detection sensor is provided to detect that a game ball has been ejected onto the game board 30, and when the game ball is not detected by the detection sensor for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that the transition condition has been established. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In this way, if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, the transition condition is not established, so the player is in an unpleasant situation in which the transition condition is established even though the player is playing the game. can reduce the occurrence of

Further, it may be determined that the return condition is established when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor after the transition condition is established. In this way, even after the transition condition is satisfied, if the game ball is ejected onto the game board 30, the return condition is satisfied. is not established for a long period of time (for example, one minute).

M22. Variant 22:
In the above embodiment, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected depending on whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the player's selection.

M23. Modification 23:
The times, numerical values, etc. that are specifically set in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other times, numerical values, etc., can be set as appropriate. For example, the time from when the pattern stops changing until the transition condition is satisfied may be set to something other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the volume of the background music becomes zero to when the demonstration video starts is It may be set to other than 5 seconds.

M24. Variant 24:
In the above-described embodiment, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the sound output mode is configured such that no music is output and the volume is zero. Alternatively, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image, the output mode of the sound is the demonstration music corresponding to the demonstration moving image at an output level preset by the player. It may be configured to output at (volume).

In such a configuration, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the display transitions to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the output of the demo music may be started from a predetermined temporal position. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the demonstration moving image and the output of the demonstration music, compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the output of the demonstration music is started fluctuates. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, a predetermined temporal position of the demo music may be set as the temporal head position of the demo music. According to such a configuration, compared to a configuration in which output is started from a position in the middle of the demo music in terms of time, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player.

M25. Variant 25:
In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires time information, which is information about time, from the RTC 96, and the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. If it is determined that they match, the processing for executing the RTC effect is started. Elapsed time from the start of the previous RTC performance is measured, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has passed since the start of the previous RTC performance, and it is determined that the predetermined time has passed. It may be configured to start the processing for executing the RTC effect when the player has performed the RTC effect.

M26. Variant 26:
In the seventh embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to output the RTC effect music at an output level (volume) preset by the player. The RTC effect music may be output at the maximum output level (volume) regardless of the output level (volume) preset by the user. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the intensity and the degree of attention of the RTC presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

M27. Variant 27:
In addition to adopting the configuration of Modified Example 26, when the RTC production music output at the maximum output level (volume) ends and the background music is output, the maximum output level (volume) may be maintained. good. Effects of such a configuration will be described. Players who appreciate the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) are fascinated by the power of the effect executed at the maximum output level (volume). There may be a desire to continue the game at the output level (volume) of . Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue the game at the maximum output level (sound volume) even after the RTC effect is finished.

In addition, after adopting the configuration of Modification 26, when outputting the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is completed and the background music is output, the output level (volume) preset by the player ) may be used. According to such a configuration, the special feeling of the RTC effect that has been executed can be further emphasized, so that the expectation for the next RTC effect can be further improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

In addition, after adopting the configuration of the modification 26, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is completed and the background music is output, the audio output level (volume) can be set by the player. A volume setting screen for setting may be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the background music may be output at the audio output level (volume) specified by the player. Effects of such a configuration will be described. A player who listens to the RTC performance music output at the maximum output level (volume) gets used to the high sound volume, so that the desired output level (volume) may change from before listening to the RTC performance music. For this reason, after the RTC effect is completed, there is a demand that the output level (sound volume) of the sound should be reset to a desired output level. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to reset the output level (sound volume) of the sound to a desired output level at the timing after the RTC effect is finished.

M28. Variant 28:
The method of determining the display mode of the pending display and the display mode of the pending display may be different from those of the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment. Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to one of the multiple displayed pending displays is determined to win the big winning lottery by the previous determination process, the displayed multiple By making the display mode of the pending display into a display mode of a specific pattern, it is highly likely that the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one pending display among the displayed pending displays wins the jackpot lottery. , may be suggested to the player. For example, when four pending displays of pending display Dm11 to pending display Dm14 are displayed in the first pending display area Ds1, the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display Dm14 is entered in the jackpot lottery by the first determination process. When it is determined to win, the display mode of the pending display Dm11 is changed to white, the display mode of the pending display Dm12 is changed to red, the display mode of the pending display Dm13 is changed to white, and the display mode of the pending display Dm14 is changed to red. That is, by changing the display mode of a plurality of displayed pending displays to a specific pattern such as "white, red, white, red", a jackpot corresponding to one pending display among the displayed pending displays It is possible to suggest to the player that the random number counter C1 has a high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery.

In addition, when it is determined by the preceding determination processing that the jackpot random number counter C1 in the predetermined reserved game round wins the jackpot lottery, the reserved display of the predetermined reserved game number and the predetermined reserved game number are generated. By determining the display pattern of the pending display of the pending game rounds to be generated thereafter to a specific display pattern, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one pending display among the displayed pending displays is entered into the jackpot lottery. It may be suggested to the player that the chances of winning are high. In this case, after the predetermined reserved game round is generated, the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the display mode of the reserved display of the reserved game round corresponding to the entered ball is displayed. At the time of determination, a jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display (hold display of a predetermined hold game cycle determined by a first determination process when winning a jackpot lottery) different from the hold display for which the display mode is to be determined. It can be realized by determining the display mode of the pending display based on.

M29. Variant 29:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

N. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature A1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means (MPU 62, MPU 92 and MPU 102 in the first to fourth embodiments)
When the special information related to the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced (the process of case a2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment). Execute the processing of c2 and the processing of case d1 in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature A1, in spite of the fact that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, in the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. After that, the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, and the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. can add surprise to In other words, by making the second game turn unanticipated by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising:
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state in which a privilege is given to the player after a game round related to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
The production executing means is
In a first case where the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
After the start of the special game state executed after the first game round and before the start of the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced. (executing the processing of case a1 in the first embodiment and the processing of case c1 in the third embodiment),
In a second case where the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced (the process of case a2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment). Execute the process of c2)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature A2, when the special information relating to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced by reproducing the already executed effect. It functions as a role to reproduce, and the player recognizes it as such. On the other hand, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is a reproduction of the effect that has already been executed. However, in reality, it is executed because the special information related to the second game cycle satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game round, when the informing means notifies that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the second game round is executed for the first time at that time. The reproduction executed in the game round does not simply reproduce at least part of the effect executed in the first game round, but is caused by the fact that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. The player recognizes that it is executed as Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game and to give the player a sense of anticipation for the reproduction of the effect that has already been executed.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The production executing means is
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round, a suggestive effect suggesting that the already executed effect is reproduced before the reproduction (first embodiment) to the fourth embodiment) are executed.

According to the feature A3, since the suggestive effect is executed before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round, the effect executed in the second game round is the first game. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is at least part of the performance executed in the round. Thereafter, the result of the determination of the special information relating to the second game round is notified by the notifying means, and the player is made to recognize that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Further, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to feature A3,
The production executing means is
If there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round,
The suggestive effect is executed in the other game round (in the second embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature A4, even if there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round, the suggestive effect is executed by executing the suggestive effect in the other game round. and reproduction can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game round before the first game round, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game round. part (performs the processing of case c1 and the processing of case c2 in the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature A5, even when the continuous performance is executed over the first game cycle from the game cycle before the first game cycle, the continuous performance can be reproduced. .

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to the player,
A gaming machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a ready-to-win effect, which is a effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature A6, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the ready-to-win effect executed after the suggestive effect is, in terms of effect, the effect executed in the first game round. Although it is executed as at least a partial reproduction, it is actually executed because the special information relating to the second game cycle satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is met, and a case where at least the effect executed in the first game cycle is executed. When it is executed as a partial reproduction, and in terms of performance, it is executed as at least a partial reproduction of the performance executed in the first game round, but in reality, the special information related to the game round is predetermined. At least three cases can be set, one being execution due to the fulfillment of the conditions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature B1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
A game round (first to third embodiments) executed after a specific game round (first game round in the first to third embodiments) in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. a timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game round based on the special information relating to the second game round in the game machine.

According to the feature B1, the timing of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round is determined based on the special information related to the game round executed after the specific game round, so special In addition, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the reproduction, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
The production executing means is
Before the determination means (step S1022), it is determined whether or not the special information relating to the game round to be executed after the specific game round which is the game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition satisfies the predetermined condition (step S1022). and
Based on the result of the determination performed before the determination means, determine the timing to reproduce at least part of the effect performed in the specific game round (execute the processing of steps S2302-S2312)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature B2, by executing the determination whether or not the special information related to the game round executed after the specific game round satisfies the predetermined condition before the determination means, the performance executed in the specific game round The effect in the game round to be executed prior to the game round determined to be reproduced at least partially can be determined in consideration of the game round to be reproduced. Therefore, for example, an effect related to the reproduction can be executed as an effect in the game round to be executed before the game round determined to be reproduced.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
The production executing means is
Of the game rounds executed after the specific game round, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment, second in case c2 in the second and third embodiments). game round) to reproduce at least part of the effect executed in the specific game round.

According to feature B3, at least part of the effect executed in the specific game round is reproduced in the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that at least part of the effect executed in the specific game round is reproduced. It is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the game round to be played satisfies a predetermined condition. The player is made to recognize that the special information related to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition only when the result of determination of the special information related to the game round is notified by a notification means, thereby imparting unexpectedness to the game. be able to. In other words, by making the game turn unanticipated by the player, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The production executing means is
A game machine characterized in that, before reproducing at least a part of the performance executed in the specific game round, a suggestive performance suggesting reproduction of the performance already executed is executed.

According to the feature B4, since the suggestive effect suggesting the reproduction of the effect that has already been executed is executed, the player's attention and interest in the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round is increased. can be improved. In addition, when at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round is reproduced in the game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, by executing the suggestive effect, the game round in which the reproduction is further executed is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information related to .

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to feature B4,
The production executing means is
If there is another game round between the specific game round and the game round that reproduces at least part of the effect executed in the specific game round,
The suggestive effect is executed in the other game round (in the second embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature B5, even if there is another game round between the specific game round and the game round that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round, the suggestion is made in the other game round. By executing the effect, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the suggestive effect and the effect executed in the specific game round without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature B6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
When the production execution means reproduces at least a part of the production executed in the specific game round,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means is the effect executed in the specific game round, and includes a ready-to-win effect which is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature B6, the ready-to-win effect, which was executed as reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round, was actually executed based on the special information related to the game round. By making the player recognize, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game. In addition, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is met, and a case where at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round When it is executed as a reproduction, and in terms of performance, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the performance executed in a specific game round. At least three cases can be set, one being caused and the other being executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

<Characteristic group C>
The feature group C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature C1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the special game state is executed, the effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game round executed after the special game state (first embodiment In case a1 and case a2, the second embodiment, and case c1 and case c2 in the third embodiment, the effect in the special game state after the first game round is determined by the propriety of the jackpot lottery in the second game round. Determine/S1201 to S1209, S2601 to S2609)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature C1, it is possible to execute, in the special game state, an effect in consideration of special information relating to a predetermined game round to be executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect that is related to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game round, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
The production executing means is
When the special game state is executed and in a first case where the special information relating to the predetermined game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a predetermined effect is executed in the special game state. (In the case a1 in the first embodiment and the case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special game state after the first game round),
When the special game state is executed and the special information relating to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined game round. Execute (In the case a2 in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the case c2 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the second game round)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic C2, when the special information relating to the predetermined game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect being executed in the special game state is changed so that the special information relating to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition. In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed has a special meaning by executing it in the predetermined game round. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined effect is a effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the game round executed before the special game state.

According to the feature C3, even though the special information related to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition, at least the effect executed in the game round executed before the special game state in the predetermined game round Since a part of the information is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined conditions. By making the player recognize that the special information related to the predetermined game round satisfies a predetermined condition only after the result of the determination of the special information related to the predetermined game round is reported by the reporting means, the game is given unexpectedness. can be granted. In other words, by making a predetermined game turn unanticipated by the player, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to feature C3,
If the game round executed before the special game state is defined as the first game round and the predetermined game round executed after the special game state is defined as the second game round,
The object to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes the effect executed by the effect execution means in the first game round when the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduced). In the case a1 and case a2 of the first embodiment, the case c1 and case c2 of the second embodiment, and the case c1 and case c2 of the third embodiment, the target effect is the first Including the effects executed in the game times)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature C4, when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, so that it is executed in the first game round. The performance is reproduced in the second game cycle. Therefore, only when the notifying means reports that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round. However, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information related to the second game round was actually executed due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and to add surprise to the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and anticipation for the reproduction.

[Feature C5]
A gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4,
A gaming machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a ready-to-win effect, which is a effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature C5, when the special information relating to a predetermined game round (second game round) satisfies a predetermined condition, in the game round (first game round) executed before the special game state The executed ready-to-win performance is reproduced in the second game cycle. Therefore, in the second game round, the ready-to-win effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game round that was executed before the special game state in terms of the effect is actually the second game time. By making the player recognize that the special information relating to the game round has been executed due to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, it is possible to add surprise to the game. In addition, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is met, and a case where the game round executed before the special game state When it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in , and when it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game round executed before the special game state in terms of the effect, but in reality can set at least three cases, ie, a case where the special information relating to the game round is executed due to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

[Feature C6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C5,
The production executing means is
A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestive effect suggesting execution of the predetermined effect before executing the predetermined effect.

According to feature C6, by executing a suggestive effect suggesting execution of the predetermined effect before executing the predetermined effect, the degree of attention of the player to the predetermined effect to be executed, It can improve interest.

[Feature C7]
The gaming machine according to feature C6,
The production executing means is
When the special game state is executed, the special information related to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
If there is another game round between the special game state and the predetermined game round,
The suggestive effect is executed in the other game round (in the second embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round),
The predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined game round (in the second embodiment, the game round reproduction effect is executed in the second game round).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature C7, even if there is another game round between the special game state and the predetermined game round, the suggestive effect and the predetermined game round are executed by executing the suggestive effect in the other game round. A performance can be executed without giving a sense of incompatibility to a player.

[Feature C8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7,
The game machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means is at least part of the effect executed in at least two successive game rounds executed before the special game state.

According to the feature C8, even when the continuous performance is executed over at least two consecutive game rounds executed before the special game state, the continuous performance can be reproduced. can.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature D1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The special game state starting means is
Triggered by the fact that the special information relating to the second game round to be executed after the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, a second special game state is started;
The production executing means is
The effect to be executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information related to the first game round (in the first embodiment, the effect to be executed in the special game state is the first By the relationship between the game round [corresponding to the first game round in the characteristic group] executed before the game round of case a1 [corresponding to the second game round in the characteristic group] , determine the effect to be executed in the special game state after the first game round [corresponding to the second game round in the feature group] [S2601, S2602, S2603 to S2605] / first game round of case a2 Depending on the relationship between [corresponding to the first game round in the feature group] and the second game round of case a2 [corresponding to the second game round in the feature group], the second game round [corresponding to the second game round in the feature group] Corresponding to the game round of 2] Determine the effect to be executed in the later special game state [S2601, S2607])
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D1, in consideration of the special information of the first game round to be executed before the second game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the second special game to be executed after the second game round. It is possible to execute an effect in the game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a relationship between the special information relating to the first game round and the effect in the second special game state, and various effects can be produced from the first game round to the second special game state. can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1,
When the second special game state is executed when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
The production executing means is
When the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition (when the relationship between the first game round and the second game round in the case a2 of the first embodiment is established),
In the second game round (second game round of case a2 of the first embodiment), the performance executed in the first game round (first game round of case a2 of the first embodiment) reproduce at least a part (perform the processing of S2308 and S2309),
When the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition (the game round executed before the first game round in the case a1 of the first embodiment and the first game round in the case of the relationship),
In the second special game state (special game state after the first game round of case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second game round (first game round of case a1 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least part of the executed effect (execute the processing of S2605)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature D2, in the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced in spite of the fact that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. . Therefore, it is difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. By making the player recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, the game is unexpectedly played. You can give it character. In other words, by making the second game turn unanticipated by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, in the second special game state, at least part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to appreciate again the performance executed when the special information relating to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D2,
The production executing means is
When reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round in the second game round (the first game round and the second game round in case a2 of the first embodiment If there is a relationship), execute the first suggestive effect suggesting that the effect that has already been executed be reproduced (execute the processing of S2606) before the reproduction concerned,
When reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the second game round in the second special game state (the game round executed before the first game round in the case a1 of the first embodiment and the first game round), the second suggesting effect suggesting that the already executed effect is reproduced is executed before the reproduction (the process of S2605 is executed )
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D3, the first suggestive effect is executed before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round, and at least part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced. Since the second suggestive effect is executed before playing, for the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round or the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the second game round, The degree of attention and interest of the player can be improved.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3,
The production executing means is
When reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round in the second game round (the first game round and the second game round in case a2 of the first embodiment if relevant),
In the first special game state that is started when the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the first suggestive effect suggesting reproduction of the effect that has already been executed is executed (of S2606). process)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D4, by executing in the first special game state an effect that suggests the content of the effect in the game time after the first special game state, the game time after the first special game state is completed It is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4,
A game machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a ready-to-win effect, which is a effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature D5, the ready-to-win effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round was actually caused by the special information related to the second game round. It is possible to add surprise to the game by making the player recognize that the game has been executed. Further, when at least part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced, the ready-to-win effect in the second game round is executed in the second special game state. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to appreciate the ready-to-win performance again in the game round. Furthermore, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition will be met, and a case where it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect that has already been executed When it is executed, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect that has already been executed, but in reality, it is executed because the special information related to the game round meets a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature group E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature E1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
Production execution means for executing production in each game round;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition. (In the case of case d1 in the fourth embodiment),
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced,
After execution of the effect in the first game round and before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round in the second game round, already executed A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive performance suggesting reproduction of the performance.

According to the feature E1, although the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the second game round. Since at least a part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Further, by executing the suggestive effect before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round, in the second game round, at least the effect executed in the first game round It is possible to further give the player the recognition that only a part of the image is reproduced. Then, the game player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition only after the result of determination of the special information related to the second game round is reported by the reporting means. can add surprise to In other words, by making the second game turn unanticipated by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
The production executing means is
In addition to the case where the special information relating to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
When the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition (case d2 in the fourth embodiment) )Also,
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced,
After execution of the effect in the first game round and before the reproduction in the second game round, a suggestive effect suggesting reproduction of the already executed effect is executed. game machine.

According to the feature E2, even if the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since at least part of the performance performed in one game round is reproduced, the player can be given recognition that the special information related to the reproduced game round does not necessarily satisfy a predetermined condition. . As a result, when at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced, the player is given an uplifting mood and a sense of anticipation, and the player's impression of the game round in which the reproduction is executed. Attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further comprising:
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The production executing means is
When the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment). for,
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestive effect is executed after the start of the special game state executed after the first game round and before the reproduction in the second game round.

According to the feature E3, when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, so that it is executed in the first game round. The performance is reproduced in the second game cycle. Therefore, only when the notifying means reports that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round. However, in reality, it is possible to add surprise to the game by making the player recognize that the special information relating to the second game round was executed due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition. can. In addition, it is possible to improve the degree of attention, interest, and anticipation of the player for the reproduction of the effect. Furthermore, when at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced because the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the player receives a privilege. is started, it is possible to further improve the expectation of the player for the reproduction of the effect.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to the player,
A gaming machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a ready-to-win effect, which is a effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature E4, when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the ready-to-win effect executed in the first game round is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, the ready-to-win effect, which was executed as reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round in terms of the effect, is actually the fact that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Unexpectedness can be imparted to the game by making the player recognize that the game has been executed due to the above. In addition, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, at least one of a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is met and a case where the effect is executed in the first game cycle. In the case where it is executed as a reproduction of a part, and in terms of performance, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the performance executed in the first game round. At least three cases can be set, one being executed due to fulfillment. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The production executing means is
If there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestive effect is executed in the other game round.

According to the feature E5, even if there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round, by executing the suggestive effect in the other game round, the suggestive effect and the The reproduction can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature E6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least part of the effect executed in the game round before the first game round and at least part of the effect executed in the first game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E6, even when continuous performance is executed from the game round before the first game round to the first game round, the continuous production can be reproduced. .

The inventions of the feature group A, feature group B, feature group C, feature group D, and feature group E solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various game states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include, for example, effects that are executed with low frequency, such as ready-to-win effects that are executed with a low probability and effects that are executed only when a big win lottery is won. Such effects that are executed with a low frequency may be desired to be reproduced by the player for the purpose of appreciation after being executed once. Conventionally, in order to meet such demands of players, gaming machines are known that execute an effect that reproduces an effect that has been executed once.

Here, in the gaming machine as described above, there is a demand for further improvement in technology for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Feature group F>
The feature group F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature F1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
an image display means for displaying an image as a production;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. is displayed on the image display means (object A, object B, and object C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a),
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, it is displayed on the image display means in a manner related to the second image (in S3205 of the fifth embodiment). , by referring to the arrangement/timing table, each object is set and displayed in a manner having relevance / In S3305 of the sixth embodiment, each object is displayed in a manner having relevance display each object based on each display pattern table set to
A gaming machine characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art There are gaming machines that display an image on an image display means and execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game to a player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. Also, these images are displayed under different conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap. A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the . As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the presentation is complicated.

According to the feature F1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, it is displayed in a manner related to the second image. The effect executed by being displayed during the period (the same period) where the second image overlaps does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or in a period not overlapping with the second image. A rendering of the mode can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
A gaming machine, wherein the related aspect includes an aspect in which the first image and the second image are associated with each other and have a narrative.

According to the feature F2, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image and the second image are related and displayed in a manner having a story. Therefore, the effect that is executed by displaying the first image and the second image during the period in which the first image and the second image are overlapped (the same period) can be made to feel comfortable to the player. In addition, the effect that is executed by being displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap each other has a narrative effect, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is
Different from the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap (fifth embodiment) S3203 in / S3305 in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature F3, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or in a period not overlapping with the second image. Since it suggests, the first image can be used to perform a plurality of different modes of rendering, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage differs depending on whether or not it is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with other images, so the degree of attention of the player to the effect. , interest and expectations can be improved.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games (process of S3203 of the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature F4, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of various types of games using an image.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
The control means is
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. display and
A gaming machine, wherein when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

According to the feature F5, it is possible to make the effect of the first image and the second image feel comfortable to the player.

[Feature F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature F6, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Characteristic group G>
A group of features G is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature G1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
Expectation image storage means for storing an expectation image that is an image that changes over time;
image display means for displaying the expectation level image as a production;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The expectation degree image storage means
a first expectation image;
a second expectation image;
remember the
The control means is
When displaying the first degree-of-expectation image on the image display means;
a case where the second expectation image is displayed on the image display means;
A first partial image obtained by extracting an image that constitutes at least a partial period of the first expectation image in the time axis direction, and at least a partial period of the second expectation image in the time axis direction. displaying on the image display means a third expectation image, which is the expectation image obtained by combining the second partial image obtained by extracting the image to
there is
Define a probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the first degree of expectation image is displayed by the control means as a first probability,
A probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the second expectation image is displayed by the control means is defined as a second probability,
When the third probability is defined as the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the third expectation image is displayed by the control means,
The control means is configured such that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability,
Displaying the first expectation level image, the second expectation level image or the third expectation level image on the image display means (displaying using the display pattern table in the fifth embodiment/sixth embodiment) display using the display pattern table in
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G1, as the expectation images displayed on the image display means, in addition to the first expectation image and the second expectation image, the first partial image and the second partial image have a relationship. Since the third expectation level image combined in the mode is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the first expectation level image and the second expectation level image. Since the third expectation level image is an expectation level image in which the first partial image and the second partial image are combined in a manner having relevance, it does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the effect is enhanced. quality can be improved. The image display means displays the first expectation image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image such that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability. , the player's attention to the expectation degree image can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, in a plurality of different display modes displaying a third degree of expectation image on the image display means;
The third probability is different for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G2, when extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, a plurality of different displays can be obtained. Since it is possible to display the third degree-of-expectation image on the image display means in various modes, it is possible to execute various effects using the third degree-of-expectation image. In addition, since the third probability differs for each of a plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the third expectation degree image, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, in a plurality of different display modes displaying a third degree of expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are:
It is set in advance for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image (the arrangement position of each object is set in advance for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from the third expectation image. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superimposed and displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image without any relation. Therefore, each effect using the third expectation level image in a plurality of different display modes does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, in a plurality of different display modes displaying a third degree of expectation image on the image display means;
Relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from the plurality of the third expectation images. It is set in advance for each display mode (the display timing of each object is set in advance for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G4, the relative display timing of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is determined by a plurality of different third expectation images. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image as the third expectation degree image are not displayed on the image display means at unrelated timings. Therefore, each effect using the third expectation level image in a plurality of different display modes does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

<Characteristic group H>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature H1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
an image display means for displaying an image as a production;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. , is displayed on the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, an arrangement position whose relative position is predetermined relative to the second image (arrangement/ A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the arrangement position determined by the timing table/the arrangement position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

2. Description of the Related Art There are gaming machines that display an image on an image display means and execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game to a player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. Also, these images are displayed under different conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap. A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the . As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the presentation is complicated.

According to the feature H1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping (same period) as the second image, the first image is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the second image. is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the performance executed by displaying the first image and the second image during the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player and improves the quality of the performance. can be done. In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or in a period not overlapping with the second image. A rendering of the mode can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
The control means is
Displaying the first image on the image display means in a period overlapping the second image in a plurality of different display modes,
According to each of the plurality of different display modes, the first image is arranged at a predetermined position relative to the second image (in the display/pattern table in the sixth embodiment, A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at a set layout position).

According to feature H2, the first image is displayed in a plurality of different display modes during a period overlapping (same period) as the second image. can perform the performance. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means at an arrangement position relative to the second image at a predetermined position. , the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, various effects executed by being displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap (the same period) do not give a complicated impression to the player, and improve the quality of the effects. can be made

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2,
When displaying the first image in a period overlapping with the second image, the control means controls a predetermined timing relative to the second image ( A gaming machine characterized in that the image is displayed on the image display means at the display timing determined by the layout/timing table/the display timing set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

According to feature H3, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping (same period) as the second image, the first image is displayed at predetermined timing relative to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are never displayed at unrelated timings. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and furthermore, the quality of the effect is improved. can be done.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when it is not displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is
Different from the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table in / Display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature H4, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game differs between when the first image is displayed during a period when it overlaps with the second image and when it is displayed when it does not overlap with the second image. Since it suggests, the first image can be used to execute a plurality of different aspects of effects with different degrees of advantage/disadvantage in the game, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage differs depending on whether or not it is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with other images, so the degree of attention of the player to the effect. , interest and expectations can be improved. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position relative to the second image. A high performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature H5, each of the effects consisting of the first image, the effects consisting of the second image, and the effects consisting of the first and second images suggests the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage in various types of games depending on how a plurality of images are combined.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
The control means is
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. display and
A game machine, wherein when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

According to the feature H6, it is possible to make the effect of the first image and the second image feel comfortable to the player.

[Feature H7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature H7, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Characteristic group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature I1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
an image display means for displaying an image as a production;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. , is displayed on the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the predetermined timing relative to the second image (in the arrangement/timing table in the fifth embodiment) A gaming machine characterized in that the image is displayed on the image display means at the determined display timing/the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

2. Description of the Related Art There are gaming machines that display an image on an image display means and execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game to a player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. Also, these images are displayed under different conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap. A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the . As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the presentation is complicated. The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage for the player in the state of the game cycle determined based on the special information. For example, in a pachinko machine, the state of the game round is advantageous to the player, such as the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, the expectation of the variable probability jackpot, the expectation of the variable probability state of the game round, etc. indicates the degree to which the

According to feature I1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed at predetermined timing relative to the second image. The first image and the second image are never displayed at irrelevant timings. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and furthermore, the quality of the effect is improved. can be done. In addition, since the first image may be displayed during a period overlapping (the same period as) the second image or during a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is used. A plurality of different modes of rendering can be executed using the first image, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
The control means arranges the first image at a predetermined layout position relative to the second image (the layout position determined by the layout/timing table in the fifth embodiment/the second image). A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the arrangement position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

According to the feature I2, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping (same period) as the second image, the arrangement position relative to the second image is predetermined. is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the performance executed by displaying the first image and the second image during the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player and improves the quality of the performance. can be done.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is
Different from the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table in / Display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature I3, the degree of advantage or disadvantage in the game differs between when the first image is displayed during a period when it overlaps with the second image and when it is displayed when it does not overlap with the second image. Since it suggests, the first image can be used to execute a plurality of different aspects of effects with different degrees of advantage/disadvantage in the game, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage differs depending on whether or not it is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with other images, so the degree of attention of the player to the effect. , interest and expectations can be improved. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position relative to the second image. A high performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature I4, each of the effects consisting of the first image, the effects consisting of the second image, and the effects consisting of the first and second images suggests the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage in various types of games depending on how a plurality of images are combined.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The control means is
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. display and
A gaming machine, wherein when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to make the effect of the first image and the second image feel comfortable to the player.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature I6, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Characteristic group J>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature J1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
an image storage means for storing an image that enables a player to recognize advantages and disadvantages in a game situation;
an image display means for displaying the image as a performance;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
displaying on the image display means the first image stored in the image storage means, the first image enabling the player to recognize the advantage or disadvantage of the game situation;
A combined image in which the first image is combined with a second image different from the first image, and is recognition of an advantage or disadvantage in a game situation without being combined with the second image. Displaying on the image display means a combined image that enables the player to recognize a different recognition from the recognition given to the player when the first image is displayed (in the fifth and sixth embodiments, , the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing the appearance of a dog sticking its head out of the box, giving the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. A display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) in which object B is combined with object C is a display pattern showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to bad weather. Giving players the recognition that they are at a disadvantage/Modification 15)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature J1, when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, the recognition given to the player regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the game, and the first image and the second image. When the images are combined and displayed on the image display means, it is possible to change the perception given to the player as to the advantage or disadvantage of the game. images can be used effectively. Note that the game status is based on the game status, for example, whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, or whether the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high. say the situation.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
When the first image is displayed in combination with the second image, the control means adjusts the relative position between the first image and the second image according to the game situation. (set to the layout position determined by the layout/timing table in the fifth embodiment/set to the layout position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) and display on the image display means Characteristic game machine.

According to feature J2, the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means. can be used to provide the player with various perceptions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
When displaying the first image in combination with the second image, the control means controls the relative timing of display on the image display means between the first image and the second image. is set according to the game situation (set to the display timing determined by the arrangement/timing table in the fifth embodiment/set to the display timing set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the image display means.

According to the feature J3, the relative timing of displaying the first image and the second image on the image display means is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means. Using the image and the second image, it is possible to give the player various recognitions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to execute various effects by using an image that changes over time.

<Characteristic group K>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature K1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image and a third image;
an image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image by the control means. (Image C3 in the sixth embodiment, in which the dog's face emerges from the box) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. Despite giving favorable recognition,
By the control means, the first image (image C1 of the box in the sixth embodiment) is combined with the third image (image B3 of rain in the sixth embodiment) to display the image display means. , the second image (the image of the dog sticking out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ) in combination with the image display means to give the player more advantageous recognition of the game situation than when it is displayed on the image display means.

According to the feature K1, the player is more likely to see the second image displayed without combination with the third image than when the first image is displayed without combination with the third image. Displaying the first image in combination with the third image is better than displaying the second image in combination with the third image, despite providing an advantageous perception of the game situation. , gives the player an advantageous perception of the playing situation. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects depending on how the images are combined. Further, even when the player recognizes the first image and the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the state of the game differs depending on whether or not the third image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the image displayed on the image display means.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (object C that changes with time in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3), which is an image that changes with time;
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images that form at least a part of the period of the first temporal change image in the time axis direction. game machine.

According to the feature K2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first time-varying image. By extracting the image and combining it with the third image, further various effects can be executed.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The control means is
a first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by having

According to the feature K3, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, or not. Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to feature K3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1) The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect is displayed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature K4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is not displayed without being combined with the third image (first case). The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the special information is displayed (second case). Thus, in a first case in which the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, followed by a second case in which the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition, and to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to perform various effects.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time;
The gaming machine, wherein the third image (image B3) is a partial image that forms at least a partial period of the second time-varying image in the direction of the time axis.

According to the feature K5, the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the period of the second time-varying image in the direction of the time axis. can be executed. For example, when displaying a combination of the first image, the second image, and the second time-varying image, the third image, which is part of the second time-varying image, may be the first image or the second time-varying image. If it is displayed in the same period as the image of 2, it can change the player's perception of the game situation.

<Characteristic group L>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature L1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image and a third image;
an image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image by the control means. In the case where (the image of the dog showing its face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability that
By the control means, the first image (image C1 of the box in the sixth embodiment) is combined with the third image (image B3 of rain in the sixth embodiment) to display the image display means. , the second image (the image of the dog sticking out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than when the special information is displayed on the image display means in combination with the special information.

According to the feature L1, when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the special information is more specific than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Although the probability that the condition is satisfied is high, the case where the first image is displayed in combination with the third image is higher than the case where the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. There is a high probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the third image is displayed.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (object C that changes with time in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3), which is an image that changes with time;
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images that form at least a part of the period in the time-axis direction of the first temporal change image. game machine.

According to the feature L2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first time-varying image, so the first time-varying image is displayed. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the third image is displayed.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
The control means is
a first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by having

According to feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, or not. Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to feature L3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1) The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect is displayed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, when the second image is not displayed without being combined with the third image (first case) The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the special information is displayed (second case). Thus, in a first case in which the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, followed by a second case in which the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition, and to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to perform various effects.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time;
The gaming machine, wherein the third image (image B3) is a partial image that forms at least a partial period of the second time-varying image in the direction of the time axis.

According to feature L5, the third image is a partial image that forms at least a part of the period in the direction of the time axis of the second time-varying image. can be executed. For example, when displaying a combination of the first image, the second image, and the second time-varying image, the third image, which is part of the second time-varying image, may be the first image or the second time-varying image. If it is displayed in the same period as the image of 2, it can change the player's perception of the game situation.

The inventions of the feature group F, the feature G group, the feature group H, the feature group I, the feature group J, the feature group K, and the feature group L solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various game states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine that displays an object image on image display means and executes an effect that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such object images are prepared, and each object image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game.

Here, in the gaming machine as described above, there is a demand for further improvement in technology for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic group M>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature M1]
acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition;
image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
sound output means for outputting moving image corresponding sound (background music), which is sound corresponding to the first moving image, in a first output mode (mode of outputting background music at a predetermined volume);
The image display means is shifted from the first display mode to the second display mode (the mode for displaying the demonstration moving image), and the sound output means is changed from the first output mode to the second output mode (for background music). a transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for transitioning to the mode in which the output is stopped), is satisfied;
return condition determination means for determining whether a return condition, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode and returning the sound output means to the first output mode, is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The image display means transitions from the first display mode to the second display mode,
the sound output means transitions from the first output mode to the second output mode;
When the return condition is met after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode,
The image display means returns to the first display mode and, when displaying the first moving image as the first display mode, displays the first moving image from a predetermined temporal position. and start
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the sound corresponding to the moving picture from a predetermined temporal position when outputting the sound corresponding to the moving picture in the first output mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature M1, after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, if the return condition is met, the image display means When returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image, and the sound output means is in the first output mode. , outputting the moving image corresponding sound is started from a predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound. Therefore, after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image display means is switched to the second output mode according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. Compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of one moving image is started varies, the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image can be easily synchronized. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first moving image changes according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied, for example, after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the return is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the first moving image is displayed from the temporal position of the first moving image that was displayed immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and the image display means is the first moving image. When returning from the display mode of 2 to the first display mode, the temporal position of the first moving image to start displaying is determined based on the elapsed time after shifting to the second display mode. Even after the display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as internal processing, and when returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, may be a configuration for displaying the first moving image that is continuously reproduced as internal processing.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means transitions from the first output mode to the second output mode through a reduction mode in which the volume of the moving picture corresponding sound is reduced over time while continuing to output the moving picture corresponding sound. death,
the image display means transitions from the first display mode to the second display mode after the timing at which the sound output means transitions to the second output mode;
When the return condition is satisfied during the period in which the sound output means is in the reduction mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume of the first output mode.

According to the characteristic M2, when the return condition is satisfied during the period of the reduction mode, the image display means continues the first display mode, and the sound output means restores the volume of the sound corresponding to the moving image to return to the first display mode. Since the output mode is restored, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is established in a natural flow without discomfort while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means converts the moving image corresponding sound from the first output mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a first volume to a second volume smaller than the first volume. transition to the second output mode of outputting at a volume of
The image display means shifts to the second display mode after a predetermined time has elapsed after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode,
After the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and before the image display means shifts to the second display mode, if the return condition is satisfied,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sound output means restores the first output mode by returning the sound volume of the motion picture corresponding sound to the first sound volume.

According to feature M3, when the return condition is established after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and before the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image display The means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means restores the first output mode by returning the volume of the sound corresponding to the moving image to the volume of the first volume. Therefore, while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image, it is possible to return to the state before the transition condition is established in a natural flow without discomfort.

[Feature M4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3,
the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal head position of the first moving image;
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound is a temporal head position of the moving image corresponding sound.

According to feature M4, after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the return condition is satisfied, and the first display mode and When returning to the first output mode, display is started from the temporal head position of the first moving image, and output is started from the temporal head position of the sound corresponding to the moving image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player compared to a configuration in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the first moving image and output is started from a temporally middle position of the sound corresponding to the moving image. can be done. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the first moving image and output is started from a temporally middle position of the sound corresponding to the moving image, the player will not be able to satisfy the return condition. After that, the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image are viewed from a position in the middle of time. may feel ugly. In contrast, according to the feature M4, the player can appreciate the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image from the temporal head position, so that the player can be less uncomfortable. At the same time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image can all be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4,
The second display mode includes a mode in which a second moving picture different from the first moving picture is displayed, a mode in which at least part of the first moving picture is stopped and displayed, and a mode in which the first moving picture is not displayed. A mode in which a still image different from the first moving image is displayed, or a mode in which the moving image and the still image are hidden,
The first output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a volume of a first volume,
The second output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a volume of a second volume smaller than the volume of the first volume, or a mode in which the output of the moving image corresponding sound is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature M5, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition has been established and the image display means and the sound output means have transitioned to the second display mode and the second output mode, respectively.

[Feature M6]
The gaming machine according to feature M5,
A gaming machine, wherein the volume of the second magnitude is equal to or less than a volume that cannot be recognized by the player.

According to the feature M6, when the sound output means shifts to the second output mode, the volume of the sound corresponding to the moving image becomes equal to or less than the volume that the player cannot recognize, so the transition condition is satisfied and the sound is output. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the means has already transitioned to the second output mode.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6,
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state advantageous to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
After the game cycle in which the display corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means is completed, the transition condition determination means determines that a predetermined time has elapsed without starting either the special game state or the next game cycle. A gaming machine characterized in that it determines that the transition condition is established when the transition condition is satisfied.

If a predetermined period of time elapses after the game round ends without starting either the special game state or the next game round, there is a high possibility that the player has not played a game in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to the feature M7, the transition condition can be established in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

[Feature M8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M7,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that a game ball has been ejected onto the game board,
The game machine, wherein the transition condition determination means determines that the transition condition is established when the game ball is not detected by the detection means for a predetermined period of time.

According to the feature M8, if the game ball is ejected onto the game board, the transition condition is not satisfied. Occurrence can be reduced.

[Feature M9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8,
The game machine, wherein the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is met when the acquisition means acquires the special information after the transition condition is met.

According to feature M9, when the special information is acquired, the image display means returns to the first display mode and the sound output means returns to the first output mode. can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature M10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M9,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that a game ball has been ejected onto the game board,
The game machine, wherein the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the detection means after the transition condition is satisfied.

According to the feature M10, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected onto the game board. It is possible to reduce the unpleasant situation for the player that the game does not hold for a long time (for example, 1 minute).

<Characteristic N group>
The N groups of features are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature N1]
Image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
As a first output mode, sound output means for outputting moving image corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image at a predetermined output level;
a command receiving means for receiving a command;
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means is in another display mode (a mode for displaying a demonstration video) in which continuity with the predetermined moving picture is cut off, and the sound output means is in a state where continuity with the sound corresponding to the moving picture is cut off. identification information storage means for storing identification information (cue determination flag) that can identify a specific mode, which is another output mode (a mode in which output of background music is stopped);
Judgment means for judging whether or not the specific mode is achieved based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means when the command receiving means receives a specific command (return condition satisfaction command). and,
with
When the command receiving means receives the specific command and the determining means determines that the specific mode is applied based on the identification information (when the mode is from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 11) teeth,
The image display means returns to the first display mode and starts displaying the predetermined moving image from a predetermined temporal position (FIG. 11),
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound from a predetermined temporal position (FIG. 11).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature N1, when the image display means is restored to the first display mode and the sound output means is restored to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display means starts displaying. Since the time positions at which the sound output means and the sound output means start outputting the sound corresponding to the moving picture are respectively predetermined, synchronization between the predetermined moving picture and the sound corresponding to the moving picture can be easily performed.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
A case where the command receiving means receives the specific command and the determining means determines that the specific mode is not the specific mode based on the identification information, and the image displaying means has no continuity with the predetermined moving image. In the case of the maintained display mode (the mode from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 11),
The image display means returns to the first display mode and continuously displays the predetermined moving image in a mode in which continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13);
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and outputs the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image whose continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature N2, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the display mode in which the continuity with the predetermined moving image is maintained, the image display means is returned to the first display mode. continues to display a predetermined moving image in a manner in which continuity is maintained, and the sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the moving image corresponding to the predetermined moving image in which continuity is maintained, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. , the image display means can be returned to the first display mode, and the sound output means can be returned to the first output mode.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2,
the predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image is a temporal head position of the predetermined moving image;
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound is a temporal head position of the moving image corresponding sound.

According to feature N3, when the image display means is restored to the first display mode and the sound output means is restored to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display means starts displaying Since the temporal position at which the sound output means and the sound output means start outputting the sound corresponding to the moving image is the temporal head position respectively, the display starts in the middle of the predetermined moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image starts in the middle. As compared with the case where the image display means and the sound output means execute the processing, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3,
The gaming machine, wherein the other display mode is a mode in which the image display means displays an image different from the predetermined moving image, or a mode in which image display is stopped.

According to feature N4, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode from the specific mode, the other display mode as the specific mode before returning to the first display mode is different from the predetermined moving image. Since it is a mode in which an image is displayed or a mode in which the display of an image is stopped, it is possible to return to the first display mode and start displaying a predetermined moving image from a predetermined temporal position. , the discomfort given to the player can be reduced. Note that images include moving images and still images.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4,
The other output mode includes a mode in which the sound output means outputs a sound different from the sound corresponding to the moving image, and a mode in which the sound output means outputs the moving image corresponding or the other sound at an output level that cannot be recognized by the player. or a mode in which the sound output means stops outputting.

According to the feature N5, when the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the other output mode as the specific mode before returning to the first output mode is different from the moving image corresponding sound. Since it is a mode in which other sounds are being output, a mode in which moving images or other sounds are being output at an output level unrecognizable by the player, or a mode in which output is stopped, the first output mode is selected. Even if the output of moving image corresponding sound corresponding to a predetermined moving image whose display is started from a predetermined time position is resumed and output is started, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

<Characteristic group O>
The feature group O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature O1]
acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Elapsed time determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed;
image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 80, demonstration moving image in the example shown in FIG. 81) as a first display mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means is
When the elapsed time determining means determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, the first display mode is shifted to the second display mode (the mode for displaying the RTC effect moving image) (FIGS. 80 and 81). ),
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode has ended, the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, and the first display mode is changed to the first display mode. When displaying one moving image, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image (FIGS. 80 and 81).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature O1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode is over, the display mode is changed from the second display mode to the first display mode, and then returned to the first display mode. When displaying the first moving image, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. Therefore, control can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started varies when the first moving image is displayed after transitioning to the first display mode. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which display of the first moving image is started when shifting to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image is changed, for example, the predetermined display mode of the second display mode can be used. When the display period ends, the display of the first moving image is started from the temporal position of the first moving image that was displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and the image display means A configuration that determines the temporal position of the first moving image at which display is started when the transition from the second display mode to the first display mode is based on the elapsed time after the transition to the second display mode and even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as internal processing, and the display mode is shifted from the second display mode to the first display mode. In some cases, a configuration for displaying the first moving image that is continuously reproduced as internal processing may be used.

Further, when a plurality of gaming machines having the feature O1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially at the same time in each gaming machine and shifts to the first display mode. When the game machine shifts to the first display mode and displays the first moving image, the display starts from the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the first moving images displayed in each game machine are synchronized, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for transitioning the image display means to a third display mode (mode for displaying a demonstration video), is established;
The image display means is
When the transition condition is satisfied during the first display mode (during the background moving image display mode), the satisfaction of the transition condition triggers a shift to the third display mode (FIG. 11),
When the transition condition is established during the second display mode (while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed), the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends. Transition to the third display mode (Fig. 82),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when shifting to the third display mode and displaying a third moving image (demonstration moving image), display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the third moving image.

According to feature O2, even if the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is displayed in advance. Since the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the predetermined display period, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player and improve the interest in the game.

Further, when a plurality of gaming machines having the characteristic O2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially at the same time in each gaming machine and shifts to the third display mode. When the game machine shifts to the third display mode and displays the third moving image, it starts displaying the third moving image from a predetermined temporal position. videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the third moving images displayed on each gaming machine are synchronized, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to feature O2,
Return condition determination means for determining whether or not a return condition, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode (a mode for displaying a background moving image), is satisfied;
The image display means is
When the return condition is satisfied during the third display mode (during the mode of displaying the demo video), the satisfaction of the return condition triggers the return to the first display mode (FIG. 11),
When the return condition is established during the second display mode (during the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image), the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends. Returning to the first display mode (Fig. 83),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, display of the first moving image is started from the predetermined temporal position.

According to the feature O3, even if the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is displayed in advance. Triggered by the end of the predetermined display period, the display mode is returned to the first display mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal head position of the first moving image.

According to feature O4, compared to a configuration in which display is started from a position in the middle of time of the first moving image when shifting to or returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the It is possible to reduce discomfort given to the person. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a position in the temporal middle of the first moving image when shifting to or returning to the first display mode to display the first moving image, the player may Since the first moving image is to be viewed from a position in the middle of the time, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity or feel unsatisfied that there is a portion of the first moving image that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to feature O4, the player can be made to watch the first moving image from the temporal start position. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he/she can appreciate all of the moving images from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4,
A sound output means for outputting a sound corresponding to a moving image, which is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display means,
The sound output means outputs a first moving image corresponding sound (background A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined temporal position of music).

According to the feature O5, the display of the first moving image and the output of the first sound corresponding to the moving image are easily synchronized compared to the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the sound corresponding to the first moving image is started varies. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the output of the sound corresponding to the first moving image is started to change, for example, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the image display means changes the output of the first moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the image display means shifts from the temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before shifting to the second display mode to the first position. The configuration for starting the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image and the temporal position of the first sound corresponding to the moving image at which the output is started when shifting to the mode of outputting the first sound corresponding to the moving image is displayed by the image display means as a second display. A configuration determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode, and the reproduction of the first moving image corresponding sound is continued as internal processing even after the image display means transitions from the first display mode to the second display mode. In addition, when the image display means shifts or returns from the second display mode to the first display mode, there is a configuration for outputting the first moving image corresponding sound that is continuously reproduced as an internal process. .

[Feature O6]
The gaming machine according to feature O5,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound is a temporal head position of the first moving image corresponding sound.

According to the feature O6, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player compared to the configuration in which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound is started at a position in the middle of time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output of the first moving image-related sound is started from a position in the middle of time, the player will be able to appreciate the first sound corresponding to the moving image from a position in the middle of time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity, or may feel unsatisfactory that there is a part of the first moving image corresponding sound that has not been appreciated. On the other hand, according to the feature O6, the player can appreciate the first motion picture corresponding sound from the temporal head position, so that the player can feel less discomfort. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he/she can appreciate all of the first motion picture corresponding sound from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image is a temporal head position of the third moving image.

According to feature O7, compared to a configuration in which display is started from a position in the middle of time of the third moving image when shifting to the third display mode and displaying the third moving image, It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the third moving image when shifting to the third display mode and displaying the third moving image, the player will not be able to display the third moving image. Since the video is to be viewed from a position in the middle of the time, the user may feel a sense of incongruity or feel unsatisfied that there is a portion of the third video that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to feature O7, the player can be allowed to watch the third moving image from the temporal start position. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he/she can appreciate all of the moving images from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O4,
A sound output means for outputting a sound corresponding to a moving image, which is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display means,
When the image display means starts displaying the third moving image from the predetermined temporal position, the sound output means outputs a third moving image corresponding sound (demo A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined temporal position of music).

According to the feature O8, the display of the third moving image and the output of the third moving image corresponding sound are easily synchronized compared to the configuration in which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started to be changed in time. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the output of the sound corresponding to the third moving image is started to change, for example, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the image display means displays the third moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the image display means shifts from the temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before shifting to the second display mode to the third position. The configuration for starting the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image and the temporal position of the third sound corresponding to the moving image at which the output is started when the output of the third sound corresponding to the moving image is shifted to the second display by the image display means. A configuration determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode, and even after the image display means transitions from the third display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the third moving image corresponding sound is continued as internal processing In addition, when the image display means shifts from the second display mode to the third display mode, a configuration for outputting the third moving image corresponding sound that is continuously reproduced as internal processing may be used.

[Feature O9]
The gaming machine according to feature O8,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound is a temporal head position of the third moving image corresponding sound.

According to the feature O9, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player compared to the configuration in which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started at a position in the middle of time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started at a position in the middle of time, the player will be able to appreciate the third sound corresponding to the moving image from the middle position in time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity, or may feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the third moving image corresponding sound that has not been appreciated. On the other hand, according to the feature O9, the player can appreciate the third moving image corresponding sound from the temporal start position, so that the player can feel less discomfort. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he/she can appreciate all of the third motion picture corresponding sound from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The inventions of the feature group M, the feature group N, and the feature group O solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed for the purpose of improving the interest of games. For example, there is known a game machine that displays a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and outputs music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker.

Here, in the gaming machine as described above, there is a demand for further improvement in technology for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.

[Feature P1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a ball entry section into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined specified number as an upper limit;
determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A number of pending displays (holding displays Dm11 to Dm14 and pending displays Dm21 to Dm24 in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means are displayed in a predetermined display mode. In addition, pending display means (holding effect content determination processing in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment) for changing the display mode of the displayed pending display;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Before the suspension display means changes the display mode of the suspension display, a suggestive effect (FIGS. 89, 90, 100, and 105) suggesting that the display mode of the suspension display is changed is executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, the number of games to be played has been indicated to the player by displaying a pending display. However, regarding the hold display, further improvement of the technique is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

According to the feature P1, prior to changing the display mode of the pending display, the suggesting effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display is changed is executed. It is possible to make the person pay attention and to give a sense of expectation.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to feature P1,
The effect executing means selects the suggestive effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared in accordance with an object whose display mode is to be changed by the pending display means among the displayed pending displays. Hold effect content determination processing in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature P2, the suggestive effect to be executed is selected in accordance with the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which of the pending displays is different.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The display mode of the hold display is
In addition to suggesting the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display satisfies the predetermined condition, a plurality of stages of display modes from high to low are set according to the degree of the possibility, and the hold Suggesting that the special information corresponding to the pending display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means
Determining the display mode of the pending display based on special information corresponding to the pending display,
When changing the display mode of the pending display, the more the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information determined by the determining means later in the displayed pending display, the more the pending display is changed. The display mode of the pending display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased (Figs. 92, 97, and 98 , Fig. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by:

When the pending display is displayed, the shorter the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the pending display is determined by the determining means, the less the opportunity for the display mode to change. In other words, the pending display corresponding to the special information whose order is first determined by the determining means among the displayed pending displays is determined later by the determining means among the displayed pending displays. The remaining time to be displayed is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information, and the possibility of changing the display mode is low. Therefore, when the display mode of the pending display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the pending display corresponding to the special information that is determined by the determination means first among the displayed pending displays. hope to However, contrary to the wishes of the player, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information determined later by the determination means among the displayed pending displays may change. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is lowered.

According to feature P3, when the display mode of the pending display is changed, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information determined by the determining means later in the displayed pending display is changed. The display mode of the suspension display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the suspension display increases as the display mode of the suspension display changes. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the pending display determined by the determination means in the displayed pending display changes relatively later, the pending display is changed. Since the gradual width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation, and rather to further increase the expectation. It can give you a feeling.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The display mode of the hold display is
In addition to suggesting the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display satisfies the predetermined condition, a plurality of stages of display modes from high to low are set according to the degree of the possibility, and the hold Suggesting that the special information corresponding to the pending display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means
Determining the display mode of the pending display based on special information corresponding to the pending display,
When changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information subject to the determination by the determination means precedes the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. also change to the display mode of the upper stage (Fig. 101, Fig. 103, Fig. 104)
A gaming machine characterized by:

When there is already a suspended display whose display mode has changed, and the player wishes to change the display mode to a higher-level display mode for that suspended display, the player requests a change in the display mode of a specific suspended display. may wish to do so. However, contrary to the desire of the player, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determining means changes after the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode the player desires to change. Sometimes. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature P4, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means precedes the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. is changed to a display mode of a higher stage than the display mode of . Therefore, if, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is displayed after the special information corresponding to the pending display for which the player wishes to change the display mode. Even in the case of change, the suspended display whose display mode is changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the suspended display for which the player wishes to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation is lowered. can be suppressed, and rather, a further sense of expectation can be imparted.

[Feature P5]
A gaming machine according to feature P3 or feature P4,
The production execution unit
When executing the suggestive effect, depending on the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed by the pending display means to select a suggestive effect to be executed from a plurality of prepared suggestive effects (eighth embodiment to tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature P5, a plurality of types of suggestive effects are prepared according to the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Since the suggestive effect to be executed is selected from among them, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the pending display, and in addition, before the display mode of the pending display changes, the suggestive effect is displayed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player also for the type of effect to be executed.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.

[Feature Q1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a ball entry section into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined specified number as an upper limit;
determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
pending display means for displaying a number of pending displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The holding display means
When determining the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display is determined based on special information corresponding to another pending display different from the pending display whose display mode is to be determined (eighth embodiment to the tenth embodiment, and modification 28)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature Q1, when determining the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display is determined based on special information corresponding to another pending display different from the pending display whose display mode is to be determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about game rounds corresponding to other pending indications (hereinafter also referred to as pending game rounds) by using the pending indications whose display modes have been determined. For example, when determining the display mode of the pending display, the special information corresponding to the pending display for which the display mode is to be determined is given to the player more than the special information to be determined by the determining means prior to the special information. When it is advantageous, in addition to the information of the pending display itself whose display mode is determined, such as determining the display mode of the pending display whose display mode is to be determined to a specific display mode, in addition to the information of the other pending display Information can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one pending display, the player can not only guess the outcome of one pending game round corresponding to the pending display, but also perform other actions before and after that. Various speculations are also made about the return trend of the pending game times. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game by using the display mode of the hold display, to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The holding display means
It is possible to change the display mode of the displayed pending display,
When changing the display mode of the pending display, based on the special information corresponding to the other pending display different from the pending display to change the display mode, after the change of the pending display to change the display mode Determining the Display Mode (Eighth to Tenth Embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic Q2, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the pending display of the target whose display mode is to be changed is based on the special information corresponding to the other pending display different from the pending display of the target whose display mode is to be changed. Since the display mode after the change of the display is determined, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the pending game round corresponding to the other pending display by using the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. For example, the change of the pending display of the object whose display mode is to be changed based on the special information corresponding to the pending display of the pending game time to be executed prior to the pending display corresponding to the pending display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. By determining the subsequent display mode, the following game features can be realized. As an example, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means precedes the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. can also be changed to a higher level display mode (a display mode that is advantageous to the player). As described above, according to the feature Q2, it is possible to create various new game features and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine according to feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display is
In addition to suggesting the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display satisfies the predetermined condition, a plurality of stages of display modes from high to low are set according to the degree of the possibility, and the hold Suggesting that the special information corresponding to the pending display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means
Determining the display mode of the pending display based on special information corresponding to the pending display,
When changing the display mode of the pending display, the more the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information determined by the determining means later in the displayed pending display, the more the pending display is changed. The display mode of the pending display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased (Figs. 92, 97, and 98 , Fig. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by:

When the pending display is displayed, the shorter the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the pending display is determined by the determining means, the less the opportunity for the display mode to change. In other words, the pending display corresponding to the special information whose order is first determined by the determining means among the displayed pending displays is determined later by the determining means among the displayed pending displays. The remaining time to be displayed is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information, and the possibility of changing the display mode is low. Therefore, when the display mode of the pending display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the pending display corresponding to the special information that is determined by the determination means first among the displayed pending displays. hope to However, contrary to the wishes of the player, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information determined later by the determination means among the displayed pending displays may change. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature Q3, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information determined by the determining means later in the displayed pending display is changed. The display mode of the suspension display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the suspension display increases as the display mode of the suspension display changes. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the pending display determined by the determination means in the displayed pending display changes relatively later, the pending display is changed. Since the gradual width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation, and rather to further increase the expectation. It can give you a feeling.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display is
In addition to suggesting the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display satisfies the predetermined condition, a plurality of stages of display modes from high to low are set according to the degree of the possibility, and the hold Suggesting that the special information corresponding to the pending display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means
Determining the display mode of the pending display based on special information corresponding to the pending display,
When changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information subject to the determination by the determination means precedes the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. also change to the display mode of the upper stage (Fig. 101, Fig. 103, Fig. 104)
A gaming machine characterized by:

When there is already a suspended display whose display mode has changed, and the player wishes to change the display mode to a higher-level display mode for that suspended display, the player requests a change in the display mode of a specific suspended display. may wish to do so. However, contrary to the desire of the player, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determining means changes after the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode the player desires to change. Sometimes. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature Q4, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determining means is preceded by the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. is changed to a display mode of a higher stage than the display mode of . Therefore, if, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is displayed after the special information corresponding to the pending display for which the player wishes to change the display mode. Even in the case of change, the suspended display whose display mode is changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the suspended display for which the player wishes to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation is lowered. can be suppressed, and rather, a further sense of expectation can be imparted.

[Feature Q5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q4,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display will change prior to the pending display means changing the display mode of the pending display (FIGS. 89, 90, Figure 100, Figure 105)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature Q5, prior to changing the display mode of the pending display, a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display is changed is executed. It is possible to make the person pay attention and to give a sense of expectation.

[Feature Q6]
The gaming machine according to feature Q5,
The production execution unit
When executing the suggestive effect, depending on the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed by the pending display means to select a suggestive effect to be executed from a plurality of prepared suggestive effects (eighth embodiment to tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature Q6, a plurality of types of suggestive effects are prepared according to the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Since the suggestive effect to be executed is selected from among them, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the pending display, and in addition, before the display mode of the pending display changes, the suggestive effect is displayed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player also for the type of effect to be executed.

<Characteristic group R>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.

[Feature R1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a ball entry section into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined specified number as an upper limit;
determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
pending display means for displaying, in a predetermined display mode, a number of pending displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and for changing the display mode of the displayed pending display;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Execution of a production execution determination process for determining whether or not the production execution condition, which is a condition for executing a predetermined production, is satisfied,
The holding display means
Determining whether or not a display mode change condition, which is a condition for changing the display mode of the pending display, is satisfied;
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the pending display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed (eighth embodiment to tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

In spite of satisfying the effect execution condition and the display mode change condition, if the display mode of the pending display is changed independently of the execution of the predetermined effect, the player is asked to perform the predetermined effect. It is not possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation between the execution and the change in the display mode of the pending display, and it is not possible to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the pending display. In other words, the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the pending display only bring different effects to the player, and these two do not function synergistically.

According to the feature R1, when the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the pending display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed, so that the display mode of the pending display is changed. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation between and, and to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the pending display by using the execution of the predetermined effect. That is, in addition to the effect of executing a predetermined effect such as imparting a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display such as imparting a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency for the subsequent game cycle, By changing the display mode of the pending display after the production of , it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency with respect to the change in the display mode of the pending display, and synergistically improve the amusement of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to feature R1,
The holding display means
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the pending display is not changed despite the execution of the predetermined effect (tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature R2, when the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the pending display is not changed despite the execution of the predetermined effect, so the predetermined effect is executed. It is possible to overturn the player's perception that the display mode of the pending display changes after being displayed, and to add unexpectedness to the game. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the pending display will change after that, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
Equipped with a selection means (effect operation button 24) for the player to select a predetermined pending display,
The holding display means
Along with executing a changeability determination process for determining whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of each displayed pending display,
It is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined pending display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeability determination process (tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature R3, it is possible to create a new game feature such as allowing the player to select the hold display. Further, it is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined pending display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeability determination process. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the display mode will change, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to features R1 to R3,
The display mode of the hold display is
In addition to suggesting the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display satisfies the predetermined condition, a plurality of stages of display modes from high to low are set according to the degree of the possibility, and the hold Suggesting that the special information corresponding to the pending display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means
Determining the display mode of the pending display based on special information corresponding to the pending display,
When changing the display mode of the pending display, the more the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information determined by the determining means later in the displayed pending display, the more the pending display is changed. changing the display mode of the pending display so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of is increased (eighth embodiment and tenth embodiment form)
A gaming machine characterized by:

When the pending display is displayed, the shorter the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the pending display is determined by the determining means, the less the opportunity for the display mode to change. In other words, the pending display corresponding to the special information whose order is first determined by the determining means among the displayed pending displays is determined later by the determining means among the displayed pending displays. The remaining time to be displayed is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information, and the possibility of changing the display mode is low. Therefore, when the display mode of the pending display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the pending display corresponding to the special information that is determined by the determination means first among the displayed pending displays. hope to However, contrary to the wishes of the player, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information determined later by the determination means among the displayed pending displays may change. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature R4, when changing the display mode of the pending display, when changing the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information whose order is determined by the determining means later in the displayed pending display The display mode of the suspension display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the suspension display increases as the display mode of the suspension display changes. Therefore, if, contrary to the desire of the player, the display mode of the pending display that is relatively later in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed pending displays changes (or if the player selects Even if the display mode of the pending display is changed), the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the pending display is increased, so the player's While being able to suppress the fall of expectation, rather, much more expectation can be given.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to features R1 to R3,
The display mode of the hold display is
In addition to suggesting the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display satisfies the predetermined condition, a plurality of stages of display modes from high to low are set according to the degree of the possibility, and the hold Suggesting that the special information corresponding to the pending display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition as the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means
Determining the display mode of the pending display based on special information corresponding to the pending display,
When changing the display mode of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information subject to the determination by the determination means precedes the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. is also changed to a display mode of a higher stage (ninth and tenth embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by:

When there is already a suspended display whose display mode has changed, and the player wishes to change the display mode to a higher-level display mode for that suspended display, the player requests a change in the display mode of a specific suspended display. may wish to do so. However, contrary to the desire of the player, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determining means changes after the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode the player desires to change. Sometimes. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature R5, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determining means precedes the special information corresponding to the pending display whose display mode is to be changed. is changed to a display mode of a higher stage than the display mode of . Therefore, if, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means is displayed after the special information corresponding to the pending display for which the player wishes to change the display mode. Even if it changes (or changes the display mode of the pending display selected by the player), the pending display whose display mode has changed is the display mode of the pending display that the player wishes to change the display mode. Since the display mode is changed to a higher-level display mode, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's sense of expectation, and rather, to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

The inventions of the above feature P group, feature Q group, and feature R group solve the following problems.

Conventionally, the number of games to be played has been indicated to the player by displaying a pending display.

Here, further improvements in technology are desired for the purpose of improving the interest in games.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature S1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
A first ball entry portion (first start port 33) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
A second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion and acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering portion means and
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion Acquired information storage means for storing each of the second special information, which is the special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result;
First command transmitting means (eleventh embodiment S6610, S5402) in
Second command transmission means (eleventh embodiment S6628, S5402 in
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment) that is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information The second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating, is displayed in a different display area of the display means,
Based on the transmitted first command, a first identification information display mode in which the first identification information is changed or stopped, and a display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed (11th display mode) Switching to the first identification information non-display mode, which is the mode in which the demo image is displayed in the embodiment),
Based on the transmitted second command, a second identification information display mode in which the second identification information is changed or stopped, and a display mode in which the second identification information is not displayed (11th A gaming machine characterized by switching between a second identification information non-display mode (a mode in which a demo image is displayed in the embodiment).

According to feature S1, the first command is transmitted based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the second command is transmitted based on the storage of the second special information in the acquired information storage means. sent based on the presence or absence of The display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode based on the transmitted first command, and displays the second identification information based on the transmitted second command. The mode and the second identification information non-display mode are switched. Therefore, in the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in different display areas of the display means, switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode It can be performed based on the presence or absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means in a manner independent of whether or not the second special information is stored in the storage means, and the second identification information display manner and the second identification information display manner. 2 Switching to the identification information non-display mode is performed based on whether or not the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means in a mode independent of whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. be able to. In other words, the display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode in a mode independent of switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode. In addition, switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode is performed in a mode independent of switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode. can be done.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
The display means is
When the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state (transition from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode, or transition from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) is displayed in a display area different from that before the game state transitions (Fig. 120).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature S2, when the game state transitions from the first game state to the second game state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed from before the game state transitions. Since it is displayed in different display areas, the player can easily recognize that the game state has changed from the first game state to the second game state.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S2,
The display means is
When the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state,
The second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) is displayed in the display area where the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) was displayed, and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) is displayed in the display area that has been displayed.

According to the feature S3, when the game state transitions from the first game state to the second game state, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information was displayed, and the second identification information is displayed. Since the first identification information is displayed in the display area where the identification information was displayed, the player can recognize that the game state has changed from the first game state to the second game state. can be done. Furthermore, by displaying the second identification information in the display area where the first identification information was displayed and displaying the first identification information in the display area where the second identification information was displayed, for example, the first identification The information and the second identification information can give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as making the player guess that there has been a change in role in the game, and improve the interest in the game.

[Feature S4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode. It is possible to
A gaming machine characterized by:

The first identification information is identification information for indicating the result of determination based on the first special information. The second identification information is identification information for indicating the result of determination based on the second special information. According to the feature S4, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information in the changing display mode and the second identification information in the changing display mode. On the other hand, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation at the same time about the determination results of the two special information, ie, the first special information and the second special information.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature T1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
A first ball entry portion (first start port 33) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
A second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion and acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering portion means and
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion Acquired information storage means for storing each of the second special information, which is the special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display means (design display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment) that is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information The second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating, is displayed in a different display area of the display means,
When the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state (transition from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode, or transition from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) is displayed differently from before the game state transitions. Display in area (Fig. 120)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature T1, when the game state transitions from the first game state to the second game state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed from before the game state transitions. Since it is displayed in different display areas, the player can easily recognize that the game state has changed from the first game state to the second game state.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
The display means is
When the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state (transition from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode, or transition from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode) teeth,
The second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) is displayed in the display area where the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) was displayed, and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) is displayed in the display area that has been displayed.

According to the characteristic T2, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information was displayed, and the second identification information is displayed. Since the first identification information is displayed in the display area where the identification information was displayed, the player can recognize that the game state has changed from the first game state to the second game state. can be done. Furthermore, by displaying the second identification information in the display area where the first identification information was displayed and displaying the first identification information in the display area where the second identification information was displayed, for example, the first identification The information and the second identification information can give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as making the player guess that there has been a change in role in the game, and improve the interest in the game.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
First command transmission means (11th embodiment S6610, S5402) in the form,
Second command transmitting means (eleventh embodiment S6628, S5402) in the form,
with
The display means is
a first identification information display mode, which is a display mode in which the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment) fluctuates or stops based on the transmitted first command; Switching to a first identification information non-display mode, which is a display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed (a mode in which the demo image in the eleventh embodiment is displayed),
a second identification information display mode, which is a display mode in which the second identification information (the second liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment) fluctuates or stops based on the transmitted second command; A game machine characterized by switching between a second identification information non-display mode, which is a display mode in which the second identification information is not displayed (a mode in which the demo image in the eleventh embodiment is displayed).

According to feature T3, the first command is transmitted based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the second command is transmitted based on the storage of the second special information in the acquired information storage means. sent based on the presence or absence of The display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode based on the transmitted first command, and displays the second identification information based on the transmitted second command. The mode and the second identification information non-display mode are switched. Therefore, in the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in different display areas of the display means, switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode It can be performed based on the presence or absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means in a manner independent of whether or not the second special information is stored in the storage means, and the second identification information display manner and the second identification information display manner. 2 Switching to the identification information non-display mode is performed based on whether or not the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means in a mode independent of whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. be able to. In other words, the display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode in a mode independent of switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode. In addition, switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode is performed in a mode independent of switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode. can be done.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The display means can simultaneously display the first identification information in a changing display mode and the second identification information in a changing display mode (simultaneous change in the eleventh embodiment). machine)
A gaming machine characterized by:

The first identification information is identification information for indicating the result of determination based on the first special information. The second identification information is identification information for indicating the result of determination based on the second special information. According to feature T4, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information in the changing display mode and the second identification information in the changing display mode. On the other hand, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation at the same time about the determination results of the two special information, ie, the first special information and the second special information.

<Characteristic group U>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
special information storage means for storing first special information and second special information;
According to the state of the game, first identification information based on the first special information (first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) and second identification information based on the second special information ( A first display area (main display area or sub-display area) for displaying either one of the second liquid crystal pattern), and a second display for displaying the other of the first identification information and the second identification information. a display means having an area (main display area or sub-display area);
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
The display state of the first display area is changed to a different display state based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage means. (in the eleventh embodiment, the display state for displaying the pattern for the liquid crystal is shifted to the display state for displaying the demonstration moving image), and
The display state of the second display area is changed to a different display state based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means. (In the eleventh embodiment, the display state in which the liquid crystal pattern is displayed is shifted to the display state in which the demonstration moving image is displayed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature U1, the display means changes the display state of the first display area based on whether special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage means. While shifting to a different display state, the display state of the second display area is displayed differently based on whether special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means. Since the state is changed, the first display area and the second display area can be independently changed to different display states. Therefore, regarding the transition of the display state of the first display area, there is a configuration that correlates with the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area, and the transition of the display state of the second display area is performed in the first display area. Compared to a configuration that correlates with the special information corresponding to the displayed identification information, information regarding the presence or absence of special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in each display area is clearly presented to the player. be able to.

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to feature U1,
The display means is
The special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area (main display area) changes from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means. Triggered by this, the display state of the first display area is changed from a display state in which the identification information is displayed (a display state in which the liquid crystal pattern is displayed) to a display state in which the identification information is not displayed (a demonstration video is displayed). display state).

According to feature U2, the display means changes from a state in which the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage means to a state in which it is not stored in the special information storage means. Triggered by this, the display state of the first display area is changed from the display state in which the identification information is displayed to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the special information has changed from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
The display means is
The special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area (sub-display area) changes from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means. Triggered by this, the display state of the second display area is changed from the display state in which the identification information is displayed (the display state in which the liquid crystal pattern is displayed) to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed (the demonstration video is displayed). display state).

According to feature U3, the display means changes from a state in which the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means to a state in which it is not stored in the special information storage means. Triggered by this, the display state of the second display area is changed from the display state in which the identification information is displayed to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the special information has changed from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
The display means is
When the game state shifts to a predetermined state, the identification information (first liquid crystal pattern or second liquid crystal pattern) displayed in the first display region (main display region) is changed to the second display region ( The identification information (first liquid crystal pattern or second liquid crystal pattern) displayed in the second display region (sub display region) is displayed in the first display region (main display region). ), a game machine characterized by displaying

According to the feature U4, the display means displays the identification information displayed in the first display area in the second display area when the game state shifts to the predetermined state, and displays the identification information in the second display area. Since the identification information that has been displayed is displayed in the first display area, the player can be made to recognize that the game state has changed. Further, the identification information displayed in the first display area is displayed in the second display area, and the identification information displayed in the second display area is displayed in the first display area. As for the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as making the player guess that there has been a change in the role in the game, and improve the interest in the game.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode. It is possible to
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature U5, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information in the changing display mode and the second identification information in the changing display mode. On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to both the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time.

<Characteristic group V>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A gaming machine comprising display means,
The display means (symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment)
having a first display area (main display area MA) and a second display area (first sub-area SA1),
The display state of the first display area (main display area MA) is obtained by the first information (entering the game ball into the first start port 33) in the first game state (low frequency support mode). special information), and in the second game state (high-frequency support mode), based on the second information (special information acquired by entering the game ball into the second start port 34) A gaming machine characterized by changing

According to feature V1, the display means has a first display area and a second display area, and the display state of the first display area is changed in the first game state based on the first information. In the second game state, the display state is changed based on the second information. Therefore, for example, when the display state of the first display area changes before and after a predetermined game cycle, the player can However, it is possible to make the player guess that there was a change in the game state before and after the predetermined game round, and to give the player a sense of anticipation and intonation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
In the game area, detection means for detecting the game ball (first start port 33 and second start port 34);
with
A gaming machine, wherein the first information and the second information are information acquired when the detection means detects the game ball.

According to the feature V2, the first information and the second information are information acquired when the detection means detects the game ball, so the display state of the first display area is the same as the game state. In addition to changing according to the change (change from the first game state to the second game state or change from the second game state to the first game state), the number of game balls entering the ball entering section It can be changed by the presence or absence of entry of a ball and the timing of entry of a game ball into the entry part.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
The display means is
The display state of the second display area (first sub-area SA1) is changed to the second information (entering the game ball into the second start port 34) in the first game state (low-frequency support mode). special information acquired by), and in the second game state (high-frequency support mode), the first information (special information acquired by entering the game ball into the first start port 33 A game machine characterized by changing based on information).

According to feature V3, the display means changes the display state of the second display area based on the second information in the first game state and based on the first information in the second game state. For example, if the display state of the second display area changes before and after a predetermined number of games, the player will be notified that there is no change in the game state before and after the predetermined number of games. It is possible to make the player guess what happened, and to give the player a sense of expectation and intonation. In addition, since such a change in display state is executed in two display areas, the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

<Characteristic group W>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature W1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a ball entry section into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
a determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game cycle is defined as a period in which the game cycle motion is terminated after the game cycle motion for informing the result of the determination is started, and the game cycle motion is completed after the game cycle motion is started. Control means for controlling the execution of the game round and controlling the variable time when the time until the game ends is the variable time;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
While executing a specific game round which is a game round to be executed in a specific game state (high probability mode game state in the eleventh embodiment), it is the last specific game round to be executed before the end of the specific game state. A predetermined predetermined time ( 12 seconds in the eleventh embodiment).

According to the feature W1, since the fluctuation time in at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after starting the final specific game round is set to a predetermined time, immediately after starting the final specific game round. It is possible to set in advance control considering the variation time of at least two game rounds to be executed. For example, in at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round, an effect whose execution time is set in advance can be executed.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to feature W1,
a first ball-entering portion (first starting port 33) as the ball-entering portion;
a second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) as the ball entry portion;
with
The information acquisition means acquires special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering portion. get information,
The determination means determines the first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, and the second special information when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion Determining whether the second special information, which is the special information acquired by doing, satisfies a predetermined condition,
The control means is
Controlling the variation time in the game round for the first ball-entering portion (the game round for the first starting port in the eleventh embodiment), which is the game round based on the game ball entering the first ball-entering portion,
controlling the variation time in the game round for the second ball-entering portion (the game round for the second starting port in the eleventh embodiment), which is the game round based on the game ball entering the second ball-entering portion;
During the period in which either the first ball-entering part game time or the second ball-entering part game time is executed, either the first ball-entering part game time or the second ball-entering part game time It is possible to perform parallel execution processing that is processing to execute either or the other (simultaneous variation machine in the 11th embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature W2, in a gaming machine capable of performing parallel execution processing, the fluctuation time in at least two game rounds executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round is changed to a predetermined time. set. In the case of a gaming machine that performs parallel execution processing, during the period in which either the first ball-entering unit game round or the second ball-entering unit game round is executed, the first ball-entering unit game round or the second ball-entering unit game round is executed. Since either one of the part game rounds may be executed, even if the fluctuation time in at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round is set to a predetermined predetermined time. , when the time from the start of the first game round to the end of the second game round among the two game rounds is shorter than the total time of the two game rounds of which the fluctuation time is a predetermined time; There is However, as the time from the start of the first game round to the end of the second game round among the two game rounds, at least one game round whose fluctuation time is a predetermined time is secured. It is possible to That is, as the time from the start to the end of the two game rounds, it is possible to set in advance the control considering at least the time of one game round whose fluctuation time is a predetermined time.

[Feature W3]
The gaming machine according to feature W2,
The control means is
When the parallel execution process is executed and the specified condition is satisfied (when the result image is displayed for a preset 10 seconds in the eleventh embodiment),
Of the at least two game rounds executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round, for at least one game round, the predetermined length of time has elapsed since the game round was started. end the game round even before the
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature W3, when the parallel execution process is executed and the specified conditions are satisfied, at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specific game time Of these, at least one game round is ended even before a predetermined length of time has passed since the game round was started, so after the final specific game round is started Unnecessary time can be omitted as execution time of at least two game rounds to be executed most recently.

[Feature W4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3,
The determination means has, as determination modes, at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of satisfying the predetermined condition is relatively high and low,
The game machine, wherein the specific game state is a state in which the determination means is in the high probability mode.

According to feature W4, at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after starting the final specific game round which is the last specific game round to be executed before the end of the game state in which the determination means is the high probability mode. A time-sensitive control can be preset. For example, in at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after starting the last specific game round to be executed before the end of the high-probability mode, an effect whose execution time is set in advance can be executed.

[Feature W5]
The gaming machine according to feature W4,
The determination means limits the number of times of the specific game times to be continuously executed in the specific game state in which the high probability mode is set to a specified number, and the specific game times to be continuously performed is the specified number. A game machine, comprising high-probability mode game number limiting means for terminating the specific game state based on the fact that the game machine has reached

According to the feature W5, the fluctuation time of at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after starting the last specific game round among the specific game rounds whose number of times to be continuously executed is limited to a specified number is taken into consideration. Controls can be preset.

[Feature W6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W5,
The second ball entry portion is divided into a non-accepting state (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is closed) in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot be entered, and a state in which a game ball enters more than the non-accepting state. a switching means capable of switching to an easy receiving state (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is opened);
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the acceptance state is more likely than in the first mode, as control modes for controlling the switching means and for controlling the switching means. a switching control means having
with
A game machine, wherein the specific game state is a state in which the switching control means is in the second mode (high-frequency support mode).

According to the feature W6, at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specific game time which is the last specific game time to be executed before the end of the game state in which the switching control means is the second mode. It is possible to preset the control considering the fluctuation time. For example, in at least two game rounds to be executed immediately after the start of the last specific game round to be executed before the end of the second mode, an effect whose execution time is set in advance can be executed.

[Feature W7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means is given to the player in at least the first game round to be executed after the final specific game round (game round of the 120th game round after probability variation in the eleventh embodiment) is started. Executes an effect that notifies information about benefits (displays a result image)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic W7, at least in the first game round to be executed after the start of the final specific game round, an effect for notifying information about the privilege given to the player is executed, so that the player can enjoy the given privilege. It becomes easier to grasp the In addition, in this gaming machine, in which the variation time in at least two game rounds executed immediately after the start of the final specific game round is set to a predetermined time, information regarding the privilege granted to the player is notified. Since the effect is executed at least in the first game round to be executed after the start of the final specific game round, the effect for notifying the information on the privilege given to the player is executed as an effect whose execution time is set in advance. be able to.

<Characteristic group X>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature X1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
A first ball entry portion (first start port 33) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
A second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion and acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering portion means and
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion determination means for determining whether or not the second special information, which is the special information, satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game cycle is defined as a period in which the game cycle motion is terminated after the game cycle motion for informing the result of the determination is started, and the game cycle motion is completed after the game cycle motion is started. Control means for controlling the execution of the game round and controlling the variable time when the time until the game ends is the variable time;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
Controlling the variation time in the game round for the first ball-entering portion (the game round for the first starting port in the eleventh embodiment), which is the game round based on the game ball entering the first ball-entering portion,
controlling the variation time in the game round for the second ball-entering portion (the game round for the second starting port in the eleventh embodiment), which is the game round based on the game ball entering the second ball-entering portion;
During the period in which either the first ball-entering part game time or the second ball-entering part game time is executed, either the first ball-entering part game time or the second ball-entering part game time It is possible to perform parallel execution processing that is processing to execute either or the other (simultaneous variation machine in the eleventh embodiment),
When the production execution means executes a predetermined production, a plurality of game rounds (the number of game rounds executed after probability variation in the eleventh embodiment is the 121st and 122nd game rounds) that are executed in succession or in parallel A first variation time is set to a time (12 seconds in the eleventh embodiment) that is longer than the time (10 seconds in the eleventh embodiment) required to execute the predetermined effect (the effect of displaying a result image). A gaming machine characterized by executing variable time setting processing.

According to feature X1, in the case of a gaming machine that performs parallel execution processing, during the period in which either the first ball-entering unit game round or the second ball-entering unit game round is executed, the first ball-entering unit game There is a case where the other of the times or the game times for the second ball entry section is executed. Therefore, during a period in which a predetermined effect is being executed by the effect executing means, for example, the game cycle for the first ball-entering unit ends and a new game cycle for the first ball-entering unit is started, or the second ball-entering unit is started. In some cases, the club game round ends and a new second ball-entering club game round is started. Hereinafter, the timing of starting a game cycle and the timing of ending a game cycle will also be referred to as a "break of a game cycle".

Here, if a "break in the game cycle" occurs during execution of a predetermined effect, there is a risk that the effect being executed may give a complicated impression to the player. In addition, there is a possibility that the player cannot concentrate on the judgment result of the judging means in each game round.

According to feature X1, when the effect executing means executes a predetermined effect, the fluctuation time of a plurality of game rounds executed continuously or in parallel is set to a time equal to or longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect. Since it is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in game rounds during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
The control unit
When the effect execution means executes a predetermined effect, as the first variable time setting process, two game times (the number of game times after probability variation in the eleventh embodiment) that are executed in succession or in parallel (121st and 122nd game rounds) is set to a time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect.

According to the feature X2, in a gaming machine capable of executing parallel execution processing, while suppressing the occurrence of breaks in game rounds during a period in which a predetermined effect is being executed, fluctuations greater than the time required to execute a predetermined effect The number of game times set in time can be minimized.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The control unit
The number of executions of game rounds set to a time equal to or longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect is set in advance to a predetermined number of executions (twice in the eleventh embodiment),
At the time when the effect executing means finishes execution of a predetermined effect (effect of displaying a result image), the number of game rounds set to a time equal to or longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect is the predetermined execution. If it is less than the number of times (less than 2 times in the eleventh embodiment),
A second variable time different from the first variable time setting process (processing for setting the variable time to 12 seconds) for the game round to be started after the performance executing means finishes executing the predetermined effect. A gaming machine characterized by executing setting processing.

According to the feature X3, when the effect executing means finishes executing the predetermined effect, the number of game times set to the time required for executing the predetermined effect or more is less than the predetermined number of times of execution. a second variable time setting process different from the first variable time setting process is executed for a game turn started after the effect executing means finishes execution of the predetermined effect; It is possible to avoid unnecessary execution of game rounds set to a time longer than the time required for the execution of the game. As a result, after the performance executing means has finished executing the predetermined performance, the variable time is set to be shorter than the time required to execute the predetermined performance, or the variable time is randomly set to be long or short. It is also possible to add intonation to the game, and various control methods can be adopted to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature X4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X3,
The determination means has, as determination modes, at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of satisfying the predetermined condition is relatively high and low,
The game machine is characterized in that the effect executing means executes the predetermined effect (effect of displaying a result image) with the termination of the high-probability mode as a trigger.

According to the characteristic X4, it is possible to suppress occurrence of break in the game cycle during execution of a predetermined effect triggered by the end of the high-probability mode.

[Feature X5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X4,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined effect is an effect (effect of displaying a result image) for informing the player of information relating to a privilege granted to the player.

According to the feature X5, the predetermined effect is an effect for informing the player of the information regarding the privilege given to the player, so that the player can easily grasp the given privilege. In addition, the information on the given privilege is of great interest to the player. According to the feature X5, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of break in the game cycle during the execution of the effect of informing the player of the information of which the player is highly interested.

<Characteristic group Y>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
In the game area, a first detection means (first start port 33) for detecting the game ball;
In the game area, a second detection means (second start port 34) for detecting the game ball;
a first information acquiring means for acquiring first special information based on the detection of the game ball by the first detecting means;
a second information acquiring means for acquiring second special information based on the detection of the game ball by the second detecting means;
determining means for determining whether the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and determining whether the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition;
Display means (design display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
It has at least three displayable areas (main display area MA, first sub-display area SA1, second sub-display area in the eleventh embodiment) that can display identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the special information. area SA2),
first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, in the first displayable area of the at least three displayable areas; along with displaying
second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the second special information, in the first displayable area of the at least three displayable areas; displayed in a second viewable area different from
Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (based on transition to high-frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in a displayable area different from the displayable area displayed before the predetermined change condition is satisfied. game machine.

According to feature Y1, the display means has at least three displayable areas capable of displaying identification information, and at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed based on a predetermined change condition. Since it is displayed in a displayable area different from the displayable area displayed before the predetermined change condition is established, for example, when the game state is changed, the displayable area for displaying the first identification information is changed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the state of the game has changed. Also, the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed by selecting arbitrary two displayable areas from the three displayable areas. As an example, depending on the state of the game, the displayable area where the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed is changed, or a display different from the identification information is displayed in one of the three displayable areas (for example, , effect image display), the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed in the remaining two displayable areas.

[Feature Y2]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode. It is possible to
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature Y2, since the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information in the changing display mode and the second identification information in the changing display mode, the player can On the other hand, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation at the same time about the determination results of the two special information, ie, the first special information and the second special information.

[Feature Y3]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2,
The predetermined change condition is transition from the first game state to the second game state (transition from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode, or transition from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature Y3, by changing the displayable area for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, it is possible to make the player guess that the state of the game has changed. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, by changing the displayable area for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, it is possible to apply a suggestive effect, which is a effect that suggests something to the player. Thus, based on the transition of the game state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in a displayable area different from the displayable area displayed before the game state transitions. The display processing can be used for various effects, and the range of expression of effects executed by the gaming machine can be greatly expanded.

<Feature Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area in response to an operation of the operation means by a player;
a ball entry section into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
display means for displaying guidance displays (guidance displays GD1 and GD2 in <aspect 9> of the eleventh embodiment) that are guidance regarding the operation of the operation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the determination result (lottery result of the jackpot lottery) by the determination means, the content of the guidance in the guidance display is controlled (controls whether to display the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature Z1, the display means controls the content of guidance in the guidance display based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means, so that the guidance content in the guidance display reflects the judgment result of the judgment means. can be As a result, by controlling the content of the guidance in the guidance display, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the result of determination by the determination means.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1,
The display means is
A gaming machine characterized by controlling a display mode of the guidance display (the display color of the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2) based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

According to feature Z2, the display means controls the display mode of the guidance display based on the result of determination by the determination means, so the display mode of the guidance display should reflect the determination result of the determination means. can be done. As a result, by controlling the display mode of the guide display, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the result of determination by the determination means.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
The display means is
Based on the result of the determination by the determining means, the color of the guidance display (guidance display GD1 and guidance display GD2) is controlled as the display mode of the guidance display (to control whether to be blue or red).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature Z3, the display means controls the color of the guidance display as the display mode of the guidance display based on the result of determination by the determination means. can be made into As a result, by controlling the color of the guidance display, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the result of determination by the determination means.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
The gaming machine, wherein the guidance display is a display that guides the operation method of the operation means that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature Z4, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the result of determination by the determination means by using the guide display that guides the operation method of the operation means that is advantageous to the player.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
In the first game state, when a predetermined command (result display end command in the eleventh embodiment <aspect 12>) is received, specific processing based on the predetermined command is executed (display of the result image end) a gaming machine comprising a specific process executing means,
The specific process executing means is
The predetermined command is not received in a second game state (a state in which a game round is not being executed) in which the game state is different from the first game state (a state in which a game round is being executed). A game machine characterized by executing the specific processing in spite of the fact.

According to the feature αA1, the specific process executing means executes a specific process based on the predetermined command when receiving a predetermined command in the first game state, and the game state is changed from the first game state. In a different second game state, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command has not been received. Therefore, in the second game state, the condition for setting the predetermined command as the transmission command is satisfied. Certain actions can be performed even if they are not or are unlikely to be met.

[Feature αA2]
The gaming machine according to feature αA1,
The specific process executing means is
The predetermined command is received when the game state transitions from the first game state (a state in which a game round is being executed) to the above-described second game state (a state in which a game round is not being executed). A game machine characterized by executing the specific process even though the game machine is not installed.

According to the feature αA2, when the game state transitions from the first game state to the second game state, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command is not received. If the condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied in the game state, or if it is unlikely that the condition will be satisfied, and, for example, if a specific process is not executed in the first game state Even so, a specific process can be executed with the transition from the first game state to the second game state.

[Feature αA3]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a ball entry section into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
A gaming machine comprising
The first game state is a state in which the special information is stored in the obtained information storage means,
The second gaming state is a state in which the special information is not stored in the obtained information storage means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature αA3, in a state where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, when a prescribed command is received, specific processing based on the prescribed command is executed, and special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In a state where no information is stored, a specific process is executed even though a predetermined command has not been received. A specific process can be executed even if the conditions set as a transmission command are not met or are unlikely to be met. For example, when the condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not met in a state where the game ball is not launched toward the game area, or even when the possibility of being met is low, a specific process is executed. be able to.

[Feature αA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA3,
Equipped with display means capable of displaying a specific image (result image),
The specific process executing means, when receiving the predetermined command, executes, as the specific process, a process of terminating the display of the specific image displayed by the display means. machine.

According to the feature αA4, when the display means displays a specific image, the condition for setting the predetermined command as the transmission command in the second game state is not satisfied or may be satisfied. Even when it is low, the display means can terminate the display of a particular image. Therefore, when it is not desirable to display a specific image in the second game state, display of the specific image can be terminated even if the predetermined command is not received.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry section (general winning opening 32, second starting opening 34, big winning opening 36a, V winning opening 48 in the twelfth embodiment) into which game balls circulating in the game area can enter,
game state transition means for shifting from a first game state (low-probability mode) to a second game state (high-probability mode) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering portion;
Information corresponding to the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the end of the second game state (high probability mode) (remaining obtained ball number indication image CP in the twelfth embodiment) is displayed. display means (symbol display device 41);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αB1, since information corresponding to the expected number of payouts is displayed, the player can grasp the number of game balls that can be acquired before the second game state ends. Also, compared to, for example, a configuration that displays the remaining number of executable jackpot lotteries until the end of the second game state, how much expectation can be given to the second game state? Since the player can be made to clearly recognize whether or not, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Feature αB2]
The gaming machine according to feature αB1,
When the expected number of payouts increases, the display means displays information corresponding to the number of expected payouts being displayed (remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 172(b))), A gaming machine characterized in that the information is changed to the information corresponding to the expected payout number after increasing the number by the increased number as the upper limit (remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP (Fig. 172(c)) in the twelfth embodiment). .

According to the feature αB2, the information corresponding to the expected payout number being displayed is changed to the information corresponding to the expected payout number after increasing the incremented number as the upper limit. It is possible to make the player recognize that the number of game balls that can be obtained in the first game has increased, and to improve the player's expectation for the second game state.

[Feature αB3]
The gaming machine according to feature αB2,
When the scheduled payout number increases, the display means displays increase suggestion information (remaining obtained ball number increase suggestion image CPB in the twelfth embodiment) suggesting that the expected payout number has increased, and Information corresponding to the number of scheduled payouts being displayed (remaining acquired ball number suggestive image CP in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 172(b))) is displayed after increasing the number of increases suggested by the increase suggestion information. A gaming machine characterized in that the information corresponding to the expected number of payouts (remaining obtained ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172(c)) in the twelfth embodiment) is changed.

According to the feature αB3, since the increase suggestive information is displayed, the player can clearly recognize the increased number of game balls that can be acquired before the second game state is completed, and the second game state is completed. It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the game state.

[Feature αB4]
A gaming machine according to feature αB2 or feature αB3,
The display means displays the scheduled payout number being displayed at a timing different from the timing at which it is determined that the expected payout number has increased (the timing at which the game ball enters the V winning hole after winning the jackpot). A gaming machine, wherein the corresponding information is changed to information corresponding to the expected payout number after being increased.

According to the feature αB4, the information corresponding to the expected payout number being displayed is changed at a timing different from the timing at which it is determined that the expected payout number has increased. It is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation such as at what timing the information corresponding to the number of expected payouts being displayed will be changed.

[Feature αB5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αB2 to αB3,
The display means displays the information corresponding to the planned payout quantity being displayed as one unit for an increase of a predetermined number (500 in the twelfth embodiment) or more, and displays the information corresponding to the planned payout quantity after the increase. A gaming machine characterized by changing to information.

According to the feature αB5, the information corresponding to the planned payout quantity being displayed is changed to the information corresponding to the planned payout quantity after the increase, with an increase of a predetermined number or more as one unit. You can improve your expectations.

[Feature αB6]
The gaming machine according to feature αB4,
When the information corresponding to the scheduled payout quantity being displayed is equal to or less than a second predetermined number (zero in the twelfth embodiment), the display means provides information corresponding to the planned payout quantity being displayed. is changed to information corresponding to the expected payout number after increasing the number less than the predetermined number (500).

According to feature αB6, when the number of information corresponding to the number of scheduled payouts being displayed is equal to or less than the second predetermined number, the information corresponding to the number of scheduled payouts being displayed is increased to the number less than the predetermined number. Since the information is changed to the information corresponding to the later planned payout quantity, the information corresponding to the planned payout quantity being displayed is less than the second prescribed quantity and the player's sense of expectation has decreased, so that the player's expectation is less than the prescribed quantity. Even an increase in the number of scheduled payouts can give a great sense of expectation.

[Feature αB7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB6,
In the second game state, when game balls are continuously shot at a constant shooting intensity at regular intervals (0.6 second intervals), the number of shot game balls (12th embodiment) The gaming machine is constructed so that the number of game balls (three in the twelfth embodiment) entering the ball entering portion (three in the twelfth embodiment) is constant.

According to the feature αB7, when game balls are continuously shot at a constant launch intensity at regular intervals, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion in the number of shot game balls is Since it is configured to be constant, it is possible to match the number of game balls actually paid out before the end of the second game state with the expected number of game balls to be paid out.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the eleventh and twelfth embodiments.

[Feature αC1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
a ball entry section into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
Determination means for executing determination processing (big hit lottery) based on the special information;
When a predetermined condition (in the twelfth embodiment, winning the 2R type 1 jackpot in the jackpot lottery and the game ball entering the V winning port 48) is established in the first game state (low probability mode) In addition, the first game state is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode), and the number of times of the determination process executed after shifting to the second game state is a specified number (in the twelfth embodiment 120 times), transition means for transitioning from the second game state to the first game state;
display means for displaying information (in the twelfth embodiment, an image CP suggesting the number of remaining acquired balls) based on the remaining number of determinations, which is the remaining number of times of the determination process that can be executed until the specified number of times is reached;
increasing means for increasing the number of remaining determinations when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second game state;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means continues without changing the information based on the remaining number of determinations being displayed to the information based on the increased number of remaining determinations even when the number of remaining determinations increases. A gaming machine characterized in that it may display

According to the feature αC1, even when the number of remaining determinations increases, the information based on the number of remaining determinations being displayed is continuously displayed without being changed to the information based on the number of remaining determinations after the increase. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the actual number of judgments remaining may be greater than the number of judgments remaining displayed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
When the number of remaining determinations increases, the display means displays information based on the number of remaining determinations being displayed at a timing different from the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second game state, A gaming machine characterized in that information is changed based on the number of remaining determinations after the increase.

According to the feature αC2, the information based on the number of remaining determinations being displayed is changed to the information based on the increased number of remaining determinations at a timing different from the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game, and to provide the player with a new sense of expectation such as at what timing the number of remaining judgments will increase.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
The display means, as the information based on the remaining number of determinations, information corresponding to the scheduled number of payouts, which is the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out until the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number of times (twelfth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that it displays a remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP) in the form.

According to the feature αC3, information corresponding to the number of game balls scheduled to be put out until the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number is displayed, so that the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number of times. The player can grasp the number of game balls that can be obtained by the time the second game state ends. Also, since the player can clearly recognize how much he/she can expect from the second game state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature αC4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3,
In the second game state, when game balls are continuously shot at a constant shooting intensity at regular intervals (0.6 second intervals), the number of shot game balls (12th embodiment) The gaming machine is constructed so that the number of game balls (three in the twelfth embodiment) entering the ball entering portion (three in the twelfth embodiment) is constant.

According to the feature αC4, when the game balls are continuously shot at a constant shooting intensity at regular intervals, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion in the number of the shot game balls is Since it is configured to be constant, it is possible to match the number of game balls actually paid out before the end of the second game state with the expected number of game balls to be paid out.

The inventions of the feature groups S to Z and the features αA to αC solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further improvements in technology in order to increase the interest in games.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in the above feature group A to feature Z group and feature group αA to feature αC may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; and information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section;
a gaming machine comprising acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by said information acquiring means when a game ball enters said starting ball entering section.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each form described in the summary column of the invention are used to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 25a... Touch sensor 25b... Weight button 25c... Variable resistor 26... Game ball launch button 30... Game board 31... Guide rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32 ...General winning opening 33...First starting opening 34...Second starting opening 34a...Electric accessory 34b...Electric accessory driving unit 35...Through gate 36...Variable winning Device 36a... Large winning opening 36b... Open/close door 36c... Variable winning driving unit 37... Special figure unit 37a... First result display unit (first symbol display unit)
37b... Second result display section (second pattern display section)
37c... First reservation display section 37d... Second reservation display section 38... Normal figure unit 39... Round display section 40... Variable display unit 41... Symbol display device 41a... Display surface 41aL...Display area 41aS...Display area 42...Peg 43...Out port 45...Main display unit 46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 48...V prize opening 48a... Open/close door 48b... Open/close door driving unit 51... First control unit 52... Second control unit 53... Third control unit 54... Tank 55... Tank rail 56 ...Case rail 60...Main controller 61...Main control board 62...Main side MPU
63... Main side ROM
64...Main side RAM
63a... Success/failure table storage area 63b... Distribution table storage area 63c... Reach judgment table storage area 63d... Variable time table storage area 63e... Stop result table storage area 63f... Command Information storage area 64a... Buffer for lottery counter 64b... Reservation information storage area 64c... Electrician reservation area 64d... Various counter areas 64e... Various flag storage areas 64f... First judgment processing result Storage area 67a...Various detection sensors 70...Payout control device 71...Payout device 80...Discharge control device 81...Game ball launching mechanism 85...Power supply device 86...Power failure monitoring circuit 90... Audio emission control device 91... Audio emission control board 92... Sound and light side MPU
93...Sound and light side ROM
93a... Production pattern table storage area 93b... Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94... Sound and light side RAM
94a... Various flag storage areas 94b... Various counter areas 94c... Lottery counter areas 96... RTC
100... Display control device 101... Display control board 102... Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104...Work RAM
106...Character ROM
107...Video RAM
PA... Game area PC... Winning counter area AE... Execution area Ra... First reservation area Rb... Second reservation area Dm11 to Dm14, Dm21 to Dm24... Reservation display Sync1.. First synchronous display area Sync2...Second synchronous display area MA...Main display area SA1...First sub-display area SA2...Second sub-display area Ds1...First reserved display area Ds2 ...second reserved display area

Claims (3)

A gaming machine comprising display means,
The display means is
having a first display area and a second display area;
A game characterized in that the display state of the first display area is changed based on the first information in the first game state, and is changed based on the second information in the second game state. machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
detection means for detecting the game ball in the game area;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the first information and the second information are information acquired when the detection means detects the game ball. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The display means is
changing the display state of the second display area in the first game state based on the second information, and changing the display state in the second game state based on the first information; Characteristic game machine.

Images